Scripture · Sanskrit Bible with the King James Version · the Pāli Canon

Search Scripture Search

Monks’ Rules Analysis 130 भिक्खुविभङ्ग 130

Chapter: 123456789101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051525354555657585960616263646566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112113114115116117118119120121122123124125126127128129130131132133134135136137138139140141142143144145146147148149150151152153154155156157158159160161162163164165166167168169170171172173174175176177178179180181182183184185186187188189190191192193194195196197198199200201202203204205206207208209210211212213214215216217218219220221

1. Paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpada

Pāli in Devanagari; under each word its Roman pronunciation, syllable by syllable (ṃ = nasal hum). Tap a Pāli word for its meaning (PTS Pāli-English Dictionary); tap again to open it in the Pāli dictionary.

Verse: 12345678910111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364656667686970717273747576777879808182838485868788899091929394959697989910010110210310410510610710810911011111211311411511611711811912012112212312412512612712812913013113213313413513613713813914014114214314414514614714814915015115215315415515615715815916016116216316416516616716816917017117217317417517617717817918018118218318418518618718818919019119219319419519619719819920020120220320420520620720820921021121221321421521621721821922022122222322422522622722822923023123223323423523623723823924024124224324424524624724824925025125225325425525625725825926026126226326426526626726826927027127227327427527627727827928028128228328428528628728828929029129229329429529629729829930030130230330430530630730830931031131231331431531631731831932032132232332432532632732832933033133233333433533633733833934034134234334434534634734834935035135235335435535635735835936036136236336436536636736836937037137237337437537637737837938038138238338438538638738838939039139239339439539639739839940040140240340440540640740840941041141241341441541641741841942042142242342442542642742842943043143243343443543643743843944044144244344444544644744844945045145245345445545645745845946046146246346446546646746846947047147247347447547647747847948048148248348448548648748848949049149249349449549649749849950050150250350450550650750850951051151251351451551651751851952052152252352452552652752852953053153253353453553653753853954054154254354454554654754854955055155255355455555655755855956056156256356456556656756856957057157257357457557657757857958058158258358458558658758858959059159259359459559659759859960060160260360460560660760860961061161261361461561661761861962062162262362462562662762862963063163263363463563663763863964064164264364464564664764864965065165265365465565665765865966066166266366466566666766866967067167267367467567667767867968068168268368468568668768868969069169269369469569669769869970070170270370470570670770870971071171271371471571671771871972072172272372472572672772872973073173273373473573673773873974074174274374474574674774874975075175275375475575675775875976076176276376476576676776876977077177277377477577677777877978078178278378478578678778878979079179279379479579679779879980080180280380480580680780880981081181281381481581681781881982082182282382482582682782882983083183283383483583683783883984084184284384484584684784884985085185285385485585685785885986086186286386486586686786886987087187287387487587687787887988088188288388488588688788888989089189289389489589689789889990090190290390490590690790890991091191291391491591691791891992092192292392492592692792892993093193293393493593693793893994094194294394494594694794894995095195295395495595695795895996096196296396496596696796896997097197297397497597697797897998098198298398498598698798898999099199299399499599699799899910001001100210031004100510061007100810091010101110121013101410151016101710181019102010211022102310241025102610271028102910301031103210331034103510361037103810391040104110421043104410451046104710481049105010511052105310541055105610571058105910601061106210631064106510661067106810691070107110721073107410751076107710781079108010811082108310841085108610871088108910901091109210931094109510961097109810991100110111021103110411051106110711081109111011111112111311141115111611171118111911201121112211231124112511261127112811291130113111321133113411351136113711381139114011411142114311441145114611471148114911501151115211531154115511561157115811591160116111621163116411651166116711681169117011711172117311741175117611771178117911801181118211831184118511861187118811891190119111921193119411951196119711981199120012011202120312041205120612071208120912101211121212131214121512161217121812191220122112221223122412251226122712281229123012311232123312341235123612371238123912401241124212431244124512461247124812491250125112521253125412551256125712581259126012611262126312641265126612671268126912701271127212731274127512761277127812791280128112821283128412851286128712881289129012911292129312941295129612971298129913001301130213031304130513061307130813091310131113121313131413151316131713181319132013211322132313241325132613271328132913301331133213331334133513361337133813391340134113421343134413451346134713481349135013511352135313541355135613571358135913601361136213631364136513661367136813691370137113721373137413751376137713781379138013811382138313841385138613871388138913901391139213931394139513961397139813991400140114021403140414051406140714081409141014111412141314141415141614171418141914201421142214231424142514261427142814291430143114321433143414351436143714381439144014411442144314441445144614471448144914501451145214531454145514561457145814591460146114621463146414651466 · Hide pronunciation

1. 1

   थेरवादthe·ra·vā·da विनयvi·na·ya

   Theravāda Vinaya

   Theravāda Collection on Monastic Law

2. 2

   महाविभङ्गma·hā·vi·bhaṅ·ga

   Mahāvibhaṅga

   The Great Analysis

3. 3

   पाराजिककण्डpā·rā·ji·ka·kaṇ·ḍa

   Pārājikakaṇḍa

   The chapter on offenses entailing expulsion

4. 4

   1। पठमपाराजिकसिक्खापदpa·ṭha·ma·pā·rā·ji·ka·sik·khā·pa·da

   1. Paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpada

   The training rule on sexual intercourse

5. 5

   नमोna·mo तस्सtas·sa भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अरहतोa·ra·ha·to सम्मासम्बुद्धस्स।sam·mā·sam·bud·dhas·sa

   Namo tassa Bhagavato Arahato Sammāsambuddhassa.

   Homage to the Buddha, the Perfected One, the fully Awakened One

6. 6

   वेरञ्जकण्डve·rañ·ja·kaṇ·ḍa

   Verañjakaṇḍa

   At Verañjā: the origin of the Monastic Law

7. 7

   तेनte·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na बुद्धोbud·dho भगवाbha·ga·vā वेरञ्जायंve·rañ·jā·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti नळेरुपुचिमन्दमूलेna·ḷe·ru·pu·ci·man·da·mū·le महताma·ha·tā भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ पञ्चमत्तेहिpañ·ca·mat·te·hi भिक्खुसतेहि।bhik·khu·sa·te·hi

   Tena samayena buddho bhagavā verañjāyaṁ viharati naḷerupucimandamūle mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi.

   At one time the Buddha was staying at Verañjā at the foot of Naḷeru’s Nimba tree with a large sangha of five hundred monks.

8. 8

   अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho वेरञ्जोve·rañ·jo ब्राह्मणो—brāh·ma·ṇo

   Assosi kho verañjo brāhmaṇo—

   A brahmin in Verañjā was told:

9. 9

   “समणोsa·ma·ṇo खलुkha·lu भोbho गोतमोgo·ta·mo सक्यपुत्तोsak·ya·put·to सक्यकुलाsak·ya·ku·lā पब्बजितोpab·ba·ji·to वेरञ्जायंve·rañ·jā·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti नळेरुपुचिमन्दमूलेna·ḷe·ru·pu·ci·man·da·mū·le महताma·ha·tā भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ पञ्चमत्तेहिpañ·ca·mat·te·hi भिक्खुसतेहि।bhik·khu·sa·te·hi

   “samaṇo khalu bho gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito verañjāyaṁ viharati naḷerupucimandamūle mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi.

   “Sir, the ascetic Gotama, the Sakyan, who has gone forth from the Sakyan clan, is staying at Verañjā at the foot of Naleru’s Nimba tree with a large sangha of five hundred monks.

10. 10

    तंtaṃ खोkho पनpa·na भवन्तंbha·van·taṃ गोतमंgo·ta·maṃ एवंe·vaṃ कल्याणोkal·yā·ṇo कित्तिसद्दोkit·ti·sad·do अब्भुग्गतो—ab·bhug·ga·to

    Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato—

    That good Gotama has a fine reputation:

11. 11

    ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi सोso भगवाbha·ga·vā अरहंa·ra·haṃ सम्मासम्बुद्धोsam·mā·sam·bud·dho विज्जाचरणसम्पन्नोvij·jā·ca·ra·ṇa·sam·pan·no सुगतोsu·ga·to लोकविदूlo·ka·vi·dū अनुत्तरोa·nut·ta·ro पुरिसदम्मसारथिpu·ri·sa·dam·ma·sā·ra·thi सत्थाsat·thā देवमनुस्सानंde·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ बुद्धोbud·dho भगवा’,bha·ga·vā

    ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’,

    ‘He is a Buddha, perfected and fully awakened, complete in insight and conduct, happy, knower of the world, supreme leader of trainable people, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, a Buddha.

12. 12

    सोso इमंi·maṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ सदेवकंsa·de·va·kaṃ समारकंsa·mā·ra·kaṃ सब्रह्मकंsab·rah·ma·kaṃ सस्समणब्राह्मणिंsas·sa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇiṃ पजंpa·jaṃ सदेवमनुस्संsa·de·va·ma·nus·saṃ सयंsa·yaṃ अभिञ्ञाa·bhiñ·ñā सच्छिकत्वाsac·chi·kat·vā पवेदेति,pa·ve·de·ti

    so imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti,

    With his own insight he has seen this world with its gods, its lords of death, and its supreme beings, this society with its monastics and brahmins, its gods and humans, and he makes it known to others.

13. 13

    सोso धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेतिde·se·ti आदिकल्याणंā·di·kal·yā·ṇaṃ मज्झेकल्याणंmaj·jhe·kal·yā·ṇaṃ परियोसानकल्याणंpa·ri·yo·sā·na·kal·yā·ṇaṃ सात्थंsāt·thaṃ सब्यञ्जनं;sab·yañ·ja·naṃ केवलपरिपुण्णंke·va·la·pa·ri·puṇ·ṇaṃ परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ पकासेति;pa·kā·se·ti

    so dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ; kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti;

    He has a Teaching that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end. It has a true goal and is well articulated. He sets out a perfectly complete and pure spiritual life.’

14. 14

    साधुsā·dhu खोkho पनpa·na तथारूपानंta·thā·rū·pā·naṃ अरहतंa·ra·ha·taṃ दस्सनंdas·sa·naṃ होती”ति।ho·tī

    sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti.

    It’s good to see such perfected ones.”

15. 15

    अथa·tha खोkho वेरञ्जोve·rañ·jo ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवताbha·ga·va·tā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ सम्मोदि।sam·mo·di सम्मोदनीयंsam·mo·da·nī·yaṃ कथंka·thaṃ सारणीयंsā·ra·ṇī·yaṃ वीतिसारेत्वाvī·ti·sā·ret·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho वेरञ्जोve·rañ·jo ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

    Atha kho verañjo brāhmaṇo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho verañjo brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

    That brahmin then went to the Buddha, exchanged pleasantries with him, sat down, and said,

16. 16

    “सुतंsu·taṃ मेतं,me·taṃ भोbho गोतम—go·ta·ma

    “sutaṁ metaṁ, bho gotama—

    “I’ve heard, good Gotama,

17. 17

    ‘नna समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमोgo·ta·mo ब्राह्मणेbrāh·ma·ṇe जिण्णेjiṇ·ṇe वुड्ढेvuḍ·ḍhe महल्लकेma·hal·la·ke अद्धगतेad·dha·ga·te वयोअनुप्पत्तेva·yo·a·nup·pat·te अभिवादेतिa·bhi·vā·de·ti वाvā पच्चुट्ठेतिpac·cuṭ·ṭhe·ti वाvā आसनेनā·sa·ne·na वाvā निमन्तेती’ति।ni·man·te·tī

    ‘na samaṇo gotamo brāhmaṇe jiṇṇe vuḍḍhe mahallake addhagate vayoanuppatte abhivādeti vā paccuṭṭheti vā āsanena vā nimantetī’ti.

    that you don’t bow down to old brahmins, stand up for them, or offer them a seat.

18. 18

    तयिदं,ta·yi·daṃ भोbho गोतम,go·ta·ma तथेव?ta·the·va नna हिhi भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमोgo·ta·mo ब्राह्मणेbrāh·ma·ṇe जिण्णेjiṇ·ṇe वुड्ढेvuḍ·ḍhe महल्लकेma·hal·la·ke अद्धगतेad·dha·ga·te वयोअनुप्पत्तेva·yo·a·nup·pat·te अभिवादेतिa·bhi·vā·de·ti वाvā पच्चुट्ठेतिpac·cuṭ·ṭhe·ti वाvā आसनेनā·sa·ne·na वाvā निमन्तेति?ni·man·te·ti

    Tayidaṁ, bho gotama, tatheva? Na hi bhavaṁ gotamo brāhmaṇe jiṇṇe vuḍḍhe mahallake addhagate vayoanuppatte abhivādeti vā paccuṭṭheti vā āsanena vā nimanteti?

    I’ve now seen that this is indeed the case.

19. 19

    तयिदं,ta·yi·daṃ भोbho गोतम,go·ta·ma नna सम्पन्नमेवा”ति।sam·pan·na·me·vā

    Tayidaṁ, bho gotama, na sampannamevā”ti.

    This isn’t right.”

20. 20

    “नाहंnā·haṃ तं,taṃ ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa पस्सामिpas·sā·mi सदेवकेsa·de·va·ke लोकेlo·ke समारकेsa·mā·ra·ke सब्रह्मकेsab·rah·ma·ke सस्समणब्राह्मणियाsas·sa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇi·yā पजायpa·jā·ya सदेवमनुस्सायsa·de·va·ma·nus·sā·ya यमहंya·ma·haṃ अभिवादेय्यंa·bhi·vā·dey·yaṃ वाvā पच्चुट्ठेय्यंpac·cuṭ·ṭhey·yaṃ वाvā आसनेनā·sa·ne·na वाvā निमन्तेय्यं।ni·man·tey·yaṃ

    “Nāhaṁ taṁ, brāhmaṇa, passāmi sadevake loke samārake sabrahmake sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya yamahaṁ abhivādeyyaṁ vā paccuṭṭheyyaṁ vā āsanena vā nimanteyyaṁ.

    “Brahmin, in the world with its gods, lords of death, and supreme beings, in this society with its monastics and brahmins, its gods and humans, I don’t see anyone I should bow down to, rise up for, or offer a seat.

21. 21

    यञ्हि,yañ·hi ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa तथागतोta·thā·ga·to अभिवादेय्यa·bhi·vā·dey·ya वाvā पच्चुट्ठेय्यpac·cuṭ·ṭhey·ya वाvā आसनेनā·sa·ne·na वाvā निमन्तेय्य,ni·man·tey·ya मुद्धापिmud·dhā·pi तस्सtas·sa विपतेय्या”ति।vi·pa·tey·yā

    Yañhi, brāhmaṇa, tathāgato abhivādeyya vā paccuṭṭheyya vā āsanena vā nimanteyya, muddhāpi tassa vipateyyā”ti.

    If I did, their head would explode.”

22. 22

    “अरसरूपोa·ra·sa·rū·po भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमो”ति?go·ta·mo

    “Arasarūpo bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?

    “Good Gotama lacks taste.”

23. 23

    “अत्थिat·thi ख्वेस,khve·sa ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—‘अरसरूपोva·dey·ya समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो’ति।go·ta·mo

    “Atthi khvesa, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—‘arasarūpo samaṇo gotamo’ti.

    “There’s a way you could rightly say that I lack taste.

24. 24

    येye ते,te ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa रूपरसाrū·pa·ra·sā सद्दरसाsad·da·ra·sā गन्धरसाgan·dha·ra·sā रसरसाra·sa·ra·sā फोट्ठब्बरसा,phoṭ·ṭhab·ba·ra·sā तेte तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa पहीनाpa·hī·nā उच्छिन्नमूलाuc·chin·na·mū·lā तालावत्थुकताtā·lā·vat·thu·ka·tā अनभावङ्कताa·na·bhā·vaṅ·ka·tā आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनुप्पादधम्मा।a·nup·pā·da·dham·mā

    Ye te, brāhmaṇa, rūparasā saddarasā gandharasā rasarasā phoṭṭhabbarasā, te tathāgatassa pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā.

    For I’ve abandoned the taste for forms, sounds, smells, flavors, and touches. I’ve cut it off at the root, made it like a palm stump, eradicated it, and made it incapable of reappearing in the future.

25. 25

    अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—‘अरसरूपोva·dey·ya समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो’ति,go·ta·mo नोno चca खोkho यंyaṃ त्वंtvaṃ सन्धायsan·dhā·ya वदेसी”ति।va·de·sī

    Ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—‘arasarūpo samaṇo gotamo’ti, no ca kho yaṁ tvaṁ sandhāya vadesī”ti.

    But that’s not what you had in mind.”

26. 26

    “निब्भोगोnib·bho·go भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमो”ति?go·ta·mo

    “Nibbhogo bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?

    “Good Gotama has no enjoyment.”

27. 27

    “अत्थिat·thi ख्वेस,khve·sa ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—‘निब्भोगोva·dey·ya समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो’ति।go·ta·mo

    “Atthi khvesa, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—‘nibbhogo samaṇo gotamo’ti.

    “There’s a way you could rightly say that I have no enjoyment.

28. 28

    येye ते,te ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa रूपभोगाrū·pa·bho·gā सद्दभोगाsad·da·bho·gā गन्धभोगाgan·dha·bho·gā रसभोगाra·sa·bho·gā फोट्ठब्बभोगा,phoṭ·ṭhab·ba·bho·gā तेte तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa पहीनाpa·hī·nā उच्छिन्नमूलाuc·chin·na·mū·lā तालावत्थुकताtā·lā·vat·thu·ka·tā अनभावङ्कताa·na·bhā·vaṅ·ka·tā आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनुप्पादधम्मा।a·nup·pā·da·dham·mā

    Ye te, brāhmaṇa, rūpabhogā saddabhogā gandhabhogā rasabhogā phoṭṭhabbabhogā, te tathāgatassa pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā.

    For I’ve abandoned the enjoyment of forms, sounds, smells, flavors, and touches. I’ve cut it off at the root, made it like a palm stump, eradicated it, and made it incapable of reappearing in the future.

29. 29

    अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—‘निब्भोगोva·dey·ya समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो’ति,go·ta·mo नोno चca खोkho यंyaṃ त्वंtvaṃ सन्धायsan·dhā·ya वदेसी”ति।va·de·sī

    Ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—‘nibbhogo samaṇo gotamo’ti, no ca kho yaṁ tvaṁ sandhāya vadesī”ti.

    But that’s not what you had in mind.”

30. 30

    “अकिरियवादोa·ki·ri·ya·vā·do भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमो”ति?go·ta·mo

    “Akiriyavādo bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?

    “Good Gotama teaches inaction.”

31. 31

    “अत्थिat·thi ख्वेस,khve·sa ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—‘अकिरियवादोva·dey·ya समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो’ति।go·ta·mo

    “Atthi khvesa, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—‘akiriyavādo samaṇo gotamo’ti.

    “There’s a way you could rightly say that I teach inaction.

32. 32

    अहञ्हि,a·hañ·hi ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa अकिरियंa·ki·ri·yaṃ वदामिva·dā·mi कायदुच्चरितस्सkā·ya·duc·ca·ri·tas·sa वचीदुच्चरितस्सva·cī·duc·ca·ri·tas·sa मनोदुच्चरितस्स।ma·no·duc·ca·ri·tas·sa

    Ahañhi, brāhmaṇa, akiriyaṁ vadāmi kāyaduccaritassa vacīduccaritassa manoduccaritassa.

    For I teach the non-doing of misconduct by body, speech, and mind.

33. 33

    अनेकविहितानंa·ne·ka·vi·hi·tā·naṃ पापकानंpā·pa·kā·naṃ अकुसलानंa·ku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ अकिरियंa·ki·ri·yaṃ वदामि।va·dā·mi

    Anekavihitānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ akiriyaṁ vadāmi.

    I teach the non-doing of the various kinds of bad, unwholesome actions.

34. 34

    अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—‘अकिरियवादोva·dey·ya समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो’ति,go·ta·mo नोno चca खोkho यंyaṃ त्वंtvaṃ सन्धायsan·dhā·ya वदेसी”ति।va·de·sī

    Ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—‘akiriyavādo samaṇo gotamo’ti, no ca kho yaṁ tvaṁ sandhāya vadesī”ti.

    But that’s not what you had in mind.”

35. 35

    “उच्छेदवादोuc·che·da·vā·do भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमो”ति?go·ta·mo

    “Ucchedavādo bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?

    “Good Gotama is an annihilationist.”

36. 36

    “अत्थिat·thi ख्वेस,khve·sa ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—‘उच्छेदवादोva·dey·ya समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो’ति।go·ta·mo

    “Atthi khvesa, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—‘ucchedavādo samaṇo gotamo’ti.

    “There’s a way you could rightly say that I’m an annihilationist.

37. 37

    अहञ्हि,a·hañ·hi ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa उच्छेदंuc·che·daṃ वदामिva·dā·mi रागस्सrā·gas·sa दोसस्सdo·sas·sa मोहस्स।mo·has·sa

    Ahañhi, brāhmaṇa, ucchedaṁ vadāmi rāgassa dosassa mohassa.

    For I teach the annihilation of sensual desire, ill will, and confusion.

38. 38

    अनेकविहितानंa·ne·ka·vi·hi·tā·naṃ पापकानंpā·pa·kā·naṃ अकुसलानंa·ku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ उच्छेदंuc·che·daṃ वदामि।va·dā·mi

    Anekavihitānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ucchedaṁ vadāmi.

    I teach the annihilation of the various kinds of bad, unwholesome qualities.

39. 39

    अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—‘उच्छेदवादोva·dey·ya समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो’ति,go·ta·mo नोno चca खोkho यंyaṃ त्वंtvaṃ सन्धायsan·dhā·ya वदेसी”ति।va·de·sī

    Ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—‘ucchedavādo samaṇo gotamo’ti, no ca kho yaṁ tvaṁ sandhāya vadesī”ti.

    But that’s not what you had in mind.”

40. 40

    “जेगुच्छीje·guc·chī भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमो”ति?go·ta·mo

    “Jegucchī bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?

    “Good Gotama is disgusting.”

41. 41

    “अत्थिat·thi ख्वेस,khve·sa ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—‘जेगुच्छीva·dey·ya समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो’ति।go·ta·mo

    “Atthi khvesa, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—‘jegucchī samaṇo gotamo’ti.

    “There’s a way you could rightly say that I’m disgusting.

42. 42

    अहञ्हि,a·hañ·hi ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa जिगुच्छामिji·guc·chā·mi कायदुच्चरितेनkā·ya·duc·ca·ri·te·na वचीदुच्चरितेनva·cī·duc·ca·ri·te·na मनोदुच्चरितेन।ma·no·duc·ca·ri·te·na

    Ahañhi, brāhmaṇa, jigucchāmi kāyaduccaritena vacīduccaritena manoduccaritena.

    For I am disgusted by misconduct by body, speech, and mind.

43. 43

    अनेकविहितानंa·ne·ka·vi·hi·tā·naṃ पापकानंpā·pa·kā·naṃ अकुसलानंa·ku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ समापत्तियाsa·mā·pat·ti·yā जिगुच्छामि।ji·guc·chā·mi

    Anekavihitānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ samāpattiyā jigucchāmi.

    I am disgusted by the various kinds of bad, unwholesome qualities.

44. 44

    अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—‘जेगुच्छीva·dey·ya समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो’ति,go·ta·mo नोno चca खोkho यंyaṃ त्वंtvaṃ सन्धायsan·dhā·ya वदेसी”ति।va·de·sī

    Ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—‘jegucchī samaṇo gotamo’ti, no ca kho yaṁ tvaṁ sandhāya vadesī”ti.

    But that’s not what you had in mind.”

45. 45

    “वेनयिकोve·na·yi·ko भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमो”ति?go·ta·mo

    “Venayiko bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?

    “Good Gotama is an exterminator.”

46. 46

    “अत्थिat·thi ख्वेस,khve·sa ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—‘वेनयिकोva·dey·ya समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो’ति।go·ta·mo

    “Atthi khvesa, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—‘venayiko samaṇo gotamo’ti.

    “There’s a way you could rightly say that I’m an exterminator.

47. 47

    अहञ्हि,a·hañ·hi ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa विनयायvi·na·yā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेमिde·se·mi रागस्सrā·gas·sa दोसस्सdo·sas·sa मोहस्स।mo·has·sa

    Ahañhi, brāhmaṇa, vinayāya dhammaṁ desemi rāgassa dosassa mohassa.

    For I teach the extermination of sensual desire, ill will, and confusion.

48. 48

    अनेकविहितानंa·ne·ka·vi·hi·tā·naṃ पापकानंpā·pa·kā·naṃ अकुसलानंa·ku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ विनयायvi·na·yā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेमि।de·se·mi

    Anekavihitānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ vinayāya dhammaṁ desemi.

    I teach the extermination of the various kinds of bad, unwholesome qualities.

49. 49

    अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—‘वेनयिकोva·dey·ya समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो’ति,go·ta·mo नोno चca खोkho यंyaṃ त्वंtvaṃ सन्धायsan·dhā·ya वदेसी”ति।va·de·sī

    Ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—‘venayiko samaṇo gotamo’ti, no ca kho yaṁ tvaṁ sandhāya vadesī”ti.

    But that’s not what you had in mind.”

50. 50

    “तपस्सीta·pas·sī भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमो”ति?go·ta·mo

    “Tapassī bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?

    “Good Gotama is austere.”

51. 51

    “अत्थिat·thi ख्वेस,khve·sa ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—‘तपस्सीva·dey·ya समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो’ति।go·ta·mo

    “Atthi khvesa, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—‘tapassī samaṇo gotamo’ti.

    “There’s a way you could rightly say that I’m austere.

52. 52

    तपनीयाहं,ta·pa·nī·yā·haṃ ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa पापकेpā·pa·ke अकुसलेa·ku·sa·le धम्मेdham·me वदामि,va·dā·mi कायदुच्चरितंkā·ya·duc·ca·ri·taṃ वचीदुच्चरितंva·cī·duc·ca·ri·taṃ मनोदुच्चरितं।ma·no·duc·ca·ri·taṃ

    Tapanīyāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, pāpake akusale dhamme vadāmi, kāyaduccaritaṁ vacīduccaritaṁ manoduccaritaṁ.

    For I say that bad, unwholesome qualities—misconduct by body, speech, and mind—are to be disciplined.

53. 53

    यस्सyas·sa खो,kho ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa तपनीयाta·pa·nī·yā पापकाpā·pa·kā अकुसलाa·ku·sa·lā धम्माdham·mā पहीनाpa·hī·nā उच्छिन्नमूलाuc·chin·na·mū·lā तालावत्थुकताtā·lā·vat·thu·ka·tā अनभावङ्कताa·na·bhā·vaṅ·ka·tā आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनुप्पादधम्माa·nup·pā·da·dham·mā तमहंta·ma·haṃ तपस्सीतिta·pas·sī·ti वदामि।va·dā·mi

    Yassa kho, brāhmaṇa, tapanīyā pāpakā akusalā dhammā pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā tamahaṁ tapassīti vadāmi.

    One who has abandoned them, cut them off at the root, made them like a palm stump, eradicated them, and made them incapable of reappearing in the future—such a one I call austere.

54. 54

    तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa खो,kho ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa तपनीयाta·pa·nī·yā पापकाpā·pa·kā अकुसलाa·ku·sa·lā धम्माdham·mā पहीनाpa·hī·nā उच्छिन्नमूलाuc·chin·na·mū·lā तालावत्थुकताtā·lā·vat·thu·ka·tā अनभावङ्कताa·na·bhā·vaṅ·ka·tā आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनुप्पादधम्मा।a·nup·pā·da·dham·mā

    Tathāgatassa kho, brāhmaṇa, tapanīyā pāpakā akusalā dhammā pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā.

    Now I’ve abandoned the bad, unwholesome qualities that are to be disciplined. I’ve cut them off at the root, made them like a palm stump, eradicated them, and made them incapable of reappearing in the future.

55. 55

    अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—‘तपस्सीva·dey·ya समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो’ति,go·ta·mo नोno चca खोkho यंyaṃ त्वंtvaṃ सन्धायsan·dhā·ya वदेसी”ति।va·de·sī

    Ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—‘tapassī samaṇo gotamo’ti, no ca kho yaṁ tvaṁ sandhāya vadesī”ti.

    But that’s not what you had in mind.”

56. 56

    “अपगब्भोa·pa·gab·bho भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमो”ति?go·ta·mo

    “Apagabbho bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?

    “Good Gotama is withdrawn.”

57. 57

    “अत्थिat·thi ख्वेस,khve·sa ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—‘अपगब्भोva·dey·ya समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो’ति।go·ta·mo

    “Atthi khvesa, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—‘apagabbho samaṇo gotamo’ti.

    “There’s a way you could rightly say that I’m withdrawn.

58. 58

    यस्सyas·sa खो,kho ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ गब्भसेय्याgab·bha·sey·yā पुनब्भवाभिनिब्बत्तिpu·nab·bha·vā·bhi·nib·bat·ti पहीनाpa·hī·nā उच्छिन्नमूलाuc·chin·na·mū·lā तालावत्थुकताtā·lā·vat·thu·ka·tā अनभावङ्कताa·na·bhā·vaṅ·ka·tā आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनुप्पादधम्माa·nup·pā·da·dham·mā तमहंta·ma·haṃ अपगब्भोतिa·pa·gab·bho·ti वदामि।va·dā·mi

    Yassa kho, brāhmaṇa, āyatiṁ gabbhaseyyā punabbhavābhinibbatti pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā tamahaṁ apagabbhoti vadāmi.

    For one who has withdrawn from any future conception in a womb, any rebirth in a future life, who has cut it off at the root, made it like a palm stump, eradicated it, and made it incapable of reappearing in the future—such a one I call withdrawn.

59. 59

    तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa खो,kho ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ गब्भसेय्याgab·bha·sey·yā पुनब्भवाभिनिब्बत्तिpu·nab·bha·vā·bhi·nib·bat·ti पहीनाpa·hī·nā उच्छिन्नमूलाuc·chin·na·mū·lā तालावत्थुकताtā·lā·vat·thu·ka·tā अनभावङ्कताa·na·bhā·vaṅ·ka·tā आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनुप्पादधम्मा।a·nup·pā·da·dham·mā

    Tathāgatassa kho, brāhmaṇa, āyatiṁ gabbhaseyyā punabbhavābhinibbatti pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā.

    Now I’ve withdrawn from any future conception in a womb, any rebirth in a future life. I’ve cut it off at the root, made it like a palm stump, eradicated it, and made it incapable of reappearing in the future.

60. 60

    अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—‘अपगब्भोva·dey·ya समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो’ति,go·ta·mo नोno चca खोkho यंyaṃ त्वंtvaṃ सन्धायsan·dhā·ya वदेसि।va·de·si

    Ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—‘apagabbho samaṇo gotamo’ti, no ca kho yaṁ tvaṁ sandhāya vadesi.

    But that’s not what you had in mind.

61. 61

    सेय्यथापि,sey·ya·thā·pi ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa कुक्कुटियाkuk·ku·ṭi·yā अण्डानिaṇ·ḍā·ni अट्ठaṭ·ṭha वाvā दसda·sa वाvā द्वादसdvā·da·sa वा।vā

    Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, kukkuṭiyā aṇḍāni aṭṭha vā dasa vā dvādasa vā.

    Suppose, brahmin, there was a hen with eight, ten, or twelve eggs,

62. 62

    तानस्सुtā·nas·su कुक्कुटियाkuk·ku·ṭi·yā सम्माsam·mā अधिसयितानिa·dhi·sa·yi·tā·ni सम्माsam·mā परिसेदितानिpa·ri·se·di·tā·ni सम्माsam·mā परिभावितानि।pa·ri·bhā·vi·tā·ni

    Tānassu kukkuṭiyā sammā adhisayitāni sammā pariseditāni sammā paribhāvitāni.

    which she had properly covered, warmed, and incubated.

63. 63

    योyo नुnu खोkho तेसंte·saṃ कुक्कुटच्छापकानंkuk·ku·ṭac·chā·pa·kā·naṃ पठमतरंpa·ṭha·ma·ta·raṃ पादनखसिखायpā·da·na·kha·si·khā·ya वाvā मुखतुण्डकेनmu·kha·tuṇ·ḍa·ke·na वाvā अण्डकोसंaṇ·ḍa·ko·saṃ पदालेत्वाpa·dā·let·vā सोत्थिनाsot·thi·nā अभिनिब्भिज्जेय्य,a·bhi·nib·bhij·jey·ya किन्तिkin·ti स्वास्सsvās·sa वचनीयो—‘जेट्ठोva·ca·nī·yo वाvā कनिट्ठोka·niṭ·ṭho वा’”ति?vā

    Yo nu kho tesaṁ kukkuṭacchāpakānaṁ paṭhamataraṁ pādanakhasikhāya vā mukhatuṇḍakena vā aṇḍakosaṁ padāletvā sotthinā abhinibbhijjeyya, kinti svāssa vacanīyo—‘jeṭṭho vā kaniṭṭho vā’”ti?

    The first chick that hatches safely—after piercing through the eggshell with its claw or its beak—is it to be called the eldest or the youngest?”

64. 64

    “जेट्ठोतिस्स,jeṭ·ṭho·tis·sa भोbho गोतम,go·ta·ma वचनीयो।va·ca·nī·yo

    “Jeṭṭhotissa, bho gotama, vacanīyo.

    “It’s to be called the eldest,

65. 65

    सोso हिhi नेसंne·saṃ जेट्ठोjeṭ·ṭho होती”ति।ho·tī

    So hi nesaṁ jeṭṭho hotī”ti.

    for it’s the eldest among them.”

66. 66

    “एवमेवe·va·me·va खोkho अहं,a·haṃ ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa अविज्जागतायa·vij·jā·ga·tā·ya पजायpa·jā·ya अण्डभूतायaṇ·ḍa·bhū·tā·ya परियोनद्धायpa·ri·yo·nad·dhā·ya अविज्जण्डकोसंa·vij·jaṇ·ḍa·ko·saṃ पदालेत्वाpa·dā·let·vā एकोवe·ko·va लोकेlo·ke अनुत्तरंa·nut·ta·raṃ सम्मासम्बोधिंsam·mā·sam·bo·dhiṃ अभिसम्बुद्धो।a·bhi·sam·bud·dho

    “Evameva kho ahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, avijjāgatāya pajāya aṇḍabhūtāya pariyonaddhāya avijjaṇḍakosaṁ padāletvā ekova loke anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambuddho.

    “Just so, in this deluded society, enveloped like an egg, I alone in the world have cracked the shell of delusion and reached the supreme full awakening.

67. 67

    स्वाहं,svā·haṃ ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa जेट्ठोjeṭ·ṭho सेट्ठोseṭ·ṭho लोकस्स।lo·kas·sa

    Svāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, jeṭṭho seṭṭho lokassa.

    I, brahmin, am the world’s eldest and best.

68. 68

    आरद्धंā·rad·dhaṃ खोkho पनpa·na मे,me ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ अहोसिa·ho·si असल्लीनं,a·sal·lī·naṃ उपट्ठिताu·paṭ·ṭhi·tā सतिsa·ti असम्मुट्ठा,a·sam·muṭ·ṭhā पस्सद्धोpas·sad·dho कायोkā·yo असारद्धो,a·sā·rad·dho समाहितंsa·mā·hi·taṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ एकग्गं।e·kag·gaṃ

    Āraddhaṁ kho pana me, brāhmaṇa, vīriyaṁ ahosi asallīnaṁ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā, passaddho kāyo asāraddho, samāhitaṁ cittaṁ ekaggaṁ.

    I was firmly energetic and had clarity of mindfulness; my body was tranquil and my mind stilled and unified.

69. 69

    सोso खोkho अहं,a·haṃ ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa विविच्चेवvi·vic·ce·va कामेहिkā·me·hi विविच्चvi·vic·ca अकुसलेहिa·ku·sa·le·hi धम्मेहिdham·me·hi सवितक्कंsa·vi·tak·kaṃ सविचारंsa·vi·cā·raṃ विवेकजंvi·ve·ka·jaṃ पीतिसुखंpī·ti·su·khaṃ पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ झानंjhā·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहासिं।vi·hā·siṃ

    So kho ahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ.

    Fully secluded from the five senses, secluded from unwholesome mental qualities, I entered and remained in the first absorption, which has movement of the mind, as well as the joy and bliss of seclusion.

70. 70

    वितक्कविचारानंvi·tak·ka·vi·cā·rā·naṃ वूपसमाvū·pa·sa·mā अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ सम्पसादनंsam·pa·sā·da·naṃ चेतसोce·ta·so एकोदिभावंe·ko·di·bhā·vaṃ अवितक्कंa·vi·tak·kaṃ अविचारंa·vi·cā·raṃ समाधिजंsa·mā·dhi·jaṃ पीतिसुखंpī·ti·su·khaṃ दुतियंdu·ti·yaṃ झानंjhā·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहासिं।vi·hā·siṃ

    Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ.

    Through the stilling of the movement of the mind, I entered and remained in the second absorption, which has internal confidence and unification of mind, as well as the joy and bliss of stillness.

71. 71

    पीतियाpī·ti·yā चca विरागाvi·rā·gā उपेक्खकोu·pek·kha·ko चca विहासिंvi·hā·siṃ सतोsa·to चca सम्पजानो,sam·pa·jā·no सुखञ्चsu·khañ·ca कायेनkā·ye·na पटिसंवेदेसिं,pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·de·siṃ यंyaṃ तंtaṃ अरियाa·ri·yā आचिक्खन्ति—ā·cik·khan·ti

    Pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca vihāsiṁ sato ca sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedesiṁ, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti—

    Through the fading away of joy, I remained even-minded, mindful, and fully aware, experiencing bliss directly, and I entered and remained in the third absorption of which the noble ones declare:

72. 72

    ‘उपेक्खकोu·pek·kha·ko सतिमाsa·ti·mā सुखविहारी’तिsu·kha·vi·hā·rī ततियंta·ti·yaṃ झानंjhā·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहासिं।vi·hā·siṃ

    ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ.

    ‘You are even-minded, mindful, and abide in bliss.’

73. 73

    सुखस्सsu·khas·sa चca पहानाpa·hā·nā दुक्खस्सduk·khas·sa चca पहानाpa·hā·nā पुब्बेवpub·be·va सोमनस्सदोमनस्सानंso·ma·nas·sa·do·ma·nas·sā·naṃ अत्थङ्गमाat·thaṅ·ga·mā अदुक्खमसुखंa·duk·kha·ma·su·khaṃ उपेक्खासतिपारिसुद्धिंu·pek·khā·sa·ti·pā·ri·sud·dhiṃ चतुत्थंca·tut·thaṃ झानंjhā·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहासिं।vi·hā·siṃ

    Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsiṁ.

    Through the abandoning of bliss and pain and the earlier ending of joy and aversion, I entered and remained in the fourth absorption, which has neither pain nor bliss, but consists of purity of mindfulness and even-mindedness.

74. 74

    सोso एवंe·vaṃ समाहितेsa·mā·hi·te चित्तेcit·te परिसुद्धेpa·ri·sud·dhe परियोदातेpa·ri·yo·dā·te अनङ्गणेa·naṅ·ga·ṇe विगतूपक्किलेसेvi·ga·tū·pak·ki·le·se मुदुभूतेmu·du·bhū·te कम्मनियेkam·ma·ni·ye ठितेṭhi·te आनेञ्जप्पत्तेā·neñ·jap·pat·te पुब्बेनिवासानुस्सतिञाणायpub·be·ni·vā·sā·nus·sa·ti·ñā·ṇā·ya चित्तंcit·taṃ अभिनिन्नामेसिं।a·bhi·nin·nā·me·siṃ

    So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ.

    Then, with my mind stilled, purified, cleansed, flawless, free from defilements, supple, wieldy, steady, and unshakable, I directed it to the knowledge that consists of recollecting past lives.

75. 75

    सोso अनेकविहितंa·ne·ka·vi·hi·taṃ पुब्बेनिवासंpub·be·ni·vā·saṃ अनुस्सरामि,a·nus·sa·rā·mi सेय्यथिदं—sey·ya·thi·daṃ

    So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi, seyyathidaṁ—

    I recollected many past lives, that is,

76. 76

    एकम्पिe·kam·pi जातिंjā·tiṃ द्वेपिdve·pi जातियोjā·ti·yo तिस्सोपिtis·so·pi जातियोjā·ti·yo चतस्सोपिca·tas·so·pi जातियोjā·ti·yo पञ्चपिpañ·ca·pi जातियोjā·ti·yo दसपिda·sa·pi जातियोjā·ti·yo वीसम्पिvī·sam·pi जातियोjā·ti·yo तिंसम्पिtiṃ·sam·pi जातियोjā·ti·yo चत्तालीसम्पिcat·tā·lī·sam·pi जातियोjā·ti·yo पञ्ञासम्पिpañ·ñā·sam·pi जातियोjā·ti·yo जातिसतम्पि,jā·ti·sa·tam·pi जातिसहस्सम्पिjā·ti·sa·has·sam·pi जातिसतसहस्सम्पि,jā·ti·sa·ta·sa·has·sam·pi अनेकेपिa·ne·ke·pi संवट्टकप्पेsaṃ·vaṭ·ṭa·kap·pe अनेकेपिa·ne·ke·pi विवट्टकप्पेvi·vaṭ·ṭa·kap·pe अनेकेपिa·ne·ke·pi संवट्टविवट्टकप्पे—saṃ·vaṭ·ṭa·vi·vaṭ·ṭa·kap·pe

    ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi, jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi, anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe—

    one birth, two births, three births, four births, five births, ten births, twenty births, thirty births, forty births, fifty births, a hundred births, a thousand births, a hundred thousand births; many eons of world dissolution, many eons of world evolution, and many eons of both dissolution and evolution. And I knew:

77. 77

    ‘अमुत्रासिंa·mut·rā·siṃ एवंनामोe·vaṃ·nā·mo एवङ्गोत्तोe·vaṅ·got·to एवंवण्णोe·vaṃ·vaṇ·ṇo एवमाहारोe·va·mā·hā·ro एवंसुखदुक्खप्पटिसंवेदीe·vaṃ·su·kha·duk·khap·pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·dī एवमायुपरियन्तो;e·va·mā·yu·pa·ri·yan·to

    ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto;

    ‘There I had such a name, such a family, such an appearance, such food, such an experience of pleasure and pain, and such a lifespan.

78. 78

    सोso ततोta·to चुतोcu·to अमुत्रa·mut·ra उदपादिं;u·da·pā·diṃ

    so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ;

    Passing away from there, I was reborn elsewhere,

79. 79

    तत्रापासिंtat·rā·pā·siṃ एवंनामोe·vaṃ·nā·mo एवङ्गोत्तोe·vaṅ·got·to एवंवण्णोe·vaṃ·vaṇ·ṇo एवमाहारोe·va·mā·hā·ro एवंसुखदुक्खप्पटिसंवेदीe·vaṃ·su·kha·duk·khap·pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·dī एवमायुपरियन्तो;e·va·mā·yu·pa·ri·yan·to

    tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto;

    and there I had such a name, such a family, such an appearance, such food, such an experience of pleasure and pain, and such a lifespan.

80. 80

    सोso ततोta·to चुतोcu·to इधूपपन्नो’ति।i·dhū·pa·pan·no

    so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti.

    Passing away from there, I was reborn here.’

81. 81

    इतिi·ti साकारंsā·kā·raṃ सउद्देसंsa·ud·de·saṃ अनेकविहितंa·ne·ka·vi·hi·taṃ पुब्बेनिवासंpub·be·ni·vā·saṃ अनुस्सरामि।a·nus·sa·rā·mi

    Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi.

    In this way I recollected many past lives with their characteristics and particulars.

82. 82

    अयंa·yaṃ खोkho मे,me ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa रत्तियाrat·ti·yā पठमेpa·ṭha·me यामेyā·me पठमाpa·ṭha·mā विज्जाvij·jā अधिगता,a·dhi·ga·tā

    Ayaṁ kho me, brāhmaṇa, rattiyā paṭhame yāme paṭhamā vijjā adhigatā,

    This was the first true insight, which I attained in the first part of the night.

83. 83

    अविज्जाa·vij·jā विहता,vi·ha·tā विज्जाvij·jā उप्पन्ना,up·pan·nā तमोta·mo विहतो,vi·ha·to आलोकोā·lo·ko उप्पन्नो—up·pan·no

    avijjā vihatā, vijjā uppannā, tamo vihato, āloko uppanno—

    Delusion was dispelled and true insight arose, darkness was dispelled and light arose,

84. 84

    यथाya·thā तंtaṃ अप्पमत्तस्सap·pa·mat·tas·sa आतापिनोā·tā·pi·no पहितत्तस्सpa·hi·tat·tas·sa विहरतो।vi·ha·ra·to

    yathā taṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato.

    as happens to one who is heedful, energetic, and diligent.

85. 85

    अयंa·yaṃ खोkho मे,me ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa पठमाभिनिब्भिदाpa·ṭha·mā·bhi·nib·bhi·dā अहोसिa·ho·si कुक्कुटच्छापकस्सेवkuk·ku·ṭac·chā·pa·kas·se·va अण्डकोसम्हा।aṇ·ḍa·ko·sam·hā

    Ayaṁ kho me, brāhmaṇa, paṭhamābhinibbhidā ahosi kukkuṭacchāpakasseva aṇḍakosamhā.

    This, brahmin, was my first breaking out, like a chick from an eggshell.

86. 86

    सोso एवंe·vaṃ समाहितेsa·mā·hi·te चित्तेcit·te परिसुद्धेpa·ri·sud·dhe परियोदातेpa·ri·yo·dā·te अनङ्गणेa·naṅ·ga·ṇe विगतूपक्किलेसेvi·ga·tū·pak·ki·le·se मुदुभूतेmu·du·bhū·te कम्मनियेkam·ma·ni·ye ठितेṭhi·te आनेञ्जप्पत्तेā·neñ·jap·pat·te सत्तानंsat·tā·naṃ चुतूपपातञाणायcu·tū·pa·pā·ta·ñā·ṇā·ya चित्तंcit·taṃ अभिनिन्नामेसिं।a·bhi·nin·nā·me·siṃ

    So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ.

    Then, with my mind stilled, purified, cleansed, flawless, free from defilements, supple, wieldy, steady, and unshakable, I directed it to the knowledge of the passing away and arising of beings.

87. 87

    सोso दिब्बेनdib·be·na चक्खुनाcak·khu·nā विसुद्धेनvi·sud·dhe·na अतिक्कन्तमानुसकेनa·tik·kan·ta·mā·nu·sa·ke·na सत्तेsat·te पस्सामिpas·sā·mi चवमानेca·va·mā·ne उपपज्जमानेu·pa·paj·ja·mā·ne हीनेhī·ne पणीतेpa·ṇī·te सुवण्णेsu·vaṇ·ṇe दुब्बण्णेdub·baṇ·ṇe सुगतेsu·ga·te दुग्गते,dug·ga·te यथाकम्मूपगेya·thā·kam·mū·pa·ge सत्तेsat·te पजानामि—pa·jā·nā·mi

    So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passāmi cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāmi—

    With superhuman and purified clairvoyance, I saw beings passing away and getting reborn, inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, gone to good destinations and to bad destinations, and I understood how beings pass on according to their actions:

88. 88

    ‘इमेi·me वतva·ta भोन्तोbhon·to सत्ताsat·tā कायदुच्चरितेनkā·ya·duc·ca·ri·te·na समन्नागताsa·man·nā·ga·tā वचीदुच्चरितेनva·cī·duc·ca·ri·te·na समन्नागताsa·man·nā·ga·tā मनोदुच्चरितेनma·no·duc·ca·ri·te·na समन्नागताsa·man·nā·ga·tā अरियानंa·ri·yā·naṃ उपवादकाu·pa·vā·da·kā मिच्छादिट्ठिकाmic·chā·diṭ·ṭhi·kā मिच्छादिट्ठिकम्मसमादाना;mic·chā·diṭ·ṭhi·kam·ma·sa·mā·dā·nā

    ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā;

    ‘These beings who engaged in misconduct by body, speech, and mind, who abused the noble ones, who had wrong views and acted accordingly,

89. 89

    तेte कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā अपायंa·pā·yaṃ दुग्गतिंdug·ga·tiṃ विनिपातंvi·ni·pā·taṃ निरयंni·ra·yaṃ उपपन्ना।u·pa·pan·nā

    te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā.

    at the breaking up of the body after death, have been reborn in a lower realm, a bad destination, a world of misery, hell.

90. 90

    इमेi·me वाvā पनpa·na भोन्तोbhon·to सत्ताsat·tā कायसुचरितेनkā·ya·su·ca·ri·te·na समन्नागताsa·man·nā·ga·tā वचीसुचरितेनva·cī·su·ca·ri·te·na समन्नागताsa·man·nā·ga·tā मनोसुचरितेनma·no·su·ca·ri·te·na समन्नागताsa·man·nā·ga·tā अरियानंa·ri·yā·naṃ अनुपवादकाa·nu·pa·vā·da·kā सम्मादिट्ठिकाsam·mā·diṭ·ṭhi·kā सम्मादिट्ठिकम्मसमादाना;sam·mā·diṭ·ṭhi·kam·ma·sa·mā·dā·nā

    Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā;

    But these beings who engaged in good conduct of body, speech, and mind, who did not abuse the noble ones, who held right view and acted accordingly,

91. 91

    तेte कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ सग्गंsag·gaṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ उपपन्ना’ति।u·pa·pan·nā

    te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā’ti.

    at the breaking up of the body after death, have been reborn in a good destination, a heaven world.’

92. 92

    इतिi·ti दिब्बेनdib·be·na चक्खुनाcak·khu·nā विसुद्धेनvi·sud·dhe·na अतिक्कन्तमानुसकेनa·tik·kan·ta·mā·nu·sa·ke·na सत्तेsat·te पस्सामिpas·sā·mi चवमानेca·va·mā·ne उपपज्जमानेu·pa·paj·ja·mā·ne हीनेhī·ne पणीतेpa·ṇī·te सुवण्णेsu·vaṇ·ṇe दुब्बण्णेdub·baṇ·ṇe सुगतेsu·ga·te दुग्गते,dug·ga·te यथाकम्मूपगेya·thā·kam·mū·pa·ge सत्तेsat·te पजानामि।pa·jā·nā·mi

    Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passāmi cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāmi.

    In this way, with superhuman and purified clairvoyance, I saw beings passing away and getting reborn, inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, gone to good destinations and to bad destinations, and I understood how beings pass on according to their actions.

93. 93

    अयंa·yaṃ खोkho मे,me ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa रत्तियाrat·ti·yā मज्झिमेmaj·jhi·me यामेyā·me दुतियाdu·ti·yā विज्जाvij·jā अधिगता,a·dhi·ga·tā

    Ayaṁ kho me, brāhmaṇa, rattiyā majjhime yāme dutiyā vijjā adhigatā,

    This was the second true insight, which I attained in the middle part of the night.

94. 94

    अविज्जाa·vij·jā विहता,vi·ha·tā विज्जाvij·jā उप्पन्ना,up·pan·nā तमोta·mo विहतो,vi·ha·to आलोकोā·lo·ko उप्पन्नो—up·pan·no

    avijjā vihatā, vijjā uppannā, tamo vihato, āloko uppanno—

    Delusion was dispelled and true insight arose, darkness was dispelled and light arose,

95. 95

    यथाya·thā तंtaṃ अप्पमत्तस्सap·pa·mat·tas·sa आतापिनोā·tā·pi·no पहितत्तस्सpa·hi·tat·tas·sa विहरतो।vi·ha·ra·to

    yathā taṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato.

    as happens to one who is heedful, energetic, and diligent.

96. 96

    अयंa·yaṃ खोkho मे,me ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa दुतियाभिनिब्भिदाdu·ti·yā·bhi·nib·bhi·dā अहोसिa·ho·si कुक्कुटच्छापकस्सेवkuk·ku·ṭac·chā·pa·kas·se·va अण्डकोसम्हा।aṇ·ḍa·ko·sam·hā

    Ayaṁ kho me, brāhmaṇa, dutiyābhinibbhidā ahosi kukkuṭacchāpakasseva aṇḍakosamhā.

    This, brahmin, was my second breaking out, like a chick from an eggshell.

97. 97

    सोso एवंe·vaṃ समाहितेsa·mā·hi·te चित्तेcit·te परिसुद्धेpa·ri·sud·dhe परियोदातेpa·ri·yo·dā·te अनङ्गणेa·naṅ·ga·ṇe विगतूपक्किलेसेvi·ga·tū·pak·ki·le·se मुदुभूतेmu·du·bhū·te कम्मनियेkam·ma·ni·ye ठितेṭhi·te आनेञ्जप्पत्तेā·neñ·jap·pat·te आसवानंā·sa·vā·naṃ खयञाणायkha·ya·ñā·ṇā·ya चित्तंcit·taṃ अभिनिन्नामेसिं।a·bhi·nin·nā·me·siṃ

    So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhininnāmesiṁ.

    Then, with my mind stilled, purified, cleansed, flawless, free from defilements, supple, wieldy, steady, and unshakable, I directed it to the knowledge of the ending of the corruptions.

98. 98

    सोso ‘इदंi·daṃ दुक्खन्’तिduk·khan यथाभूतंya·thā·bhū·taṃ अब्भञ्ञासिं,ab·bhañ·ñā·siṃ ‘अयंa·yaṃ दुक्खसमुदयो’तिduk·kha·sa·mu·da·yo यथाभूतंya·thā·bhū·taṃ अब्भञ्ञासिं,ab·bhañ·ñā·siṃ ‘अयंa·yaṃ दुक्खनिरोधो’तिduk·kha·ni·ro·dho यथाभूतंya·thā·bhū·taṃ अब्भञ्ञासिं,ab·bhañ·ñā·siṃ ‘अयंa·yaṃ दुक्खनिरोधगामिनीduk·kha·ni·ro·dha·gā·mi·nī पटिपदा’तिpa·ṭi·pa·dā यथाभूतंya·thā·bhū·taṃ अब्भञ्ञासिं;ab·bhañ·ñā·siṃ

    So ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ;

    I knew according to reality: ‘This is suffering;’ ‘This is the origin of suffering;’ ‘This is the end of suffering;’ ‘This is the path leading to the end of suffering.’

99. 99

    ‘इमेi·me आसवा’तिā·sa·vā यथाभूतंya·thā·bhū·taṃ अब्भञ्ञासिं,ab·bhañ·ñā·siṃ ‘अयंa·yaṃ आसवसमुदयो’तिā·sa·va·sa·mu·da·yo यथाभूतंya·thā·bhū·taṃ अब्भञ्ञासिं,ab·bhañ·ñā·siṃ ‘अयंa·yaṃ आसवनिरोधो’तिā·sa·va·ni·ro·dho यथाभूतंya·thā·bhū·taṃ अब्भञ्ञासिं,ab·bhañ·ñā·siṃ ‘अयंa·yaṃ आसवनिरोधगामिनीā·sa·va·ni·ro·dha·gā·mi·nī पटिपदा’तिpa·ṭi·pa·dā यथाभूतंya·thā·bhū·taṃ अब्भञ्ञासिं।ab·bhañ·ñā·siṃ

    ‘ime āsavā’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ āsavasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ abbhaññāsiṁ.

    I knew according to reality: ‘These are the corruptions;’ ‘This is the origin of the corruptions;’ ‘This is the end of the corruptions;’ ‘This is the path leading to the end of the corruptions.’

100. 100

     तस्सtas·sa मेme एवंe·vaṃ जानतोjā·na·to एवंe·vaṃ पस्सतोpas·sa·to कामासवापिkā·mā·sa·vā·pi चित्तंcit·taṃ विमुच्चित्थvi·muc·cit·tha भवासवापिbha·vā·sa·vā·pi चित्तंcit·taṃ विमुच्चित्थvi·muc·cit·tha अविज्जासवापिa·vij·jā·sa·vā·pi चित्तंcit·taṃ विमुच्चित्थ।vi·muc·cit·tha

     Tassa me evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccittha.

     When I knew and saw this, my mind was freed from the corruption of worldly desire, from the corruption of desire to exist, and from the corruption of delusion.

101. 101

     विमुत्तस्मिंvi·mut·tas·miṃ विमुत्तमितिvi·mut·ta·mi·ti ञाणंñā·ṇaṃ अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ ahosi.

     When it was freed, I knew it was freed.

102. 102

     ‘खीणाkhī·ṇā जाति,jā·ti वुसितंvu·si·taṃ ब्रह्मचरियं,brah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ कतंka·taṃ करणीयं,ka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ नापरंnā·pa·raṃ इत्थत्ताया’तिit·that·tā·yā अब्भञ्ञासिं।ab·bhañ·ñā·siṃ

     ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti abbhaññāsiṁ.

     I understood that birth had come to an end, the spiritual life had been fulfilled, the job had been done, there was no further state of existence.

103. 103

     अयंa·yaṃ खोkho मे,me ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa रत्तियाrat·ti·yā पच्छिमेpac·chi·me यामेyā·me ततियाta·ti·yā विज्जाvij·jā अधिगता,a·dhi·ga·tā

     Ayaṁ kho me, brāhmaṇa, rattiyā pacchime yāme tatiyā vijjā adhigatā,

     This was the third true insight, which I attained in the last part of the night.

104. 104

     अविज्जाa·vij·jā विहता,vi·ha·tā विज्जाvij·jā उप्पन्ना,up·pan·nā तमोta·mo विहतो,vi·ha·to आलोकोā·lo·ko उप्पन्नो—up·pan·no

     avijjā vihatā, vijjā uppannā, tamo vihato, āloko uppanno—

     Delusion was dispelled and true insight arose, darkness was dispelled and light arose,

105. 105

     यथाya·thā तंtaṃ अप्पमत्तस्सap·pa·mat·tas·sa आतापिनोā·tā·pi·no पहितत्तस्सpa·hi·tat·tas·sa विहरतो।vi·ha·ra·to

     yathā taṁ appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato.

     as happens to one who is heedful, energetic, and diligent.

106. 106

     अयंa·yaṃ खोkho मे,me ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa ततियाभिनिब्भिदाta·ti·yā·bhi·nib·bhi·dā अहोसि—कुक्कुटच्छापकस्सेवa·ho·si अण्डकोसम्हा”ति।aṇ·ḍa·ko·sam·hā

     Ayaṁ kho me, brāhmaṇa, tatiyābhinibbhidā ahosi—kukkuṭacchāpakasseva aṇḍakosamhā”ti.

     This, brahmin, was my third breaking out, like a chick from an eggshell.”

107. 107

     एवंe·vaṃ वुत्ते,vut·te वेरञ्जोve·rañ·jo ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Evaṁ vutte, verañjo brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     That brahmin then said to the Buddha,

108. 108

     “जेट्ठोjeṭ·ṭho भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमो,go·ta·mo सेट्ठोseṭ·ṭho भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमो।go·ta·mo

     “jeṭṭho bhavaṁ gotamo, seṭṭho bhavaṁ gotamo.

     “Good Gotama is the eldest! Good Gotama is the best!

109. 109

     अभिक्कन्तं,a·bhik·kan·taṃ भोbho गोतम,go·ta·ma अभिक्कन्तं,a·bhik·kan·taṃ भोbho गोतम।go·ta·ma

     Abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama.

     Wonderful, good Gotama, wonderful!

110. 110

     सेय्यथापि,sey·ya·thā·pi भोbho गोतम,go·ta·ma निक्कुज्जितंnik·kuj·ji·taṃ वाvā उक्कुज्जेय्य,uk·kuj·jey·ya पटिच्छन्नंpa·ṭic·chan·naṃ वाvā विवरेय्य,vi·va·rey·ya मूळ्हस्सmū·ḷhas·sa वाvā मग्गंmag·gaṃ आचिक्खेय्य,ā·cik·khey·ya अन्धकारेan·dha·kā·re वाvā तेलपज्जोतंte·la·paj·jo·taṃ धारेय्य—‘चक्खुमन्तोdhā·rey·ya रूपानिrū·pā·ni दक्खन्ती’ति;dak·khan·tī

     Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya—‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti;

     Just as one might set upright what’s overturned, or reveal what’s hidden, or show the way to one who’s lost, or bring a lamp into the dark so that one with eyes might see what’s there—

111. 111

     एवमेवंe·va·me·vaṃ भोताbho·tā गोतमेनgo·ta·me·na अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na धम्मोdham·mo पकासितो।pa·kā·si·to

     evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito.

     just so has the Buddha made the Teaching clear in many ways.

112. 112

     एसाहंe·sā·haṃ भवन्तंbha·van·taṃ गोतमंgo·ta·maṃ सरणंsa·ra·ṇaṃ गच्छामिgac·chā·mi धम्मञ्चdham·mañ·ca भिक्खुसङ्घञ्च।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghañ·ca

     Esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca.

     Good Gotama, I go for refuge to the Buddha, the Teaching, and the Sangha of monks.

113. 113

     उपासकंu·pā·sa·kaṃ मंmaṃ भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमोgo·ta·mo धारेतुdhā·re·tu अज्जतग्गेaj·ja·tag·ge पाणुपेतंpā·ṇu·pe·taṃ सरणंsa·ra·ṇaṃ गतं।ga·taṃ

     Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gataṁ.

     Please accept me as a lay follower who’s gone for refuge for life.

114. 114

     अधिवासेतुa·dhi·vā·se·tu चca मेme भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमोgo·ta·mo वेरञ्जायंve·rañ·jā·yaṃ वस्सावासंvas·sā·vā·saṃ सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेना”ति।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·nā

     Adhivāsetu ca me bhavaṁ gotamo verañjāyaṁ vassāvāsaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

     And please consent to spend the rainy-season residence at Verañjā together with the Sangha of monks.”

115. 115

     अधिवासेसिa·dhi·vā·se·si भगवाbha·ga·vā तुण्हीभावेन।tuṇ·hī·bhā·ve·na

     Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

     The Buddha consented by keeping silent, and the brahmin understood.

116. 116

     अथa·tha खोkho वेरञ्जोve·rañ·jo ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अधिवासनंa·dhi·vā·sa·naṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho verañjo brāhmaṇo bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

     He then got up from his seat, bowed down, circumambulated the Buddha with his right side toward him, and left.

117. 117

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na वेरञ्जाve·rañ·jā दुब्भिक्खाdub·bhik·khā होतिho·ti द्वीहितिकाdvī·hi·ti·kā सेतट्ठिकाse·taṭ·ṭhi·kā सलाकावुत्ताsa·lā·kā·vut·tā नna सुकराsu·ka·rā उञ्छेनuñ·che·na पग्गहेनpag·ga·he·na यापेतुं।yā·pe·tuṃ

     Tena kho pana samayena verañjā dubbhikkhā hoti dvīhitikā setaṭṭhikā salākāvuttā na sukarā uñchena paggahena yāpetuṁ.

     At that time Verañjā was short of food and afflicted with hunger, with crops affected by whiteheads and turned to straw. It was not easy to get by on almsfood.

118. 118

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na उत्तरापथकाut·ta·rā·pa·tha·kā अस्सवाणिजाas·sa·vā·ṇi·jā पञ्चमत्तेहिpañ·ca·mat·te·hi अस्ससतेहिas·sa·sa·te·hi वेरञ्जंve·rañ·jaṃ वस्सावासंvas·sā·vā·saṃ उपगताu·pa·ga·tā होन्ति।hon·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena uttarāpathakā assavāṇijā pañcamattehi assasatehi verañjaṁ vassāvāsaṁ upagatā honti.

     Just then some horse dealers from Uttarāpatha had entered the rainy-season residence at Verañjā with five hundred horses.

119. 119

     तेहिte·hi अस्समण्डलिकासुas·sa·maṇ·ḍa·li·kā·su भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पत्थपत्थपुलकंpat·tha·pat·tha·pu·la·kaṃ पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ होति।ho·ti

     Tehi assamaṇḍalikāsu bhikkhūnaṁ patthapatthapulakaṁ paññattaṁ hoti.

     In the horse pen they prepared portion upon portion of steamed grain for the monks.

120. 120

     भिक्खूbhik·khū पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya वेरञ्जंve·rañ·jaṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā पिण्डंpiṇ·ḍaṃ अलभमानाa·la·bha·mā·nā अस्समण्डलिकासुas·sa·maṇ·ḍa·li·kā·su पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरित्वाca·rit·vā पत्थपत्थपुलकंpat·tha·pat·tha·pu·la·kaṃ आरामंā·rā·maṃ आहरित्वाā·ha·rit·vā उदुक्खलेu·duk·kha·le कोट्टेत्वाkoṭ·ṭet·vā कोट्टेत्वाkoṭ·ṭet·vā परिभुञ्जन्ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti

     Bhikkhū pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya verañjaṁ piṇḍāya pavisitvā piṇḍaṁ alabhamānā assamaṇḍalikāsu piṇḍāya caritvā patthapatthapulakaṁ ārāmaṁ āharitvā udukkhale koṭṭetvā koṭṭetvā paribhuñjanti.

     Then, after robing up in the morning, the monks took their bowls and robes and entered Verañjā for alms. Not getting anything, they went to the horse pen. They then brought back many portions of steamed grain to the monastery, where they pounded and ate them.

121. 121

     आयस्माā·yas·mā पनानन्दोpa·nā·nan·do पत्थपुलकंpat·tha·pu·la·kaṃ सिलायंsi·lā·yaṃ पिसित्वाpi·sit·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to उपनामेति।u·pa·nā·me·ti तंtaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā परिभुञ्जति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ja·ti

     Āyasmā panānando patthapulakaṁ silāyaṁ pisitvā bhagavato upanāmeti. Taṁ bhagavā paribhuñjati.

     Venerable Ānanda crushed a portion on a stone, took it to the Buddha, and the Buddha ate it.

122. 122

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā उदुक्खलसद्दं।u·duk·kha·la·sad·daṃ

     Assosi kho bhagavā udukkhalasaddaṁ.

     And the Buddha heard the sound of the mortar.

123. 123

     जानन्तापिjā·nan·tā·pi तथागताta·thā·ga·tā पुच्छन्ति,puc·chan·ti जानन्तापिjā·nan·tā·pi नna पुच्छन्ति;puc·chan·ti

     Jānantāpi tathāgatā pucchanti, jānantāpi na pucchanti;

     When Buddhas know what is going on, sometimes they ask and sometimes not.

124. 124

     कालंkā·laṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā पुच्छन्ति,puc·chan·ti कालंkā·laṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā नna पुच्छन्ति;puc·chan·ti

     kālaṁ viditvā pucchanti, kālaṁ viditvā na pucchanti;

     They know the right time to ask and when not to ask.

125. 125

     अत्थसंहितंat·tha·saṃ·hi·taṃ तथागताta·thā·ga·tā पुच्छन्ति,puc·chan·ti नोno अनत्थसंहितं।a·nat·tha·saṃ·hi·taṃ

     atthasaṁhitaṁ tathāgatā pucchanti, no anatthasaṁhitaṁ.

     Buddhas ask when it is beneficial, otherwise not,

126. 126

     अनत्थसंहितेa·nat·tha·saṃ·hi·te सेतुघातोse·tu·ghā·to तथागतानं।ta·thā·ga·tā·naṃ

     Anatthasaṁhite setughāto tathāgatānaṁ.

     for Buddhas are incapable of doing what is unbeneficial.

127. 127

     द्वीहिdvī·hi आकारेहिā·kā·re·hi बुद्धाbud·dhā भगवन्तोbha·ga·van·to भिक्खूbhik·khū पटिपुच्छन्ति—pa·ṭi·puc·chan·ti धम्मंdham·maṃ वाvā देसेस्साम,de·ses·sā·ma सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ वाvā सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञपेस्सामाति।pañ·ña·pes·sā·mā·ti

     Dvīhi ākārehi buddhā bhagavanto bhikkhū paṭipucchanti— dhammaṁ vā desessāma, sāvakānaṁ vā sikkhāpadaṁ paññapessāmāti.

     Buddhas question the monks for two reasons: to give a teaching or to lay down a training rule.

128. 128

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ आमन्तेसि—“किंā·man·te·si नुnu खोkho सो,so आनन्द,ā·nan·da उदुक्खलसद्दो”ति?u·duk·kha·la·sad·do

     Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi—“kiṁ nu kho so, ānanda, udukkhalasaddo”ti?

     And so he said to Ānanda, “Ānanda, what’s this sound of a mortar?”

129. 129

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसि।ā·ro·ce·si

     Atha kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesi.

     Ānanda told him what was happening.

130. 130

     “साधुsā·dhu साधु,sā·dhu आनन्द।ā·nan·da

     “Sādhu sādhu, ānanda.

     “Well done, Ānanda.

131. 131

     तुम्हेहि,tum·he·hi आनन्द,ā·nan·da सप्पुरिसेहिsap·pu·ri·se·hi विजितं।vi·ji·taṃ पच्छिमाpac·chi·mā जनताja·na·tā सालिमंसोदनंsā·li·maṃ·so·da·naṃ अतिमञ्ञिस्सती”ति।a·ti·mañ·ñis·sa·tī

     Tumhehi, ānanda, sappurisehi vijitaṁ. Pacchimā janatā sālimaṁsodanaṁ atimaññissatī”ti.

     You’re all superior people who have conquered the problems of famine. Later generations will despise even meat and rice.”

132. 132

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā महामोग्गल्लानोma·hā·mog·gal·lā·no येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā महामोग्गल्लानोma·hā·mog·gal·lā·no भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     Then Venerable Mahāmoggallāna went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down, and said,

133. 133

     “एतरहि,e·ta·ra·hi भन्ते,bhan·te वेरञ्जाve·rañ·jā दुब्भिक्खाdub·bhik·khā द्वीहितिकाdvī·hi·ti·kā सेतट्ठिकाse·taṭ·ṭhi·kā सलाकावुत्ता।sa·lā·kā·vut·tā

     “etarahi, bhante, verañjā dubbhikkhā dvīhitikā setaṭṭhikā salākāvuttā.

     “At present, sir, Verañjā is short of food and afflicted with hunger, with crops affected by whiteheads and turned to straw.

134. 134

     नna सुकराsu·ka·rā उञ्छेनuñ·che·na पग्गहेनpag·ga·he·na यापेतुं।yā·pe·tuṃ

     Na sukarā uñchena paggahena yāpetuṁ.

     It’s not easy to get by on almsfood.

135. 135

     इमिस्सा,i·mis·sā भन्ते,bhan·te महापथवियाma·hā·pa·tha·vi·yā हेट्ठिमतलंheṭ·ṭhi·ma·ta·laṃ सम्पन्नं—सेय्यथापिsam·pan·naṃ खुद्दमधुंkhud·da·ma·dhuṃ अनीलकं;a·nī·la·kaṃ एवमस्सादं।e·va·mas·sā·daṃ

     Imissā, bhante, mahāpathaviyā heṭṭhimatalaṁ sampannaṁ—seyyathāpi khuddamadhuṁ anīlakaṁ; evamassādaṁ.

     But the undersurface of this great earth abounds with food, tasting just like pure honey.

136. 136

     साधाहं,sā·dhā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te पथविंpa·tha·viṃ परिवत्तेय्यं।pa·ri·vat·tey·yaṃ भिक्खूbhik·khū पप्पटकोजंpap·pa·ṭa·ko·jaṃ परिभुञ्जिस्सन्ती”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jis·san·tī

     Sādhāhaṁ, bhante, pathaviṁ parivatteyyaṁ. Bhikkhū pappaṭakojaṁ paribhuñjissantī”ti.

     Would it be good, sir, if I inverted the earth so that the monks may enjoy the nutrition in that ground fungus?”

137. 137

     “येye पनpa·na ते,te मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na पथविनिस्सिताpa·tha·vi·nis·si·tā पाणाpā·ṇā तेte कथंka·thaṃ करिस्ससी”ति?ka·ris·sa·sī

     “Ye pana te, moggallāna, pathavinissitā pāṇā te kathaṁ karissasī”ti?

     “But what will you do, Moggallāna, with the creatures that live there?”

138. 138

     “एकाहं,e·kā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te पाणिंpā·ṇiṃ अभिनिम्मिनिस्सामि—सेय्यथापिa·bhi·nim·mi·nis·sā·mi महापथवी।ma·hā·pa·tha·vī येye पथविनिस्सिताpa·tha·vi·nis·si·tā पाणाpā·ṇā तेte तत्थtat·tha सङ्कामेस्सामि।saṅ·kā·mes·sā·mi

     “Ekāhaṁ, bhante, pāṇiṁ abhinimminissāmi—seyyathāpi mahāpathavī. Ye pathavinissitā pāṇā te tattha saṅkāmessāmi.

     “I’ll transform one hand to be like the great earth and make those creatures go there.

139. 139

     एकेनe·ke·na हत्थेनhat·the·na पथविंpa·tha·viṃ परिवत्तेस्सामी”ति।pa·ri·vat·tes·sā·mī

     Ekena hatthena pathaviṁ parivattessāmī”ti.

     I’ll then invert the earth with the other hand.”

140. 140

     “अलं,a·laṃ मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na माmā तेte रुच्चिruc·ci पथविंpa·tha·viṃ परिवत्तेतुं।pa·ri·vat·te·tuṃ

     “Alaṁ, moggallāna, mā te rucci pathaviṁ parivattetuṁ.

     “Let it be, Moggallāna, don’t invert the earth.

141. 141

     विपल्लासम्पिvi·pal·lā·sam·pi सत्ताsat·tā पटिलभेय्युन्”ति।pa·ṭi·la·bhey·yun

     Vipallāsampi sattā paṭilabheyyun”ti.

     Those creatures might lose their minds.”

142. 142

     “साधु,sā·dhu भन्ते,bhan·te सब्बोsab·bo भिक्खुसङ्घोbhik·khu·saṅ·gho उत्तरकुरुंut·ta·ra·ku·ruṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya गच्छेय्या”ति।gac·chey·yā

     “Sādhu, bhante, sabbo bhikkhusaṅgho uttarakuruṁ piṇḍāya gaccheyyā”ti.

     “In that case, sir, would it be good if the whole Sangha of monks could go to Uttarakuru for alms?”

143. 143

     “अलं,a·laṃ मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na माmā तेte रुच्चिruc·ci सब्बस्सsab·bas·sa भिक्खुसङ्घस्सbhik·khu·saṅ·ghas·sa उत्तरकुरुंut·ta·ra·ku·ruṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya गमनन्”ति।ga·ma·nan

     “Alaṁ, moggallāna, mā te rucci sabbassa bhikkhusaṅghassa uttarakuruṁ piṇḍāya gamanan”ti.

     “Let it be, Moggallāna, don’t pursue this.”

144. 144

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सारिपुत्तस्सsā·ri·put·tas·sa रहोगतस्सra·ho·ga·tas·sa पटिसल्लीनस्सpa·ṭi·sal·lī·nas·sa एवंe·vaṃ चेतसोce·ta·so परिवितक्कोpa·ri·vi·tak·ko उदपादि—u·da·pā·di

     Atha kho āyasmato sāriputtassa rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi—

     Soon afterwards, while reflecting in private, Venerable Sāriputta thought,

145. 145

     “कतमेसानंka·ta·me·sā·naṃ खोkho बुद्धानंbud·dhā·naṃ भगवन्तानंbha·ga·van·tā·naṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ नna चिरट्ठितिकंci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ अहोसि;a·ho·si

     “katamesānaṁ kho buddhānaṁ bhagavantānaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na ciraṭṭhitikaṁ ahosi;

     “Which Buddhas had a long-lasting spiritual life, and which not?”

146. 146

     कतमेसानंka·ta·me·sā·naṃ बुद्धानंbud·dhā·naṃ भगवन्तानंbha·ga·van·tā·naṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चिरट्ठितिकंci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ अहोसी”ति?a·ho·sī

     katamesānaṁ buddhānaṁ bhagavantānaṁ brahmacariyaṁ ciraṭṭhitikaṁ ahosī”ti?

     (Pāli only)

147. 147

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to सायन्हसमयंsā·yan·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ पटिसल्लानाpa·ṭi·sal·lā·nā वुट्ठितोvuṭ·ṭhi·to येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā sāriputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     In the evening, after coming out of seclusion, Sāriputta went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down, and said,

148. 148

     “इधi·dha मय्हं,may·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te रहोगतस्सra·ho·ga·tas·sa पटिसल्लीनस्सpa·ṭi·sal·lī·nas·sa एवंe·vaṃ चेतसोce·ta·so परिवितक्कोpa·ri·vi·tak·ko उदपादि—u·da·pā·di

     “idha mayhaṁ, bhante, rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi—

     “Just now, sir, while I was reflecting in private, I was wondering which Buddhas had a long-lasting spiritual life, and which not.”

149. 149

     ‘कतमेसानंka·ta·me·sā·naṃ खोkho बुद्धानंbud·dhā·naṃ भगवन्तानंbha·ga·van·tā·naṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ नna चिरट्ठितिकंci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ अहोसि,a·ho·si कतमेसानंka·ta·me·sā·naṃ बुद्धानंbud·dhā·naṃ भगवन्तानंbha·ga·van·tā·naṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चिरट्ठितिकंci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ अहोसी’ति।a·ho·sī कतमेसानंka·ta·me·sā·naṃ नुnu खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te बुद्धानंbud·dhā·naṃ भगवन्तानंbha·ga·van·tā·naṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ नna चिरट्ठितिकंci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ अहोसि,a·ho·si कतमेसानंka·ta·me·sā·naṃ बुद्धानंbud·dhā·naṃ भगवन्तानंbha·ga·van·tā·naṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चिरट्ठितिकंci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ अहोसी”ति?a·ho·sī

     ‘katamesānaṁ kho buddhānaṁ bhagavantānaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na ciraṭṭhitikaṁ ahosi, katamesānaṁ buddhānaṁ bhagavantānaṁ brahmacariyaṁ ciraṭṭhitikaṁ ahosī’ti. Katamesānaṁ nu kho, bhante, buddhānaṁ bhagavantānaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na ciraṭṭhitikaṁ ahosi, katamesānaṁ buddhānaṁ bhagavantānaṁ brahmacariyaṁ ciraṭṭhitikaṁ ahosī”ti?

     (Pāli only)

150. 150

     “भगवतोbha·ga·va·to च,ca सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta विपस्सिस्सvi·pas·sis·sa भगवतोbha·ga·va·to चca सिखिस्सsi·khis·sa भगवतोbha·ga·va·to चca वेस्सभुस्सves·sa·bhus·sa ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ नna चिरट्ठितिकंci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ अहोसि।a·ho·si

     “Bhagavato ca, sāriputta, vipassissa bhagavato ca sikhissa bhagavato ca vessabhussa brahmacariyaṁ na ciraṭṭhitikaṁ ahosi.

     “Sāriputta, the spiritual life established by the Buddhas Vipassī, Sikhī, and Vessabhū didn’t last long.

151. 151

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to च,ca सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta ककुसन्धस्सka·ku·san·dhas·sa भगवतोbha·ga·va·to चca कोणागमनस्सko·ṇā·ga·ma·nas·sa भगवतोbha·ga·va·to चca कस्सपस्सkas·sa·pas·sa ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चिरट्ठितिकंci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ अहोसी”ति।a·ho·sī

     Bhagavato ca, sāriputta, kakusandhassa bhagavato ca koṇāgamanassa bhagavato ca kassapassa brahmacariyaṁ ciraṭṭhitikaṁ ahosī”ti.

     But the spiritual life established by the Buddhas Kakusandha, Konāgamana, and Kassapa did.”

152. 152

     “कोko नुnu खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te हेतुhe·tu कोko पच्चयो,pac·ca·yo येनye·na भगवतोbha·ga·va·to चca विपस्सिस्सvi·pas·sis·sa भगवतोbha·ga·va·to चca सिखिस्सsi·khis·sa भगवतोbha·ga·va·to चca वेस्सभुस्सves·sa·bhus·sa ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ नna चिरट्ठितिकंci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ अहोसी”ति?a·ho·sī

     “Ko nu kho, bhante, hetu ko paccayo, yena bhagavato ca vipassissa bhagavato ca sikhissa bhagavato ca vessabhussa brahmacariyaṁ na ciraṭṭhitikaṁ ahosī”ti?

     “And why did the spiritual life established by the former three Buddhas not last long?”

153. 153

     “भगवाbha·ga·vā च,ca सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta विपस्सीvi·pas·sī भगवाbha·ga·vā चca सिखीsi·khī भगवाbha·ga·vā चca वेस्सभूves·sa·bhū किलासुनोki·lā·su·no अहेसुंa·he·suṃ सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ वित्थारेनvit·thā·re·na धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेतुं।de·se·tuṃ

     “Bhagavā ca, sāriputta, vipassī bhagavā ca sikhī bhagavā ca vessabhū kilāsuno ahesuṁ sāvakānaṁ vitthārena dhammaṁ desetuṁ.

     “They made no effort to give detailed teachings to their disciples.

154. 154

     अप्पकञ्चap·pa·kañ·ca नेसंne·saṃ अहोसिa·ho·si सुत्तंsut·taṃ गेय्यंgey·yaṃ वेय्याकरणंvey·yā·ka·ra·ṇaṃ गाथाgā·thā उदानंu·dā·naṃ इतिवुत्तकंi·ti·vut·ta·kaṃ जातकंjā·ta·kaṃ अब्भुतधम्मंab·bhu·ta·dham·maṃ वेदल्लं।ve·dal·laṃ

     Appakañca nesaṁ ahosi suttaṁ geyyaṁ veyyākaraṇaṁ gāthā udānaṁ itivuttakaṁ jātakaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ vedallaṁ.

     They gave few discourses in prose or in mixed prose and verse; few expositions, verses, heartfelt exclamations, quotations, birth stories, amazing accounts, and analyses.

155. 155

     अपञ्ञत्तंa·pañ·ñat·taṃ सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ सिक्खापदं।sik·khā·pa·daṃ अनुद्दिट्ठंa·nud·diṭ·ṭhaṃ पातिमोक्खं।pā·ti·mok·khaṃ

     Apaññattaṁ sāvakānaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ. Anuddiṭṭhaṁ pātimokkhaṁ.

     Nor did they lay down training rules or recite a monastic code.

156. 156

     तेसंte·saṃ बुद्धानंbud·dhā·naṃ भगवन्तानंbha·ga·van·tā·naṃ अन्तरधानेनan·ta·ra·dhā·ne·na बुद्धानुबुद्धानंbud·dhā·nu·bud·dhā·naṃ सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ अन्तरधानेनan·ta·ra·dhā·ne·na येye तेte पच्छिमाpac·chi·mā सावकाsā·va·kā नानानामाnā·nā·nā·mā नानागोत्ताnā·nā·got·tā नानाजच्चाnā·nā·jac·cā नानाकुलाnā·nā·ku·lā पब्बजिताpab·ba·ji·tā तेte तंtaṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ खिप्पञ्ञेवkhip·pañ·ñe·va अन्तरधापेसुं।an·ta·ra·dhā·pe·suṃ

     Tesaṁ buddhānaṁ bhagavantānaṁ antaradhānena buddhānubuddhānaṁ sāvakānaṁ antaradhānena ye te pacchimā sāvakā nānānāmā nānāgottā nānājaccā nānākulā pabbajitā te taṁ brahmacariyaṁ khippaññeva antaradhāpesuṁ.

     After the disappearance of those Buddhas and the disciples awakened under them, those who were the last disciples—of various names, families, and castes, who had gone forth from various households—allowed that spiritual life to disappear rapidly.

157. 157

     सेय्यथापि,sey·ya·thā·pi सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta नानापुप्फानिnā·nā·pup·phā·ni फलकेpha·la·ke निक्खित्तानिnik·khit·tā·ni सुत्तेनsut·te·na असङ्गहितानिa·saṅ·ga·hi·tā·ni तानिtā·ni वातोvā·to विकिरतिvi·ki·ra·ti विधमतिvi·dha·ma·ti विद्धंसेति।vid·dhaṃ·se·ti

     Seyyathāpi, sāriputta, nānāpupphāni phalake nikkhittāni suttena asaṅgahitāni tāni vāto vikirati vidhamati viddhaṁseti.

     It’s like flowers on a wooden plank. If they’re not held together with a string, they’re scattered about, whirled about, and destroyed by the wind.

158. 158

     तंtaṃ किस्सkis·sa हेतु?he·tu

     Taṁ kissa hetu?

     Why?

159. 159

     यथाya·thā तंtaṃ सुत्तेनsut·te·na असङ्गहितत्ता।a·saṅ·ga·hi·tat·tā

     Yathā taṁ suttena asaṅgahitattā.

     Because they’re not held together with a string.

160. 160

     एवमेवe·va·me·va खो,kho सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta तेसंte·saṃ बुद्धानंbud·dhā·naṃ भगवन्तानंbha·ga·van·tā·naṃ अन्तरधानेनan·ta·ra·dhā·ne·na बुद्धानुबुद्धानंbud·dhā·nu·bud·dhā·naṃ सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ अन्तरधानेनan·ta·ra·dhā·ne·na येye तेte पच्छिमाpac·chi·mā सावकाsā·va·kā नानानामाnā·nā·nā·mā नानागोत्ताnā·nā·got·tā नानाजच्चाnā·nā·jac·cā नानाकुलाnā·nā·ku·lā पब्बजिताpab·ba·ji·tā तेte तंtaṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ खिप्पञ्ञेवkhip·pañ·ñe·va अन्तरधापेसुं।an·ta·ra·dhā·pe·suṃ

     Evameva kho, sāriputta, tesaṁ buddhānaṁ bhagavantānaṁ antaradhānena buddhānubuddhānaṁ sāvakānaṁ antaradhānena ye te pacchimā sāvakā nānānāmā nānāgottā nānājaccā nānākulā pabbajitā te taṁ brahmacariyaṁ khippaññeva antaradhāpesuṁ.

     Just so, after the disappearance of those Buddhas and the disciples awakened under them, those who were the last disciples allowed that spiritual life to disappear rapidly.

161. 161

     अकिलासुनोa·ki·lā·su·no चca तेte भगवन्तोbha·ga·van·to अहेसुंa·he·suṃ सावकेsā·va·ke चेतसाce·ta·sā चेतोce·to परिच्चpa·ric·ca ओवदितुं।o·va·di·tuṃ

     Akilāsuno ca te bhagavanto ahesuṁ sāvake cetasā ceto paricca ovadituṁ.

     Instead they were untiring at instructing their disciples by reading their minds.

162. 162

     भूतपुब्बं,bhū·ta·pub·baṃ सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta वेस्सभूves·sa·bhū भगवाbha·ga·vā अरहंa·ra·haṃ सम्मासम्बुद्धोsam·mā·sam·bud·dho अञ्ञतरस्मिंañ·ña·ta·ras·miṃ भिंसनकेbhiṃ·sa·na·ke वनसण्डेva·na·saṇ·ḍe सहस्संsa·has·saṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ चेतसाce·ta·sā चेतोce·to परिच्चpa·ric·ca ओवदतिo·va·da·ti अनुसासति—a·nu·sā·sa·ti

     Bhūtapubbaṁ, sāriputta, vessabhū bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho aññatarasmiṁ bhiṁsanake vanasaṇḍe sahassaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ cetasā ceto paricca ovadati anusāsati—

     At one time, Sāriputta, the Buddha Vessabhū, the Perfected and the fully Awakened One, was staying in a certain frightening forest grove. He instructed a sangha of a thousand monks by reading their minds, saying,

163. 163

     ‘एवंe·vaṃ वितक्केथ,vi·tak·ke·tha माmā एवंe·vaṃ वितक्कयित्थ;vi·tak·ka·yit·tha

     ‘evaṁ vitakketha, mā evaṁ vitakkayittha;

     ‘Think like this, not like that;

164. 164

     एवंe·vaṃ मनसिकरोथ,ma·na·si·ka·ro·tha माmā एवंe·vaṃ मनसाकत्थ;ma·na·sā·kat·tha

     evaṁ manasikarotha, mā evaṁ manasākattha;

     pay attention like this, not like that;

165. 165

     इदंi·daṃ पजहथ,pa·ja·ha·tha इदंi·daṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरथा’ति।vi·ha·ra·thā

     idaṁ pajahatha, idaṁ upasampajja viharathā’ti.

     abandon this and attain that.’

166. 166

     अथa·tha खो,kho सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta तस्सtas·sa भिक्खुसहस्सस्सbhik·khu·sa·has·sas·sa वेस्सभुनाves·sa·bhu·nā भगवताbha·ga·va·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na एवंe·vaṃ ओवदियमानानंo·va·di·ya·mā·nā·naṃ एवंe·vaṃ अनुसासियमानानंa·nu·sā·si·ya·mā·nā·naṃ अनुपादायa·nu·pā·dā·ya आसवेहिā·sa·ve·hi चित्तानिcit·tā·ni विमुच्चिंसु।vi·muc·ciṃ·su

     Atha kho, sāriputta, tassa bhikkhusahassassa vessabhunā bhagavatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena evaṁ ovadiyamānānaṁ evaṁ anusāsiyamānānaṁ anupādāya āsavehi cittāni vimucciṁsu.

     When they had been instructed by Buddha Vessabhū, their minds were freed from the corruptions through letting go.

167. 167

     तत्रtat·ra सुदं,su·daṃ सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta भिंसनकस्सbhiṃ·sa·na·kas·sa वनसण्डस्सva·na·saṇ·ḍas·sa भिंसनकतस्मिंbhiṃ·sa·na·ka·tas·miṃ होति—योho·ti कोचिko·ci अवीतरागोa·vī·ta·rā·go तंtaṃ वनसण्डंva·na·saṇ·ḍaṃ पविसति,pa·vi·sa·ti येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na लोमानिlo·mā·ni हंसन्ति।haṃ·san·ti

     Tatra sudaṁ, sāriputta, bhiṁsanakassa vanasaṇḍassa bhiṁsanakatasmiṁ hoti—yo koci avītarāgo taṁ vanasaṇḍaṁ pavisati, yebhuyyena lomāni haṁsanti.

     But if anyone with sensual desire entered that frightening forest grove, they usually had goosebumps all over.

168. 168

     अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta हेतुhe·tu अयंa·yaṃ पच्चयोpac·ca·yo येनye·na भगवतोbha·ga·va·to चca विपस्सिस्सvi·pas·sis·sa भगवतोbha·ga·va·to चca सिखिस्सsi·khis·sa भगवतोbha·ga·va·to चca वेस्सभुस्सves·sa·bhus·sa ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ नna चिरट्ठितिकंci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ अहोसी”ति।a·ho·sī

     Ayaṁ kho, sāriputta, hetu ayaṁ paccayo yena bhagavato ca vipassissa bhagavato ca sikhissa bhagavato ca vessabhussa brahmacariyaṁ na ciraṭṭhitikaṁ ahosī”ti.

     This is why the spiritual life established by those Buddhas did not last long.”

169. 169

     “कोko पन,pa·na भन्ते,bhan·te हेतुhe·tu कोko पच्चयोpac·ca·yo येनye·na भगवतोbha·ga·va·to चca ककुसन्धस्सka·ku·san·dhas·sa भगवतोbha·ga·va·to चca कोणागमनस्सko·ṇā·ga·ma·nas·sa भगवतोbha·ga·va·to चca कस्सपस्सkas·sa·pas·sa ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चिरट्ठितिकंci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ अहोसी”ति?a·ho·sī

     “Ko pana, bhante, hetu ko paccayo yena bhagavato ca kakusandhassa bhagavato ca koṇāgamanassa bhagavato ca kassapassa brahmacariyaṁ ciraṭṭhitikaṁ ahosī”ti?

     “Why then did the spiritual life established by the latter three Buddhas last long?”

170. 170

     “भगवाbha·ga·vā च,ca सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta ककुसन्धोka·ku·san·dho भगवाbha·ga·vā चca कोणागमनोko·ṇā·ga·ma·no भगवाbha·ga·vā चca कस्सपोkas·sa·po अकिलासुनोa·ki·lā·su·no अहेसुंa·he·suṃ सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ वित्थारेनvit·thā·re·na धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेतुं।de·se·tuṃ

     “Bhagavā ca, sāriputta, kakusandho bhagavā ca koṇāgamano bhagavā ca kassapo akilāsuno ahesuṁ sāvakānaṁ vitthārena dhammaṁ desetuṁ.

     “The Buddhas Kakusandha, Konāgamana, and Kassapa were untiring in giving detailed teachings to their disciples.

171. 171

     बहुञ्चba·huñ·ca नेसंne·saṃ अहोसिa·ho·si सुत्तंsut·taṃ गेय्यंgey·yaṃ वेय्याकरणंvey·yā·ka·ra·ṇaṃ गाथाgā·thā उदानंu·dā·naṃ इतिवुत्तकंi·ti·vut·ta·kaṃ जातकंjā·ta·kaṃ अब्भुतधम्मंab·bhu·ta·dham·maṃ वेदल्लं,ve·dal·laṃ

     Bahuñca nesaṁ ahosi suttaṁ geyyaṁ veyyākaraṇaṁ gāthā udānaṁ itivuttakaṁ jātakaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ vedallaṁ,

     They gave many discourses in prose and in mixed prose and verse; many expositions, verses, heartfelt exclamations, quotations, birth stories, amazing accounts, and analyses.

172. 172

     पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ सिक्खापदं,sik·khā·pa·daṃ उद्दिट्ठंud·diṭ·ṭhaṃ पातिमोक्खं।pā·ti·mok·khaṃ

     paññattaṁ sāvakānaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ, uddiṭṭhaṁ pātimokkhaṁ.

     And they laid down training rules and recited a monastic code.

173. 173

     तेसंte·saṃ बुद्धानंbud·dhā·naṃ भगवन्तानंbha·ga·van·tā·naṃ अन्तरधानेनan·ta·ra·dhā·ne·na बुद्धानुबुद्धानंbud·dhā·nu·bud·dhā·naṃ सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ अन्तरधानेनan·ta·ra·dhā·ne·na येye तेte पच्छिमाpac·chi·mā सावकाsā·va·kā नानानामाnā·nā·nā·mā नानागोत्ताnā·nā·got·tā नानाजच्चाnā·nā·jac·cā नानाकुलाnā·nā·ku·lā पब्बजिताpab·ba·ji·tā तेte तंtaṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चिरंci·raṃ दीघमद्धानंdī·gha·mad·dhā·naṃ ठपेसुं।ṭha·pe·suṃ

     Tesaṁ buddhānaṁ bhagavantānaṁ antaradhānena buddhānubuddhānaṁ sāvakānaṁ antaradhānena ye te pacchimā sāvakā nānānāmā nānāgottā nānājaccā nānākulā pabbajitā te taṁ brahmacariyaṁ ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ ṭhapesuṁ.

     After the disappearance of those Buddhas and the disciples awakened under them, those who were the last disciples—of various names, families, and castes, who had gone forth from various households—made that spiritual life last for a long time.

174. 174

     सेय्यथापि,sey·ya·thā·pi सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta नानापुप्फानिnā·nā·pup·phā·ni फलकेpha·la·ke निक्खित्तानिnik·khit·tā·ni सुत्तेनsut·te·na सुसङ्गहितानि,su·saṅ·ga·hi·tā·ni तानिtā·ni वातोvā·to नna विकिरतिvi·ki·ra·ti नna विधमतिvi·dha·ma·ti नna विद्धंसेति।vid·dhaṃ·se·ti

     Seyyathāpi, sāriputta, nānāpupphāni phalake nikkhittāni suttena susaṅgahitāni, tāni vāto na vikirati na vidhamati na viddhaṁseti.

     It’s like flowers on a wooden plank. If they’re held together with a string, they’re not scattered about, whirled about, or destroyed by the wind.

175. 175

     तंtaṃ किस्सkis·sa हेतु?he·tu

     Taṁ kissa hetu?

     Why?

176. 176

     यथाya·thā तंtaṃ सुत्तेनsut·te·na सुसङ्गहितत्ता।su·saṅ·ga·hi·tat·tā

     Yathā taṁ suttena susaṅgahitattā.

     Because they are held together with a string.

177. 177

     एवमेवe·va·me·va खो,kho सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta तेसंte·saṃ बुद्धानंbud·dhā·naṃ भगवन्तानंbha·ga·van·tā·naṃ अन्तरधानेनan·ta·ra·dhā·ne·na बुद्धानुबुद्धानंbud·dhā·nu·bud·dhā·naṃ सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ अन्तरधानेनan·ta·ra·dhā·ne·na येye तेte पच्छिमाpac·chi·mā सावकाsā·va·kā नानानामाnā·nā·nā·mā नानागोत्ताnā·nā·got·tā नानाजच्चाnā·nā·jac·cā नानाकुलाnā·nā·ku·lā पब्बजिताpab·ba·ji·tā तेte तंtaṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चिरंci·raṃ दीघमद्धानंdī·gha·mad·dhā·naṃ ठपेसुं।ṭha·pe·suṃ

     Evameva kho, sāriputta, tesaṁ buddhānaṁ bhagavantānaṁ antaradhānena buddhānubuddhānaṁ sāvakānaṁ antaradhānena ye te pacchimā sāvakā nānānāmā nānāgottā nānājaccā nānākulā pabbajitā te taṁ brahmacariyaṁ ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ ṭhapesuṁ.

     Just so, after the disappearance of those Buddhas and the disciples awakened under them, those who were the last disciples made that spiritual life last for a long time.

178. 178

     अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta हेतुhe·tu अयंa·yaṃ पच्चयोpac·ca·yo येनye·na भगवतोbha·ga·va·to चca ककुसन्धस्सka·ku·san·dhas·sa भगवतोbha·ga·va·to चca कोणागमनस्सko·ṇā·ga·ma·nas·sa भगवतोbha·ga·va·to चca कस्सपस्सkas·sa·pas·sa ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चिरट्ठितिकंci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ अहोसी”ति।a·ho·sī

     Ayaṁ kho, sāriputta, hetu ayaṁ paccayo yena bhagavato ca kakusandhassa bhagavato ca koṇāgamanassa bhagavato ca kassapassa brahmacariyaṁ ciraṭṭhitikaṁ ahosī”ti.

     This is why the spiritual life established by those Buddhas lasted long.”

179. 179

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā एकंसंe·kaṃ·saṃ उत्तरासङ्गंut·ta·rā·saṅ·gaṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनञ्जलिंte·nañ·ja·liṃ पणामेत्वाpa·ṇā·met·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     Sāriputta then got up from his seat, arranged his upper robe over one shoulder, raised his joined palms, and said,

180. 180

     “एतस्स,e·tas·sa भगवा,bha·ga·vā कालो।kā·lo एतस्स,e·tas·sa सुगत,su·ga·ta कालो।kā·lo

     “etassa, bhagavā, kālo. Etassa, sugata, kālo.

     “This is the time, venerable sir,

181. 181

     यंyaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञपेय्य,pañ·ña·pey·ya उद्दिसेय्यud·di·sey·ya पातिमोक्खं,pā·ti·mok·khaṃ यथयिदंya·tha·yi·daṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ अद्धनियंad·dha·ni·yaṃ अस्सas·sa चिरट्ठितिकन्”ति।ci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kan

     Yaṁ bhagavā sāvakānaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ paññapeyya, uddiseyya pātimokkhaṁ, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikan”ti.

     for laying down training rules and reciting a monastic code, so that this spiritual life may last for a long time.”

182. 182

     “आगमेहिā·ga·me·hi त्वं,tvaṃ सारिपुत्त।sā·ri·put·ta आगमेहिā·ga·me·hi त्वं,tvaṃ सारिपुत्त।sā·ri·put·ta

     “Āgamehi tvaṁ, sāriputta. Āgamehi tvaṁ, sāriputta.

     “Hold on, Sāriputta.

183. 183

     तथागतोवta·thā·ga·to·va तत्थtat·tha कालंkā·laṃ जानिस्सति।jā·nis·sa·ti

     Tathāgatova tattha kālaṁ jānissati.

     The Buddha knows the appropriate time for this.

184. 184

     नna ताव,tā·va सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta सत्थाsat·thā सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञपेतिpañ·ña·pe·ti उद्दिसतिud·di·sa·ti पातिमोक्खंpā·ti·mok·khaṃ यावyā·va नna इधेकच्चेi·dhe·kac·ce आसवट्ठानीयाā·sa·vaṭ·ṭhā·nī·yā धम्माdham·mā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe पातुभवन्ति।pā·tu·bha·van·ti यतोya·to चca खो,kho सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta इधेकच्चेi·dhe·kac·ce आसवट्ठानीयाā·sa·vaṭ·ṭhā·nī·yā धम्माdham·mā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe पातुभवन्ति,pā·tu·bha·van·ti अथa·tha सत्थाsat·thā सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञपेतिpañ·ña·pe·ti उद्दिसतिud·di·sa·ti पातिमोक्खंpā·ti·mok·khaṃ तेसंयेवte·saṃ·ye·va आसवट्ठानीयानंā·sa·vaṭ·ṭhā·nī·yā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ पटिघाताय।pa·ṭi·ghā·tā·ya

     Na tāva, sāriputta, satthā sāvakānaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ paññapeti uddisati pātimokkhaṁ yāva na idhekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā saṅghe pātubhavanti. Yato ca kho, sāriputta, idhekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā saṅghe pātubhavanti, atha satthā sāvakānaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ paññapeti uddisati pātimokkhaṁ tesaṁyeva āsavaṭṭhānīyānaṁ dhammānaṁ paṭighātāya.

     The Teacher doesn’t lay down training rules or recite a monastic code until the causes of corruption appear in the Sangha.

185. 185

     नna ताव,tā·va सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta इधेकच्चेi·dhe·kac·ce आसवट्ठानीयाā·sa·vaṭ·ṭhā·nī·yā धम्माdham·mā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe पातुभवन्तिpā·tu·bha·van·ti यावyā·va नna सङ्घोsaṅ·gho रत्तञ्ञुमहत्तंrat·tañ·ñu·ma·hat·taṃ पत्तोpat·to होति।ho·ti

     Na tāva, sāriputta, idhekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā saṅghe pātubhavanti yāva na saṅgho rattaññumahattaṁ patto hoti.

     And they don’t appear until the Sangha has attained long standing,

186. 186

     यतोya·to चca खो,kho सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta सङ्घोsaṅ·gho रत्तञ्ञुमहत्तंrat·tañ·ñu·ma·hat·taṃ पत्तोpat·to होतिho·ti अथa·tha इधेकच्चेi·dhe·kac·ce आसवट्ठानीयाā·sa·vaṭ·ṭhā·nī·yā धम्माdham·mā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe पातुभवन्ति,pā·tu·bha·van·ti अथa·tha सत्थाsat·thā सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञपेतिpañ·ña·pe·ti उद्दिसतिud·di·sa·ti पातिमोक्खंpā·ti·mok·khaṃ तेसंयेवte·saṃ·ye·va आसवट्ठानीयानंā·sa·vaṭ·ṭhā·nī·yā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ पटिघाताय।pa·ṭi·ghā·tā·ya

     Yato ca kho, sāriputta, saṅgho rattaññumahattaṁ patto hoti atha idhekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā saṅghe pātubhavanti, atha satthā sāvakānaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ paññapeti uddisati pātimokkhaṁ tesaṁyeva āsavaṭṭhānīyānaṁ dhammānaṁ paṭighātāya.

     (Pāli only)

187. 187

     नna ताव,tā·va सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta इधेकच्चेi·dhe·kac·ce आसवट्ठानीयाā·sa·vaṭ·ṭhā·nī·yā धम्माdham·mā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe पातुभवन्ति,pā·tu·bha·van·ti यावyā·va नna सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वेपुल्लमहत्तंve·pul·la·ma·hat·taṃ पत्तोpat·to होति।ho·ti

     Na tāva, sāriputta, idhekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā saṅghe pātubhavanti, yāva na saṅgho vepullamahattaṁ patto hoti.

     great size,

188. 188

     यतोya·to चca खो,kho सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वेपुल्लमहत्तंve·pul·la·ma·hat·taṃ पत्तोpat·to होति,ho·ti अथa·tha इधेकच्चेi·dhe·kac·ce आसवट्ठानीयाā·sa·vaṭ·ṭhā·nī·yā धम्माdham·mā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe पातुभवन्ति,pā·tu·bha·van·ti अथa·tha सत्थाsat·thā सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञपेतिpañ·ña·pe·ti उद्दिसतिud·di·sa·ti पातिमोक्खंpā·ti·mok·khaṃ तेसंयेवte·saṃ·ye·va आसवट्ठानीयानंā·sa·vaṭ·ṭhā·nī·yā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ पटिघाताय।pa·ṭi·ghā·tā·ya

     Yato ca kho, sāriputta, saṅgho vepullamahattaṁ patto hoti, atha idhekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā saṅghe pātubhavanti, atha satthā sāvakānaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ paññapeti uddisati pātimokkhaṁ tesaṁyeva āsavaṭṭhānīyānaṁ dhammānaṁ paṭighātāya.

     (Pāli only)

189. 189

     नna ताव,tā·va सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta इधेकच्चेi·dhe·kac·ce आसवट्ठानीयाā·sa·vaṭ·ṭhā·nī·yā धम्माdham·mā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe पातुभवन्ति,pā·tu·bha·van·ti यावyā·va नna सङ्घोsaṅ·gho लाभग्गमहत्तंlā·bhag·ga·ma·hat·taṃ पत्तोpat·to होति।ho·ti

     Na tāva, sāriputta, idhekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā saṅghe pātubhavanti, yāva na saṅgho lābhaggamahattaṁ patto hoti.

     an abundance of the best material support,

190. 190

     यतोya·to चca खो,kho सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta सङ्घोsaṅ·gho लाभग्गमहत्तंlā·bhag·ga·ma·hat·taṃ पत्तोpat·to होति,ho·ti अथa·tha इधेकच्चेi·dhe·kac·ce आसवट्ठानीयाā·sa·vaṭ·ṭhā·nī·yā धम्माdham·mā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe पातुभवन्ति,pā·tu·bha·van·ti अथa·tha सत्थाsat·thā सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञपेतिpañ·ña·pe·ti उद्दिसतिud·di·sa·ti पातिमोक्खंpā·ti·mok·khaṃ तेसंयेवte·saṃ·ye·va आसवट्ठानीयानंā·sa·vaṭ·ṭhā·nī·yā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ पटिघाताय।pa·ṭi·ghā·tā·ya

     Yato ca kho, sāriputta, saṅgho lābhaggamahattaṁ patto hoti, atha idhekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā saṅghe pātubhavanti, atha satthā sāvakānaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ paññapeti uddisati pātimokkhaṁ tesaṁyeva āsavaṭṭhānīyānaṁ dhammānaṁ paṭighātāya.

     (Pāli only)

191. 191

     नna ताव,tā·va सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta इधेकच्चेi·dhe·kac·ce आसवट्ठानीयाā·sa·vaṭ·ṭhā·nī·yā धम्माdham·mā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe पातुभवन्ति,pā·tu·bha·van·ti यावyā·va नna सङ्घोsaṅ·gho बाहुसच्चमहत्तंbā·hu·sac·ca·ma·hat·taṃ पत्तोpat·to होति।ho·ti

     Na tāva, sāriputta, idhekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā saṅghe pātubhavanti, yāva na saṅgho bāhusaccamahattaṁ patto hoti.

     or great learning.

192. 192

     यतोya·to चca खो,kho सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta सङ्घोsaṅ·gho बाहुसच्चमहत्तंbā·hu·sac·ca·ma·hat·taṃ पत्तोpat·to होति,ho·ti अथa·tha इधेकच्चेi·dhe·kac·ce आसवट्ठानीयाā·sa·vaṭ·ṭhā·nī·yā धम्माdham·mā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe पातुभवन्ति,pā·tu·bha·van·ti अथa·tha सत्थाsat·thā सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञपेतिpañ·ña·pe·ti उद्दिसतिud·di·sa·ti पातिमोक्खंpā·ti·mok·khaṃ तेसंयेवte·saṃ·ye·va आसवट्ठानीयानंā·sa·vaṭ·ṭhā·nī·yā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ पटिघाताय।pa·ṭi·ghā·tā·ya

     Yato ca kho, sāriputta, saṅgho bāhusaccamahattaṁ patto hoti, atha idhekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā saṅghe pātubhavanti, atha satthā sāvakānaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ paññapeti uddisati pātimokkhaṁ tesaṁyeva āsavaṭṭhānīyānaṁ dhammānaṁ paṭighātāya.

     When the causes of corruption appear for any of these reasons, then the Teacher lays down training rules for his disciples and recites a monastic code in order to counteract these causes.

193. 193

     निरब्बुदोni·rab·bu·do हि,hi सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta भिक्खुसङ्घोbhik·khu·saṅ·gho निरादीनवोni·rā·dī·na·vo अपगतकाळकोa·pa·ga·ta·kā·ḷa·ko सुद्धोsud·dho सारेsā·re पतिट्ठितो।pa·tiṭ·ṭhi·to

     Nirabbudo hi, sāriputta, bhikkhusaṅgho nirādīnavo apagatakāḷako suddho sāre patiṭṭhito.

     Sāriputta, the Sangha of monks is free from cancer and danger, stainless, pure, and established in the essence.

194. 194

     इमेसञ्हि,i·me·sañ·hi सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta पञ्चन्नंpañ·can·naṃ भिक्खुसतानंbhik·khu·sa·tā·naṃ योyo पच्छिमकोpac·chi·ma·ko भिक्खुbhik·khu सोso सोतापन्नोso·tā·pan·no अविनिपातधम्मोa·vi·ni·pā·ta·dham·mo नियतोni·ya·to सम्बोधिपरायणो”ति।sam·bo·dhi·pa·rā·ya·ṇo

     Imesañhi, sāriputta, pañcannaṁ bhikkhusatānaṁ yo pacchimako bhikkhu so sotāpanno avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo”ti.

     Even the least developed of these five hundred monks is a streamenterer. They will not be reborn in the lower world, but are fixed in destiny and bound for awakening.”

195. 195

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ आमन्तेसि—“आचिण्णंā·man·te·si खोkho पनेतं,pa·ne·taṃ आनन्द,ā·nan·da तथागतानंta·thā·ga·tā·naṃ येहिye·hi निमन्तिताni·man·ti·tā वस्संvas·saṃ वसन्ति,va·san·ti नna तेte अनपलोकेत्वाa·na·pa·lo·ket·vā जनपदचारिकंja·na·pa·da·cā·ri·kaṃ पक्कमन्ति।pak·ka·man·ti

     Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi—“āciṇṇaṁ kho panetaṁ, ānanda, tathāgatānaṁ yehi nimantitā vassaṁ vasanti, na te anapaloketvā janapadacārikaṁ pakkamanti.

     Then the Buddha said to Ānanda, “Ānanda, it’s the custom for Buddhas not to go wandering the country without taking leave of those who invited them to spend the rainy-season residence.

196. 196

     आयामानन्द,ā·yā·mā·nan·da वेरञ्जंve·rañ·jaṃ ब्राह्मणंbrāh·ma·ṇaṃ अपलोकेस्सामा”ति।a·pa·lo·kes·sā·mā

     Āyāmānanda, verañjaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ apalokessāmā”ti.

     Let’s go to the brahmin of Verañjā and take leave.”

197. 197

     “एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पच्चस्सोसि।pac·cas·so·si

     “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.

     “Yes, sir.”

198. 198

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya आयस्मताā·yas·ma·tā आनन्देनā·nan·de·na पच्छासमणेनpac·chā·sa·ma·ṇe·na येनye·na वेरञ्जस्सve·rañ·jas·sa ब्राह्मणस्सbrāh·ma·ṇas·sa निवेसनंni·ve·sa·naṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho bhagavā nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya āyasmatā ānandena pacchāsamaṇena yena verañjassa brāhmaṇassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi.

     The Buddha robed up, took his bowl and robe and, with Ānanda as his attendant, went to that brahmin’s house where he sat down on the prepared seat.

199. 199

     अथa·tha खोkho वेरञ्जोve·rañ·jo ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho verañjo brāhmaṇo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     The brahmin approached the Buddha, bowed, and sat down.

200. 200

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नंni·sin·naṃ खोkho वेरञ्जंve·rañ·jaṃ ब्राह्मणंbrāh·ma·ṇaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā एतदवोच—“निमन्तितम्हe·ta·da·vo·ca तया,ta·yā ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa वस्संवुट्ठा,vas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭhā अपलोकेमa·pa·lo·ke·ma तं,taṃ

     Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho verañjaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ bhagavā etadavoca—“nimantitamha tayā, brāhmaṇa, vassaṁvuṭṭhā, apalokema taṁ,

     And the Buddha said, “Brahmin, we’ve completed the rains residence according to your invitation, and now we take leave of you.

201. 201

     “इच्छामic·chā·ma मयंma·yaṃ जनपदचारिकंja·na·pa·da·cā·ri·kaṃ पक्कमितुन्”ति।pak·ka·mi·tun

     “icchāma mayaṁ janapadacārikaṁ pakkamitun”ti.

     We wish to depart to wander the country.”

202. 202

     “सच्चं,sac·caṃ भोbho गोतम,go·ta·ma निमन्तितत्थni·man·ti·tat·tha मयाma·yā वस्संवुट्ठा;vas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭhā अपिa·pi चca योyo देय्यधम्मोdey·ya·dham·mo सोso नna दिन्नो।din·no

     “Saccaṁ, bho gotama, nimantitattha mayā vassaṁvuṭṭhā; api ca yo deyyadhammo so na dinno.

     “It’s true, good Gotama, that you’ve completed the rains residence according to my invitation, but I haven’t given anything.

203. 203

     तञ्चtañ·ca खोkho नोno असन्तं,a·san·taṃ

     Tañca kho no asantaṁ,

     That’s not good.

204. 204

     नोपिno·pi अदातुकम्यता,a·dā·tu·kam·ya·tā तंtaṃ कुतेत्थku·tet·tha लब्भाlab·bhā बहुकिच्चाba·hu·kic·cā घरावासाgha·rā·vā·sā बहुकरणीया।ba·hu·ka·ra·ṇī·yā

     nopi adātukamyatā, taṁ kutettha labbhā bahukiccā gharāvāsā bahukaraṇīyā.

     It’s not because I didn’t want to, but because household life is so busy.

205. 205

     अधिवासेतुa·dhi·vā·se·tu मेme भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमोgo·ta·mo स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya भत्तंbhat·taṃ सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेना”ति।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·nā

     Adhivāsetu me bhavaṁ gotamo svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

     Would you and the Sangha of monks please accept a meal from me tomorrow?”

206. 206

     अधिवासेसिa·dhi·vā·se·si भगवाbha·ga·vā तुण्हीभावेन।tuṇ·hī·bhā·ve·na

     Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

     The Buddha consented by keeping silent.

207. 207

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā वेरञ्जंve·rañ·jaṃ ब्राह्मणंbrāh·ma·ṇaṃ धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेत्वाsan·das·set·vā समादपेत्वाsa·mā·da·pet·vā समुत्तेजेत्वाsa·mut·te·jet·vā सम्पहंसेत्वाsam·pa·haṃ·set·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho bhagavā verañjaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

     Then, after instructing, inspiring, and gladdening that brahmin with a teaching, the Buddha got up from his seat and left.

208. 208

     अथa·tha खोkho वेरञ्जोve·rañ·jo ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo तस्साtas·sā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na सकेsa·ke निवेसनेni·ve·sa·ne पणीतंpa·ṇī·taṃ खादनीयंkhā·da·nī·yaṃ भोजनीयंbho·ja·nī·yaṃ पटियादापेत्वाpa·ṭi·yā·dā·pet·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to कालंkā·laṃ आरोचापेसि—“कालो,ā·ro·cā·pe·si भोbho गोतम,go·ta·ma निट्ठितंniṭ·ṭhi·taṃ भत्तन्”ति।bhat·tan

     Atha kho verañjo brāhmaṇo tassā rattiyā accayena sake nivesane paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi—“kālo, bho gotama, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.

     The following morning the brahmin prepared various kinds of fine foods in his own house and then had the Buddha informed that the meal was ready.

209. 209

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya येनye·na वेरञ्जस्सve·rañ·jas·sa ब्राह्मणस्सbrāh·ma·ṇas·sa निवेसनंni·ve·sa·naṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदिni·sī·di सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेन।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na

     Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena verañjassa brāhmaṇassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena.

     The Buddha robed up, took his bowl and robe and, together with the Sangha of monks, he went to that brahmin’s house where he sat down on the prepared seat.

210. 210

     अथa·tha खोkho वेरञ्जोve·rañ·jo ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo बुद्धप्पमुखंbud·dhap·pa·mu·khaṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ पणीतेनpa·ṇī·te·na खादनीयेनkhā·da·nī·ye·na भोजनीयेनbho·ja·nī·ye·na सहत्थाsa·hat·thā सन्तप्पेत्वाsan·tap·pet·vā सम्पवारेत्वाsam·pa·vā·ret·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ भुत्ताविंbhut·tā·viṃ ओनीतपत्तपाणिंo·nī·ta·pat·ta·pā·ṇiṃ तिचीवरेनti·cī·va·re·na अच्छादेसि,ac·chā·de·si एकमेकञ्चe·ka·me·kañ·ca भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ एकमेकेनe·ka·me·ke·na दुस्सयुगेनdus·sa·yu·ge·na अच्छादेसि।ac·chā·de·si

     Atha kho verañjo brāhmaṇo buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappetvā sampavāretvā bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ ticīvarena acchādesi, ekamekañca bhikkhuṁ ekamekena dussayugena acchādesi.

     And that brahmin personally served and satisfied the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha with various kinds of fine foods. When the Buddha had finished his meal, the brahmin gave him a set of three robes and to each monk two pieces of cloth.

211. 211

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā वेरञ्जंve·rañ·jaṃ ब्राह्मणंbrāh·ma·ṇaṃ धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेत्वाsan·das·set·vā समादपेत्वाsa·mā·da·pet·vā समुत्तेजेत्वाsa·mut·te·jet·vā सम्पहंसेत्वाsam·pa·haṃ·set·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho bhagavā verañjaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

     The Buddha instructed, inspired, and gladdened him with a teaching, and then got up from his seat and left.

212. 212

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā वेरञ्जायंve·rañ·jā·yaṃ यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā अनुपगम्मa·nu·pa·gam·ma सोरेय्यंso·rey·yaṃ सङ्कस्संsaṅ·kas·saṃ कण्णकुज्जंkaṇ·ṇa·kuj·jaṃ येनye·na पयागपतिट्ठानंpa·yā·ga·pa·tiṭ·ṭhā·naṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पयागपतिट्ठानेpa·yā·ga·pa·tiṭ·ṭhā·ne गङ्गंgaṅ·gaṃ नदिंna·diṃ उत्तरित्वाut·ta·rit·vā येनye·na बाराणसीbā·rā·ṇa·sī तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

     Atha kho bhagavā verañjāyaṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā anupagamma soreyyaṁ saṅkassaṁ kaṇṇakujjaṁ yena payāgapatiṭṭhānaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā payāgapatiṭṭhāne gaṅgaṁ nadiṁ uttaritvā yena bārāṇasī tadavasari.

     After remaining in Verañjā for as long as he liked, the Buddha traveled to Payāgapatiṭṭhāna via Soreyya, Saṅkassa, and Kaṇṇakujja. There he crossed the river Ganges and continued on to Benares.

213. 213

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā बाराणसियंbā·rā·ṇa·si·yaṃ यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na वेसालीve·sā·lī तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho bhagavā bārāṇasiyaṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena vesālī tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi.

     After remaining at Benares for as long as he liked, he set out wandering toward Vesālī.

214. 214

     अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na वेसालीve·sā·lī तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

     Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena vesālī tadavasari.

     When he eventually arrived,

215. 215

     तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti महावनेma·hā·va·ne कूटागारसालायन्ति।kū·ṭā·gā·ra·sā·lā·yan·ti

     Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā vesāliyaṁ viharati mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyanti.

     he stayed in the house with the peaked roof in the Great Wood.

216. 216

     वेरञ्जभाणवारोve·rañ·ja·bhā·ṇa·vā·ro निट्ठितो।niṭ·ṭhi·to

     Verañjabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.

     The section for recitation on Verañjā is finished.

217. 217

     पठमपाराजिकसिक्खापदpa·ṭha·ma·pā·rā·ji·ka·sik·khā·pa·da

     Paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpada

     The training rule on sexual intercourse

218. 218

     1। सुदिन्नभाणवारsu·din·na·bhā·ṇa·vā·ra

     1. Sudinnabhāṇavāra

     First substory: the section for recitation on Sudinna

219. 219

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na वेसालियाve·sā·li·yā अविदूरेa·vi·dū·re कलन्दगामोka·lan·da·gā·mo नामnā·ma अत्थि।at·thi तत्थtat·tha सुदिन्नोsu·din·no नामnā·ma कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to सेट्ठिपुत्तोseṭ·ṭhi·put·to होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena vesāliyā avidūre kalandagāmo nāma atthi. Tattha sudinno nāma kalandaputto seṭṭhiputto hoti.

     At that time Sudinna, the son of a wealthy merchant, lived in a village called Kalanda not far from Vesālī.

220. 220

     अथa·tha खोkho सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to सम्बहुलेहिsam·ba·hu·le·hi सहायकेहिsa·hā·ya·ke·hi सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ वेसालिंve·sā·liṃ अगमासिa·ga·mā·si केनचिदेवke·na·ci·de·va करणीयेन।ka·ra·ṇī·ye·na

     Atha kho sudinno kalandaputto sambahulehi sahāyakehi saddhiṁ vesāliṁ agamāsi kenacideva karaṇīyena.

     On one occasion Sudinna went to Vesālī on some business together with a number of friends.

221. 221

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā महतियाma·ha·ti·yā परिसायpa·ri·sā·ya परिवुतोpa·ri·vu·to धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेन्तोde·sen·to निसिन्नोni·sin·no होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena bhagavā mahatiyā parisāya parivuto dhammaṁ desento nisinno hoti.

     Just then the Buddha was seated giving a teaching, surrounded by a large gathering of people.

222. 222

     अद्दसad·da·sa खोkho सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ महतियाma·ha·ti·yā परिसायpa·ri·sā·ya परिवुतंpa·ri·vu·taṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेन्तंde·sen·taṃ निसिन्नं।ni·sin·naṃ दिस्वानस्सdis·vā·nas·sa एतदहोसि—“यन्नूनाहम्पिe·ta·da·ho·si धम्मंdham·maṃ सुणेय्यन्”ति।su·ṇey·yan

     Addasa kho sudinno kalandaputto bhagavantaṁ mahatiyā parisāya parivutaṁ dhammaṁ desentaṁ nisinnaṁ. Disvānassa etadahosi—“yannūnāhampi dhammaṁ suṇeyyan”ti.

     When Sudinna saw this, he thought, “Why don’t I listen to the Teaching?”

223. 223

     अथa·tha खोkho सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to येनye·na साsā परिसाpa·ri·sā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho sudinno kalandaputto yena sā parisā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     He then approached that gathering and sat down.

224. 224

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नस्सni·sin·nas·sa खोkho सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa कलन्दपुत्तस्सka·lan·da·put·tas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Ekamantaṁ nisinnassa kho sudinnassa kalandaputtassa etadahosi—

     As he was sitting there, he thought,

225. 225

     “यथाya·thā यथाya·thā खोkho अहंa·haṃ भगवताbha·ga·va·tā धम्मंdham·maṃ देसितंde·si·taṃ आजानामि,ā·jā·nā·mi नयिदंna·yi·daṃ सुकरंsu·ka·raṃ अगारंa·gā·raṃ अज्झावसताaj·jhā·va·sa·tā एकन्तपरिपुण्णंe·kan·ta·pa·ri·puṇ·ṇaṃ एकन्तपरिसुद्धंe·kan·ta·pa·ri·sud·dhaṃ सङ्खलिखितंsaṅ·kha·li·khi·taṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरितुं;ca·ri·tuṃ

     “yathā yathā kho ahaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi, nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ;

     “The way I understand the Buddha’s Teaching, it’s not easy for one who lives at home to lead the spiritual life perfectly complete and pure as a polished conch shell.

226. 226

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ केसमस्सुंke·sa·mas·suṃ ओहारेत्वाo·hā·ret·vā कासायानिkā·sā·yā·ni वत्थानिvat·thā·ni अच्छादेत्वाac·chā·det·vā अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजेय्यन्”ति।pab·ba·jey·yan

     yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan”ti.

     Why don’t I cut off my hair and beard, put on the ocher robes, and go forth into homelessness?”

227. 227

     अथa·tha खोkho साsā परिसाpa·ri·sā भगवताbha·ga·va·tā धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सिताsan·das·si·tā समादपिताsa·mā·da·pi·tā समुत्तेजिताsa·mut·te·ji·tā सम्पहंसिताsam·pa·haṃ·si·tā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho sā parisā bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassitā samādapitā samuttejitā sampahaṁsitā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

     When those people had been instructed, inspired, and gladdened by the Buddha, they got up from their seats, bowed down, circumambulated him with their right sides toward him, and left.

228. 228

     अथa·tha खोkho सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to अचिरवुट्ठितायa·ci·ra·vuṭ·ṭhi·tā·ya परिसायpa·ri·sā·ya येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho sudinno kalandaputto aciravuṭṭhitāya parisāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho sudinno kalandaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     Sudinna then approached the Buddha, bowed, sat down, and told him what he had thought, adding,

229. 229

     “यथाya·thā यथाहं,ya·thā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te भगवताbha·ga·va·tā धम्मंdham·maṃ देसितंde·si·taṃ आजानामि,ā·jā·nā·mi नयिदंna·yi·daṃ सुकरंsu·ka·raṃ अगारंa·gā·raṃ अज्झावसताaj·jhā·va·sa·tā एकन्तपरिपुण्णंe·kan·ta·pa·ri·puṇ·ṇaṃ एकन्तपरिसुद्धंe·kan·ta·pa·ri·sud·dhaṃ सङ्खलिखितंsaṅ·kha·li·khi·taṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरितुं;ca·ri·tuṃ

     “yathā yathāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi, nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ;

     (Pāli only)

230. 230

     इच्छामहं,ic·chā·ma·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te केसमस्सुंke·sa·mas·suṃ ओहारेत्वाo·hā·ret·vā कासायानिkā·sā·yā·ni वत्थानिvat·thā·ni अच्छादेत्वाac·chā·det·vā अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजितुं।pab·ba·ji·tuṃ

     icchāmahaṁ, bhante, kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ.

     (Pāli only)

231. 231

     पब्बाजेतुpab·bā·je·tu मंmaṃ भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

     Pabbājetu maṁ bhagavā”ti.

     “Sir, please give me the going forth.”

232. 232

     “अनुञ्ञातोसिa·nuñ·ñā·to·si पनpa·na त्वं,tvaṃ सुदिन्न,su·din·na मातापितूहिmā·tā·pi·tū·hi अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति?pab·baj·jā·yā

     “Anuññātosi pana tvaṁ, sudinna, mātāpitūhi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti?

     “But, Sudinna, do you have your parents’ permission?”

233. 233

     “नna खोkho अहं,a·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अनुञ्ञातोa·nuñ·ñā·to मातापितूहिmā·tā·pi·tū·hi अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति।pab·baj·jā·yā

     “Na kho ahaṁ, bhante, anuññāto mātāpitūhi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.

     “No.”

234. 234

     “नna खो,kho सुदिन्न,su·din·na तथागताta·thā·ga·tā अननुञ्ञातंa·na·nuñ·ñā·taṃ मातापितूहिmā·tā·pi·tū·hi पुत्तंput·taṃ पब्बाजेन्ती”ति।pab·bā·jen·tī

     “Na kho, sudinna, tathāgatā ananuññātaṁ mātāpitūhi puttaṁ pabbājentī”ti.

     “Buddhas don’t give the going forth to anyone who hasn’t gotten their parents’ permission.”

235. 235

     “सोहं,so·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te तथाta·thā करिस्सामिka·ris·sā·mi यथाya·thā मंmaṃ मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro अनुजानिस्सन्तिa·nu·jā·nis·san·ti अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति।pab·baj·jā·yā

     “Sohaṁ, bhante, tathā karissāmi yathā maṁ mātāpitaro anujānissanti agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.

     “I’ll do whatever is necessary, sir, to get my parents’ permission.”

236. 236

     अथa·tha खोkho सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ तंtaṃ करणीयंka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ तीरेत्वाtī·ret·vā येनye·na कलन्दगामोka·lan·da·gā·mo येनye·na मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho sudinno kalandaputto vesāliyaṁ taṁ karaṇīyaṁ tīretvā yena kalandagāmo yena mātāpitaro tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā mātāpitaro etadavoca—

     After finishing his business in Vesālī, Sudinna returned to Kalanda. He then went to his parents and said,

237. 237

     “अम्मताता,am·ma·tā·tā यथाya·thā यथाहंya·thā·haṃ भगवताbha·ga·va·tā धम्मंdham·maṃ देसितंde·si·taṃ आजानामि,ā·jā·nā·mi नयिदंna·yi·daṃ सुकरंsu·ka·raṃ अगारंa·gā·raṃ अज्झावसताaj·jhā·va·sa·tā एकन्तपरिपुण्णंe·kan·ta·pa·ri·puṇ·ṇaṃ एकन्तपरिसुद्धंe·kan·ta·pa·ri·sud·dhaṃ सङ्खलिखितंsaṅ·kha·li·khi·taṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरितुं;ca·ri·tuṃ

     “ammatātā, yathā yathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi, nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ;

     “Mom and dad, the way I understand the Buddha’s Teaching, it’s not easy for one who lives at home to lead the spiritual life perfectly complete and pure.

238. 238

     इच्छामहंic·chā·ma·haṃ केसमस्सुंke·sa·mas·suṃ ओहारेत्वाo·hā·ret·vā कासायानिkā·sā·yā·ni वत्थानिvat·thā·ni अच्छादेत्वाac·chā·det·vā अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजितुं।pab·ba·ji·tuṃ

     icchāmahaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ.

     I want to cut off my hair and beard, put on the ocher robes, and go forth into homelessness.

239. 239

     अनुजानाथa·nu·jā·nā·tha मंmaṃ अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति।pab·baj·jā·yā

     Anujānātha maṁ agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.

     Please give me permission to go forth.”

240. 240

     एवंe·vaṃ वुत्ते,vut·te सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa कलन्दपुत्तस्सka·lan·da·put·tas·sa मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ कलन्दपुत्तंka·lan·da·put·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Evaṁ vutte, sudinnassa kalandaputtassa mātāpitaro sudinnaṁ kalandaputtaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     (Pāli only)

241. 241

     “त्वंtvaṃ खोसि,kho·si तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ एकपुत्तकोe·ka·put·ta·ko पियोpi·yo मनापोma·nā·po सुखेधितोsu·khe·dhi·to सुखपरिहतो।su·kha·pa·ri·ha·to नna त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na किञ्चिkiñ·ci दुक्खस्सduk·khas·sa जानासि।jā·nā·si

     “tvaṁ khosi, tāta sudinna, amhākaṁ ekaputtako piyo manāpo sukhedhito sukhaparihato. Na tvaṁ, tāta sudinna, kiñci dukkhassa jānāsi.

     “But, Sudinna, you’re our only child, and we love you dearly. You live in comfort and we care for you. You don’t have any suffering.

242. 242

     मरणेनपिma·ra·ṇe·na·pi मयंma·yaṃ तेte अकामकाa·kā·ma·kā विनाvi·nā भविस्सामbha·vis·sā·ma

     Maraṇenapi mayaṁ te akāmakā vinā bhavissāma

     Even if you died we wouldn’t want to lose you.

243. 243

     किंkiṃ पनpa·na मयंma·yaṃ तंtaṃ जीवन्तंjī·van·taṃ अनुजानिस्सामa·nu·jā·nis·sā·ma अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति।pab·baj·jā·yā

     kiṁ pana mayaṁ taṁ jīvantaṁ anujānissāma agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.

     So how can we allow you to go forth into homelessness while you’re still living?”

244. 244

     दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Dutiyampi kho sudinno kalandaputto mātāpitaro etadavoca—

     Sudinna asked his parents a second

245. 245

     “अम्मताता,am·ma·tā·tā यथाya·thā यथाहंya·thā·haṃ भगवताbha·ga·va·tā धम्मंdham·maṃ देसितंde·si·taṃ आजानामि,ā·jā·nā·mi नयिदंna·yi·daṃ सुकरंsu·ka·raṃ अगारंa·gā·raṃ अज्झावसताaj·jhā·va·sa·tā एकन्तपरिपुण्णंe·kan·ta·pa·ri·puṇ·ṇaṃ एकन्तपरिसुद्धंe·kan·ta·pa·ri·sud·dhaṃ सङ्खलिखितंsaṅ·kha·li·khi·taṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरितुं;ca·ri·tuṃ

     “ammatātā, yathā yathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi, nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ;

     (Pāli only)

246. 246

     इच्छामहंic·chā·ma·haṃ केसमस्सुंke·sa·mas·suṃ ओहारेत्वाo·hā·ret·vā कासायानिkā·sā·yā·ni वत्थानिvat·thā·ni अच्छादेत्वाac·chā·det·vā अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजितुं।pab·ba·ji·tuṃ

     icchāmahaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ.

     (Pāli only)

247. 247

     अनुजानाथa·nu·jā·nā·tha मंmaṃ अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति।pab·baj·jā·yā

     Anujānātha maṁ agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.

     (Pāli only)

248. 248

     दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa कलन्दपुत्तस्सka·lan·da·put·tas·sa मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ कलन्दपुत्तंka·lan·da·put·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Dutiyampi kho sudinnassa kalandaputtassa mātāpitaro sudinnaṁ kalandaputtaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     (Pāli only)

249. 249

     “त्वंtvaṃ खोसि,kho·si तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ एकपुत्तकोe·ka·put·ta·ko पियोpi·yo मनापोma·nā·po सुखेधितोsu·khe·dhi·to सुखपरिहतो।su·kha·pa·ri·ha·to

     “tvaṁ khosi, tāta sudinna, amhākaṁ ekaputtako piyo manāpo sukhedhito sukhaparihato.

     (Pāli only)

250. 250

     नna त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na किञ्चिkiñ·ci दुक्खस्सduk·khas·sa जानासि।jā·nā·si

     Na tvaṁ, tāta sudinna, kiñci dukkhassa jānāsi.

     (Pāli only)

251. 251

     मरणेनपिma·ra·ṇe·na·pi मयंma·yaṃ तेte अकामकाa·kā·ma·kā विनाvi·nā भविस्साम,bha·vis·sā·ma

     Maraṇenapi mayaṁ te akāmakā vinā bhavissāma,

     (Pāli only)

252. 252

     किंkiṃ पनpa·na मयंma·yaṃ तंtaṃ जीवन्तंjī·van·taṃ अनुजानिस्सामa·nu·jā·nis·sā·ma अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति।pab·baj·jā·yā

     kiṁ pana mayaṁ taṁ jīvantaṁ anujānissāma agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.

     (Pāli only)

253. 253

     ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Tatiyampi kho sudinno kalandaputto mātāpitaro etadavoca—

     and a third time,

254. 254

     “अम्मताता,am·ma·tā·tā यथाya·thā यथाहंya·thā·haṃ भगवताbha·ga·va·tā धम्मंdham·maṃ देसितंde·si·taṃ आजानामि,ā·jā·nā·mi नयिदंna·yi·daṃ सुकरंsu·ka·raṃ अगारंa·gā·raṃ अज्झावसताaj·jhā·va·sa·tā एकन्तपरिपुण्णंe·kan·ta·pa·ri·puṇ·ṇaṃ एकन्तपरिसुद्धंe·kan·ta·pa·ri·sud·dhaṃ सङ्खलिखितंsaṅ·kha·li·khi·taṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरितुं;ca·ri·tuṃ

     “ammatātā, yathā yathāhaṁ bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi, nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ;

     (Pāli only)

255. 255

     इच्छामहंic·chā·ma·haṃ केसमस्सुंke·sa·mas·suṃ ओहारेत्वाo·hā·ret·vā कासायानिkā·sā·yā·ni वत्थानिvat·thā·ni अच्छादेत्वाac·chā·det·vā अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजितुं।pab·ba·ji·tuṃ

     icchāmahaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ.

     (Pāli only)

256. 256

     अनुजानाथa·nu·jā·nā·tha मंmaṃ अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति।pab·baj·jā·yā

     Anujānātha maṁ agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.

     (Pāli only)

257. 257

     ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa कलन्दपुत्तस्सka·lan·da·put·tas·sa मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ कलन्दपुत्तंka·lan·da·put·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Tatiyampi kho sudinnassa kalandaputtassa mātāpitaro sudinnaṁ kalandaputtaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     (Pāli only)

258. 258

     “त्वंtvaṃ खोसि,kho·si तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ एकपुत्तकोe·ka·put·ta·ko पियोpi·yo मनापोma·nā·po सुखेधितोsu·khe·dhi·to सुखपरिहतो।su·kha·pa·ri·ha·to

     “tvaṁ khosi, tāta sudinna, amhākaṁ ekaputtako piyo manāpo sukhedhito sukhaparihato.

     but got the same reply.

259. 259

     नna त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na किञ्चिkiñ·ci दुक्खस्सduk·khas·sa जानासि।jā·nā·si

     Na tvaṁ, tāta sudinna, kiñci dukkhassa jānāsi.

     (Pāli only)

260. 260

     मरणेनपिma·ra·ṇe·na·pi मयंma·yaṃ तेte अकामकाa·kā·ma·kā विनाvi·nā भविस्साम,bha·vis·sā·ma

     Maraṇenapi mayaṁ te akāmakā vinā bhavissāma,

     (Pāli only)

261. 261

     किंkiṃ पनpa·na मयंma·yaṃ तंtaṃ जीवन्तंjī·van·taṃ अनुजानिस्सामa·nu·jā·nis·sā·ma अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति।pab·baj·jā·yā

     kiṁ pana mayaṁ taṁ jīvantaṁ anujānissāma agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.

     (Pāli only)

262. 262

     अथa·tha खोkho सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तो—“नka·lan·da·put·to मंmaṃ मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro अनुजानन्तिa·nu·jā·nan·ti अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति,pab·baj·jā·yā

     Atha kho sudinno kalandaputto—“na maṁ mātāpitaro anujānanti agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti,

     (Pāli only)

263. 263

     तत्थेवtat·the·va अनन्तरहितायa·nan·ta·ra·hi·tā·ya भूमियाbhū·mi·yā निपज्जि—ni·paj·ji

     tattheva anantarahitāya bhūmiyā nipajji—

     He then lay down on the bare ground and said,

264. 264

     “इधेवi·dhe·va मेme मरणंma·ra·ṇaṃ भविस्सतिbha·vis·sa·ti पब्बज्जाpab·baj·jā वा”ति।vā

     “idheva me maraṇaṁ bhavissati pabbajjā vā”ti.

     “I’ll either die right here or go forth!”

265. 265

     अथa·tha खोkho सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to एकम्पिe·kam·pi भत्तंbhat·taṃ नna भुञ्जि,bhuñ·ji द्वेपिdve·pi भत्तानिbhat·tā·ni नna भुञ्जि,bhuñ·ji तीणिपिtī·ṇi·pi भत्तानिbhat·tā·ni नna भुञ्जि,bhuñ·ji चत्तारिपिcat·tā·ri·pi भत्तानिbhat·tā·ni नna भुञ्जि,bhuñ·ji पञ्चपिpañ·ca·pi भत्तानिbhat·tā·ni नna भुञ्जि,bhuñ·ji छपिcha·pi भत्तानिbhat·tā·ni नna भुञ्जि,bhuñ·ji सत्तपिsat·ta·pi भत्तानिbhat·tā·ni नna भुञ्जि।bhuñ·ji

     Atha kho sudinno kalandaputto ekampi bhattaṁ na bhuñji, dvepi bhattāni na bhuñji, tīṇipi bhattāni na bhuñji, cattāripi bhattāni na bhuñji, pañcapi bhattāni na bhuñji, chapi bhattāni na bhuñji, sattapi bhattāni na bhuñji.

     And he did not eat at the next seven meals.

266. 266

     अथa·tha खोkho सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa कलन्दपुत्तस्सka·lan·da·put·tas·sa मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ कलन्दपुत्तंka·lan·da·put·taṃ एतदवोचुं—“त्वंe·ta·da·vo·cuṃ खोसि,kho·si तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ एकपुत्तकोe·ka·put·ta·ko पियोpi·yo मनापोma·nā·po सुखेधितोsu·khe·dhi·to सुखपरिहतो।su·kha·pa·ri·ha·to

     Atha kho sudinnassa kalandaputtassa mātāpitaro sudinnaṁ kalandaputtaṁ etadavocuṁ—“tvaṁ khosi, tāta sudinna, amhākaṁ ekaputtako piyo manāpo sukhedhito sukhaparihato.

     His parents repeated what they had said, adding,

267. 267

     नna त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na किञ्चिkiñ·ci दुक्खस्सduk·khas·sa जानासि।jā·nā·si

     Na tvaṁ, tāta sudinna, kiñci dukkhassa jānāsi.

     (Pāli only)

268. 268

     मरणेनपिma·ra·ṇe·na·pi मयंma·yaṃ तेte अकामकाa·kā·ma·kā विनाvi·nā भविस्साम,bha·vis·sā·ma

     Maraṇenapi mayaṁ te akāmakā vinā bhavissāma,

     (Pāli only)

269. 269

     किंkiṃ पनpa·na मयंma·yaṃ तंtaṃ जीवन्तंjī·van·taṃ अनुजानिस्सामa·nu·jā·nis·sā·ma अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाय?pab·baj·jā·ya

     kiṁ pana mayaṁ taṁ jīvantaṁ anujānissāma agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya?

     (Pāli only)

270. 270

     उट्ठेहि,uṭ·ṭhe·hi तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na भुञ्जbhuñ·ja चca पिवpi·va चca परिचारेहिpa·ri·cā·re·hi च,ca

     Uṭṭhehi, tāta sudinna, bhuñja ca piva ca paricārehi ca,

     “Get up, Sudinna, eat, drink, and enjoy yourself!

271. 271

     भुञ्जन्तोbhuñ·jan·to पिवन्तोpi·van·to परिचारेन्तोpa·ri·cā·ren·to कामेkā·me परिभुञ्जन्तोpa·ri·bhuñ·jan·to पुञ्ञानिpuñ·ñā·ni करोन्तोka·ron·to अभिरमस्सु।a·bhi·ra·mas·su

     bhuñjanto pivanto paricārento kāme paribhuñjanto puññāni karonto abhiramassu.

     Enjoy the pleasures of the world and do acts of merit.

272. 272

     नna तंtaṃ मयंma·yaṃ अनुजानामa·nu·jā·nā·ma अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति।pab·baj·jā·yā

     Na taṁ mayaṁ anujānāma agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.

     We won’t allow you to go forth.”

273. 273

     एवंe·vaṃ वुत्ते,vut·te सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to तुण्हीtuṇ·hī अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Evaṁ vutte, sudinno kalandaputto tuṇhī ahosi.

     But Sudinna did not respond.

274. 274

     दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho …पे…pe

     Dutiyampi kho …pe…

     His parents said the same thing a second

275. 275

     ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa कलन्दपुत्तस्सka·lan·da·put·tas·sa मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ कलन्दपुत्तंka·lan·da·put·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     tatiyampi kho sudinnassa kalandaputtassa mātāpitaro sudinnaṁ kalandaputtaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     and a third time,

276. 276

     “त्वंtvaṃ खोसि,kho·si तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ एकपुत्तकोe·ka·put·ta·ko पियोpi·yo मनापोma·nā·po सुखेधितोsu·khe·dhi·to सुखपरिहतो।su·kha·pa·ri·ha·to

     “tvaṁ khosi, tāta sudinna, amhākaṁ ekaputtako piyo manāpo sukhedhito sukhaparihato.

     (Pāli only)

277. 277

     नna त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na किञ्चिkiñ·ci दुक्खस्सduk·khas·sa जानासि।jā·nā·si

     Na tvaṁ, tāta sudinna, kiñci dukkhassa jānāsi.

     (Pāli only)

278. 278

     मरणेनपिma·ra·ṇe·na·pi मयंma·yaṃ तेte अकामकाa·kā·ma·kā विनाvi·nā भविस्साम,bha·vis·sā·ma

     Maraṇenapi mayaṁ te akāmakā vinā bhavissāma,

     (Pāli only)

279. 279

     किंkiṃ पनpa·na मयंma·yaṃ तंtaṃ जीवन्तंjī·van·taṃ अनुजानिस्सामa·nu·jā·nis·sā·ma अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाय।pab·baj·jā·ya

     kiṁ pana mayaṁ taṁ jīvantaṁ anujānissāma agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya.

     (Pāli only)

280. 280

     उट्ठेहि,uṭ·ṭhe·hi तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na भुञ्जbhuñ·ja चca पिवpi·va चca परिचारेहिpa·ri·cā·re·hi च,ca

     Uṭṭhehi, tāta sudinna, bhuñja ca piva ca paricārehi ca,

     (Pāli only)

281. 281

     भुञ्जन्तोbhuñ·jan·to पिवन्तोpi·van·to परिचारेन्तोpa·ri·cā·ren·to कामेkā·me परिभुञ्जन्तोpa·ri·bhuñ·jan·to पुञ्ञानिpuñ·ñā·ni करोन्तोka·ron·to अभिरमस्सु।a·bhi·ra·mas·su

     bhuñjanto pivanto paricārento kāme paribhuñjanto puññāni karonto abhiramassu.

     (Pāli only)

282. 282

     नna तंtaṃ मयंma·yaṃ अनुजानामa·nu·jā·nā·ma अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति।pab·baj·jā·yā

     Na taṁ mayaṁ anujānāma agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.

     (Pāli only)

283. 283

     ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to तुण्हीtuṇ·hī अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Tatiyampi kho sudinno kalandaputto tuṇhī ahosi.

     but Sudinna remained silent.

284. 284

     अथa·tha खोkho सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa कलन्दपुत्तस्सka·lan·da·put·tas·sa सहायकाsa·hā·ya·kā येनye·na सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ कलन्दपुत्तंka·lan·da·put·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Atha kho sudinnassa kalandaputtassa sahāyakā yena sudinno kalandaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā sudinnaṁ kalandaputtaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     Then Sudinna’s friends went to him and repeated three times what his parents had said.

285. 285

     “त्वंtvaṃ खोसि,kho·si सम्मsam·ma सुदिन्न,su·din·na मातापितूनंmā·tā·pi·tū·naṃ एकपुत्तकोe·ka·put·ta·ko पियोpi·yo मनापोma·nā·po सुखेधितोsu·khe·dhi·to सुखपरिहतो।su·kha·pa·ri·ha·to

     “tvaṁ khosi, samma sudinna, mātāpitūnaṁ ekaputtako piyo manāpo sukhedhito sukhaparihato.

     (Pāli only)

286. 286

     नna त्वं,tvaṃ सम्मsam·ma सुदिन्न,su·din·na किञ्चिkiñ·ci दुक्खस्सduk·khas·sa जानासि।jā·nā·si

     Na tvaṁ, samma sudinna, kiñci dukkhassa jānāsi.

     (Pāli only)

287. 287

     मरणेनपिma·ra·ṇe·na·pi तेte मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro अकामकाa·kā·ma·kā विनाvi·nā भविस्सन्ति,bha·vis·san·ti

     Maraṇenapi te mātāpitaro akāmakā vinā bhavissanti,

     (Pāli only)

288. 288

     किंkiṃ पनpa·na तंtaṃ जीवन्तंjī·van·taṃ अनुजानिस्सन्तिa·nu·jā·nis·san·ti अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजाय।pab·ba·jā·ya

     kiṁ pana taṁ jīvantaṁ anujānissanti agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajāya.

     (Pāli only)

289. 289

     उट्ठेहि,uṭ·ṭhe·hi सम्मsam·ma सुदिन्न,su·din·na भुञ्जbhuñ·ja चca पिवpi·va चca परिचारेहिpa·ri·cā·re·hi च,ca

     Uṭṭhehi, samma sudinna, bhuñja ca piva ca paricārehi ca,

     (Pāli only)

290. 290

     भुञ्जन्तोbhuñ·jan·to पिवन्तोpi·van·to परिचारेन्तोpa·ri·cā·ren·to कामेkā·me परिभुञ्जन्तोpa·ri·bhuñ·jan·to पुञ्ञानिpuñ·ñā·ni करोन्तोka·ron·to अभिरमस्सु,a·bhi·ra·mas·su

     bhuñjanto pivanto paricārento kāme paribhuñjanto puññāni karonto abhiramassu,

     (Pāli only)

291. 291

     नna तंtaṃ मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro अनुजानिस्सन्तिa·nu·jā·nis·san·ti अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति।pab·baj·jā·yā

     na taṁ mātāpitaro anujānissanti agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.

     (Pāli only)

292. 292

     एवंe·vaṃ वुत्ते,vut·te सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to तुण्हीtuṇ·hī अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Evaṁ vutte, sudinno kalandaputto tuṇhī ahosi.

     (Pāli only)

293. 293

     दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho …पे…pe

     Dutiyampi kho …pe…

     (Pāli only)

294. 294

     ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa कलन्दपुत्तस्सka·lan·da·put·tas·sa सहायकाsa·hā·ya·kā सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ कलन्दपुत्तंka·lan·da·put·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     tatiyampi kho sudinnassa kalandaputtassa sahāyakā sudinnaṁ kalandaputtaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     (Pāli only)

295. 295

     “त्वंtvaṃ खोसि,kho·si सम्मsam·ma सुदिन्नsu·din·na …पे…pe

     “tvaṁ khosi, samma sudinna …pe…

     (Pāli only)

296. 296

     ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to तुण्हीtuṇ·hī अहोसि।a·ho·si

     tatiyampi kho sudinno kalandaputto tuṇhī ahosi.

     (Pāli only)

297. 297

     अथa·tha खोkho सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa कलन्दपुत्तस्सka·lan·da·put·tas·sa सहायकाsa·hā·ya·kā येनye·na सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa कलन्दपुत्तस्सka·lan·da·put·tas·sa मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa कलन्दपुत्तस्सka·lan·da·put·tas·sa मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Atha kho sudinnassa kalandaputtassa sahāyakā yena sudinnassa kalandaputtassa mātāpitaro tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā sudinnassa kalandaputtassa mātāpitaro etadavocuṁ—

     When Sudinna still did not respond, Sudinna’s friends went to his parents and said,

298. 298

     “अम्मताता,am·ma·tā·tā एसोe·so सुदिन्नोsu·din·no अनन्तरहितायa·nan·ta·ra·hi·tā·ya भूमियाbhū·mi·yā निपन्नो—ni·pan·no

     “ammatātā, eso sudinno anantarahitāya bhūmiyā nipanno—

     (Pāli only)

299. 299

     ‘इधेवi·dhe·va मेme मरणंma·ra·ṇaṃ भविस्सतिbha·vis·sa·ti पब्बज्जाpab·baj·jā वा’ति।vā

     ‘idheva me maraṇaṁ bhavissati pabbajjā vā’ti.

     “Sudinna says he’ll either die right there on the bare ground or go forth.

300. 300

     सचेsa·ce तुम्हेtum·he सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ नानुजानिस्सथnā·nu·jā·nis·sa·tha अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाय,pab·baj·jā·ya तत्थेवtat·the·va मरणंma·ra·ṇaṃ आगमिस्सति।ā·ga·mis·sa·ti

     Sace tumhe sudinnaṁ nānujānissatha agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya, tattheva maraṇaṁ āgamissati.

     If you don’t allow him to go forth, he’ll die there.

301. 301

     सचेsa·ce पनpa·na तुम्हेtum·he सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ अनुजानिस्सथa·nu·jā·nis·sa·tha अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाय,pab·baj·jā·ya पब्बजितम्पिpab·ba·ji·tam·pi नंnaṃ दक्खिस्सथ।dak·khis·sa·tha

     Sace pana tumhe sudinnaṁ anujānissatha agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya, pabbajitampi naṁ dakkhissatha.

     But if you allow him to go forth, you’ll see him again afterwards.

302. 302

     सचेsa·ce सुदिन्नोsu·din·no नाभिरमिस्सतिnā·bhi·ra·mis·sa·ti अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाय,pab·baj·jā·ya काkā तस्सtas·sa अञ्ञाañ·ñā गतिga·ti भविस्सति,bha·vis·sa·ti इधेवi·dhe·va पच्चागमिस्सति।pac·cā·ga·mis·sa·ti

     Sace sudinno nābhiramissati agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya, kā tassa aññā gati bhavissati, idheva paccāgamissati.

     And if he doesn’t enjoy the going forth, what alternative will he have but to come back here?

303. 303

     अनुजानाथa·nu·jā·nā·tha सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति।pab·baj·jā·yā

     Anujānātha sudinnaṁ agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.

     So please allow him to go forth.”

304. 304

     “अनुजानाम,a·nu·jā·nā·ma ताता,tā·tā सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति।pab·baj·jā·yā

     “Anujānāma, tātā, sudinnaṁ agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.

     “Alright, then.”

305. 305

     अथa·tha खोkho सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa कलन्दपुत्तस्सka·lan·da·put·tas·sa सहायकाsa·hā·ya·kā येनye·na सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ कलन्दपुत्तंka·lan·da·put·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Atha kho sudinnassa kalandaputtassa sahāyakā yena sudinno kalandaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā sudinnaṁ kalandaputtaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     And Sudinna’s friends said to him,

306. 306

     “उट्ठेहि,uṭ·ṭhe·hi सम्मsam·ma सुदिन्न,su·din·na अनुञ्ञातोसिa·nuñ·ñā·to·si मातापितूहिmā·tā·pi·tū·hi अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति।pab·baj·jā·yā

     “uṭṭhehi, samma sudinna, anuññātosi mātāpitūhi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.

     “Get up, Sudinna, your parents have given you permission to go forth.”

307. 307

     अथa·tha खोkho सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तो—“अनुञ्ञातोम्हिka·lan·da·put·to किरki·ra मातापितूहिmā·tā·pi·tū·hi अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति,pab·baj·jā·yā हट्ठोhaṭ·ṭho उदग्गोu·dag·go पाणिनाpā·ṇi·nā गत्तानिgat·tā·ni परिपुञ्छन्तोpa·ri·puñ·chan·to वुट्ठासि।vuṭ·ṭhā·si

     Atha kho sudinno kalandaputto—“anuññātomhi kira mātāpitūhi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti, haṭṭho udaggo pāṇinā gattāni paripuñchanto vuṭṭhāsi.

     When Sudinna heard this, he was excited and joyful, stroking his limbs with his hands as he got up.

308. 308

     अथa·tha खोkho सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to कतिपाहंka·ti·pā·haṃ बलंba·laṃ गाहेत्वाgā·het·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho sudinno kalandaputto katipāhaṁ balaṁ gāhetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho sudinno kalandaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     After spending a few days to regain his strength, he went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down, and said,

309. 309

     “अनुञ्ञातोa·nuñ·ñā·to अहं,a·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te मातापितूहिmā·tā·pi·tū·hi अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाय।pab·baj·jā·ya

     “anuññāto ahaṁ, bhante, mātāpitūhi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāya.

     “Sir, I’ve gotten my parents’ permission to go forth.

310. 310

     पब्बाजेतुpab·bā·je·tu मंmaṃ भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

     Pabbājetu maṁ bhagavā”ti.

     Please give me the going forth.”

311. 311

     अलत्थa·lat·tha खोkho सुदिन्नोsu·din·no कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to भगवतोbha·ga·va·to सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke पब्बज्जं,pab·baj·jaṃ अलत्थa·lat·tha उपसम्पदं।u·pa·sam·pa·daṃ

     Alattha kho sudinno kalandaputto bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ, alattha upasampadaṁ.

     He then received the going forth and the full ordination in the presence of the Buddha.

312. 312

     अचिरूपसम्पन्नोa·ci·rū·pa·sam·pan·no चca पनायस्माpa·nā·yas·mā सुदिन्नोsu·din·no एवरूपेe·va·rū·pe धुतगुणेdhu·ta·gu·ṇe समादायsa·mā·dā·ya वत्तति,vat·ta·ti आरञ्ञिकोā·rañ·ñi·ko होतिho·ti पिण्डपातिकोpiṇ·ḍa·pā·ti·ko पंसुकूलिकोpaṃ·su·kū·li·ko सपदानचारिको,sa·pa·dā·na·cā·ri·ko

     Acirūpasampanno ca panāyasmā sudinno evarūpe dhutaguṇe samādāya vattati, āraññiko hoti piṇḍapātiko paṁsukūliko sapadānacāriko,

     Not long afterwards he practiced these kinds of ascetic practices: he stayed in the wilderness, ate only almsfood, wore rag robes, and went on continuous almsround.

313. 313

     अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ वज्जिगामंvaj·ji·gā·maṃ उपनिस्सायu·pa·nis·sā·ya विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     aññataraṁ vajjigāmaṁ upanissāya viharati.

     And he lived supported by a certain Vajjian village.

314. 314

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na वज्जीvaj·jī दुब्भिक्खाdub·bhik·khā होतिho·ti द्वीहितिकाdvī·hi·ti·kā सेतट्ठिकाse·taṭ·ṭhi·kā सलाकावुत्ता,sa·lā·kā·vut·tā नna सुकराsu·ka·rā उञ्छेनuñ·che·na पग्गहेनpag·ga·he·na यापेतुं।yā·pe·tuṃ

     Tena kho pana samayena vajjī dubbhikkhā hoti dvīhitikā setaṭṭhikā salākāvuttā, na sukarā uñchena paggahena yāpetuṁ.

     Soon afterwards, the Vajjians were short of food and afflicted with hunger, with crops affected by whiteheads and turned to straw. It was not easy to get by on almsfood.

315. 315

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa एतदहोसि—“एतरहिe·ta·da·ho·si खोkho वज्जीvaj·jī दुब्भिक्खाdub·bhik·khā द्वीहितिकाdvī·hi·ti·kā सेतट्ठिकाse·taṭ·ṭhi·kā सलाकावुत्ता,sa·lā·kā·vut·tā नna सुकराsu·ka·rā उञ्छेनuñ·che·na पग्गहेनpag·ga·he·na यापेतुं।yā·pe·tuṃ

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa etadahosi—“etarahi kho vajjī dubbhikkhā dvīhitikā setaṭṭhikā salākāvuttā, na sukarā uñchena paggahena yāpetuṁ.

     Sudinna considered this and thought,

316. 316

     बहूba·hū खोkho पनpa·na मेme वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ ञातीñā·tī अड्ढाaḍ·ḍhā महद्धनाma·had·dha·nā महाभोगाma·hā·bho·gā पहूतजातरूपरजताpa·hū·ta·jā·ta·rū·pa·ra·ja·tā पहूतवित्तूपकरणाpa·hū·ta·vit·tū·pa·ka·ra·ṇā पहूतधनधञ्ञा।pa·hū·ta·dha·na·dhañ·ñā

     Bahū kho pana me vesāliyaṁ ñātī aḍḍhā mahaddhanā mahābhogā pahūtajātarūparajatā pahūtavittūpakaraṇā pahūtadhanadhaññā.

     “I have many wealthy relatives in Vesālī.

317. 317

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ ञातीñā·tī उपनिस्सायu·pa·nis·sā·ya विहरेय्यं।vi·ha·rey·yaṃ

     Yannūnāhaṁ ñātī upanissāya vihareyyaṁ.

     Why don’t I get them to support me?

318. 318

     ञातीñā·tī मंmaṃ निस्सायnis·sā·ya दानानिdā·nā·ni दस्सन्तिdas·san·ti पुञ्ञानिpuñ·ñā·ni करिस्सन्ति,ka·ris·san·ti भिक्खूbhik·khū चca लाभंlā·bhaṃ लच्छन्ति,lac·chan·ti अहञ्चa·hañ·ca पिण्डकेनpiṇ·ḍa·ke·na नna किलमिस्सामी”ति।ki·la·mis·sā·mī

     Ñātī maṁ nissāya dānāni dassanti puññāni karissanti, bhikkhū ca lābhaṁ lacchanti, ahañca piṇḍakena na kilamissāmī”ti.

     My relatives will be able to make offerings and merit, the monks will get material support, and I’ll have no trouble getting almsfood.”

319. 319

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सुदिन्नोsu·din·no सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ संसामेत्वाsaṃ·sā·met·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya येनye·na वेसालीve·sā·lī तेनte·na पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho āyasmā sudinno senāsanaṁ saṁsāmetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena vesālī tena pakkāmi.

     He then put his dwelling in order, took his bowl and robe, and set out for Vesālī.

320. 320

     अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na येनye·na वेसालीve·sā·lī तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ आयस्माā·yas·mā सुदिन्नोsu·din·no वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti महावनेma·hā·va·ne कूटागारसालायं।kū·ṭā·gā·ra·sā·lā·yaṃ

     Anupubbena yena vesālī tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ āyasmā sudinno vesāliyaṁ viharati mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyaṁ.

     When he eventually arrived, he stayed in the house with the peaked roof in the Great Wood.

321. 321

     अस्सोसुंas·so·suṃ खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa ञातका—“सुदिन्नोñā·ta·kā किरki·ra कलन्दपुत्तोka·lan·da·put·to वेसालिंve·sā·liṃ अनुप्पत्तो”ति।a·nup·pat·to तेte आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa सट्ठिमत्तेsaṭ·ṭhi·mat·te थालिपाकेthā·li·pā·ke भत्ताभिहारंbhat·tā·bhi·hā·raṃ अभिहरिंसु।a·bhi·ha·riṃ·su

     Assosuṁ kho āyasmato sudinnassa ñātakā—“sudinno kira kalandaputto vesāliṁ anuppatto”ti. Te āyasmato sudinnassa saṭṭhimatte thālipāke bhattābhihāraṁ abhihariṁsu.

     His relatives heard that he had arrived in Vesālī, and they presented him with an offering of sixty servings of food.

322. 322

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सुदिन्नोsu·din·no तेte सट्ठिमत्तेsaṭ·ṭhi·mat·te थालिपाकेthā·li·pā·ke भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ विस्सज्जेत्वाvis·saj·jet·vā पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya कलन्दगामंka·lan·da·gā·maṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya पाविसि।pā·vi·si

     Atha kho āyasmā sudinno te saṭṭhimatte thālipāke bhikkhūnaṁ vissajjetvā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya kalandagāmaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi.

     Sudinna gave the sixty servings to the monks. He then took his bowl and robe and went to the village of Kalanda for alms.

323. 323

     कलन्दगामेka·lan·da·gā·me सपदानंsa·pa·dā·naṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na सकपितुsa·ka·pi·tu निवेसनंni·ve·sa·naṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi

     Kalandagāme sapadānaṁ piṇḍāya caramāno yena sakapitu nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami.

     As he was going on continuous almsround, he came to his own father’s house.

324. 324

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa ञातिदासीñā·ti·dā·sī आभिदोसिकंā·bhi·do·si·kaṃ कुम्मासंkum·mā·saṃ छड्डेतुकामाchaḍ·ḍe·tu·kā·mā होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena āyasmato sudinnassa ñātidāsī ābhidosikaṁ kummāsaṁ chaḍḍetukāmā hoti.

     Just then a female slave of Sudinna’s relatives was about to throw away the previous evening’s porridge.

325. 325

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सुदिन्नोsu·din·no तंtaṃ ञातिदासिंñā·ti·dā·siṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho āyasmā sudinno taṁ ñātidāsiṁ etadavoca—

     Sudinna said to her,

326. 326

     “सचेsa·ce तं,taṃ भगिनि,bha·gi·ni छड्डनीयधम्मं,chaḍ·ḍa·nī·ya·dham·maṃ इधi·dha मेme पत्तेpat·te आकिरा”ति।ā·ki·rā

     “sace taṁ, bhagini, chaḍḍanīyadhammaṁ, idha me patte ākirā”ti.

     “If that’s to be thrown away, sister, put it here in my almsbowl.”

327. 327

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa ञातिदासीñā·ti·dā·sī तंtaṃ आभिदोसिकंā·bhi·do·si·kaṃ कुम्मासंkum·mā·saṃ आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पत्तेpat·te आकिरन्तीā·ki·ran·tī हत्थानञ्चhat·thā·nañ·ca पादानञ्चpā·dā·nañ·ca सरस्सsa·ras·sa चca निमित्तंni·mit·taṃ अग्गहेसि।ag·ga·he·si

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa ñātidāsī taṁ ābhidosikaṁ kummāsaṁ āyasmato sudinnassa patte ākirantī hatthānañca pādānañca sarassa ca nimittaṁ aggahesi.

     As she was putting the porridge into his bowl, she recognized his hands, feet, and voice.

328. 328

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa ञातिदासीñā·ti·dā·sī येनायस्मतोye·nā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa माताmā·tā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa मातरंmā·ta·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa ñātidāsī yenāyasmato sudinnassa mātā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmato sudinnassa mātaraṁ etadavoca—

     She then went to his mother and said,

329. 329

     “यग्घेय्ये,yag·ghey·ye जानेय्यासि,jā·ney·yā·si

     “yaggheyye, jāneyyāsi,

     “Please be aware, ma’am,

330. 330

     अय्यपुत्तोay·ya·put·to सुदिन्नोsu·din·no अनुप्पत्तो”ति।a·nup·pat·to

     ayyaputto sudinno anuppatto”ti.

     that master Sudinna is back.”

331. 331

     “सचे,sa·ce जे,je त्वंtvaṃ सच्चंsac·caṃ भणसि,bha·ṇa·si अदासिंa·dā·siṃ तंtaṃ करोमी”ति।ka·ro·mī

     “Sace, je, tvaṁ saccaṁ bhaṇasi, adāsiṁ taṁ karomī”ti.

     “Gosh, if you’re telling the truth, you’re a free woman!”

332. 332

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्माā·yas·mā सुदिन्नोsu·din·no तंtaṃ आभिदोसिकंā·bhi·do·si·kaṃ कुम्मासंkum·mā·saṃ अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ कुट्टमूलंkuṭ·ṭa·mū·laṃ निस्सायnis·sā·ya परिभुञ्जति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ja·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā sudinno taṁ ābhidosikaṁ kummāsaṁ aññataraṁ kuṭṭamūlaṁ nissāya paribhuñjati.

     As Sudinna was eating the previous evening’s porridge at the base of a certain wall,

333. 333

     पितापिpi·tā·pi खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa कम्मन्ताkam·man·tā आगच्छन्तोā·gac·chan·to अद्दसad·da·sa आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ तंtaṃ आभिदोसिकंā·bhi·do·si·kaṃ कुम्मासंkum·mā·saṃ अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ कुट्टमूलंkuṭ·ṭa·mū·laṃ निस्सायnis·sā·ya परिभुञ्जन्तं।pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·taṃ

     Pitāpi kho āyasmato sudinnassa kammantā āgacchanto addasa āyasmantaṁ sudinnaṁ taṁ ābhidosikaṁ kummāsaṁ aññataraṁ kuṭṭamūlaṁ nissāya paribhuñjantaṁ.

     his father was coming home from work.

334. 334

     दिस्वानdis·vā·na येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā सुदिन्नोsu·din·no तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Disvāna yenāyasmā sudinno tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ sudinnaṁ etadavoca—

     When he saw him sitting there, he went up to him and said,

335. 335

     “अत्थिat·thi नाम,nā·ma तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na आभिदोसिकंā·bhi·do·si·kaṃ कुम्मासंkum·mā·saṃ परिभुञ्जिस्ससि।pa·ri·bhuñ·jis·sa·si

     “atthi nāma, tāta sudinna, ābhidosikaṁ kummāsaṁ paribhuñjissasi.

     “But, Sudinna, isn’t there … What! You’re eating old porridge!

336. 336

     ननुna·nu नाम,nā·ma तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na सकंsa·kaṃ गेहंge·haṃ गन्तब्बन्”ति?gan·tab·ban

     Nanu nāma, tāta sudinna, sakaṁ gehaṁ gantabban”ti?

     Why don’t you come to your own house?”

337. 337

     “अगमिम्हa·ga·mim·ha खोkho ते,te गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti गेहं।ge·haṃ

     “Agamimha kho te, gahapati, gehaṁ.

     “We went to your house, householder.

338. 338

     ततायंta·tā·yaṃ आभिदोसिकोā·bhi·do·si·ko कुम्मासो”ति।kum·mā·so

     Tatāyaṁ ābhidosiko kummāso”ti.

     That’s where we received this porridge.”

339. 339

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पिताpi·tā आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa बाहायंbā·hā·yaṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca “एहि,e·hi तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na घरंgha·raṃ गमिस्सामा”ति।ga·mis·sā·mā

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa pitā āyasmato sudinnassa bāhāyaṁ gahetvā āyasmantaṁ sudinnaṁ etadavoca— “ehi, tāta sudinna, gharaṁ gamissāmā”ti.

     Sudinna’s father took him by the arm and said, “Come, let’s go home.”

340. 340

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सुदिन्नोsu·din·no येनye·na सकपितुsa·ka·pi·tu निवेसनंni·ve·sa·naṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho āyasmā sudinno yena sakapitu nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi.

     Sudinna went to his father’s house and sat down on the prepared seat.

341. 341

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पिताpi·tā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca “भुञ्ज,bhuñ·ja तातtā·ta सुदिन्ना”ति।su·din·nā

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa pitā āyasmantaṁ sudinnaṁ etadavoca— “bhuñja, tāta sudinnā”ti.

     His father said to him, “Please eat, Sudinna.”

342. 342

     “अलं,a·laṃ गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti कतंka·taṃ मेme अज्जaj·ja भत्तकिच्चन्”ति।bhat·ta·kic·can

     “Alaṁ, gahapati, kataṁ me ajja bhattakiccan”ti.

     “There’s no need. I’m done for today.”

343. 343

     “अधिवासेहि,a·dhi·vā·se·hi तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya भत्तन्”ति।bhat·tan

     “Adhivāsehi, tāta sudinna, svātanāya bhattan”ti.

     “Then come back for the meal tomorrow.”

344. 344

     अधिवासेसिa·dhi·vā·se·si खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सुदिन्नोsu·din·no तुण्हीभावेन।tuṇ·hī·bhā·ve·na अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सुदिन्नोsu·din·no उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Adhivāsesi kho āyasmā sudinno tuṇhībhāvena. Atha kho āyasmā sudinno uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

     Sudinna consented by keeping silent, and he got up from his seat and left.

345. 345

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa माताmā·tā तस्साtas·sā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na हरितेनha·ri·te·na गोमयेनgo·ma·ye·na पथविंpa·tha·viṃ ओपुञ्जापेत्वाo·puñ·jā·pet·vā द्वेdve पुञ्जेpuñ·je कारापेसि—एकंkā·rā·pe·si हिरञ्ञस्स,hi·rañ·ñas·sa एकंe·kaṃ सुवण्णस्स।su·vaṇ·ṇas·sa

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa mātā tassā rattiyā accayena haritena gomayena pathaviṁ opuñjāpetvā dve puñje kārāpesi—ekaṁ hiraññassa, ekaṁ suvaṇṇassa.

     The next morning Sudinna’s mother had the floor smeared with fresh cow-dung. She then piled up two heaps, one with money, the other with gold.

346. 346

     तावtā·va महन्ताma·han·tā पुञ्जाpuñ·jā अहेसुं,a·he·suṃ ओरतोo·ra·to ठितोṭhi·to पुरिसोpu·ri·so पारतोpā·ra·to ठितंṭhi·taṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ नna पस्सति;pas·sa·ti पारतोpā·ra·to ठितोṭhi·to पुरिसोpu·ri·so ओरतोo·ra·to ठितंṭhi·taṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ नna पस्सति।pas·sa·ti

     Tāva mahantā puñjā ahesuṁ, orato ṭhito puriso pārato ṭhitaṁ purisaṁ na passati; pārato ṭhito puriso orato ṭhitaṁ purisaṁ na passati.

     The heaps were so large that a man standing on one side could not see a man standing on the other.

347. 347

     तेte पुञ्जेpuñ·je किलञ्जेहिki·lañ·je·hi पटिच्छादापेत्वाpa·ṭic·chā·dā·pet·vā मज्झेmaj·jhe आसनंā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञापेत्वाpañ·ñā·pet·vā तिरोकरणीयंti·ro·ka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ परिक्खिपित्वाpa·rik·khi·pit·vā आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पुराणदुतियिकंpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kaṃ आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Te puñje kilañjehi paṭicchādāpetvā majjhe āsanaṁ paññāpetvā tirokaraṇīyaṁ parikkhipitvā āyasmato sudinnassa purāṇadutiyikaṁ āmantesi—

     She hid the heaps behind screens, prepared a seat between them, and surrounded it all with a curtain. And she said to Sudinna’s ex-wife,

348. 348

     “तेनte·na हि,hi वधु,va·dhu येनye·na अलङ्कारेनa·laṅ·kā·re·na अलङ्कताa·laṅ·ka·tā पुत्तस्सput·tas·sa मेme सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पियाpi·yā अहोसिa·ho·si मनापाma·nā·pā तेनte·na अलङ्कारेनa·laṅ·kā·re·na अलङ्करा”ति।a·laṅ·ka·rā

     “tena hi, vadhu, yena alaṅkārena alaṅkatā puttassa me sudinnassa piyā ahosi manāpā tena alaṅkārena alaṅkarā”ti.

     “Now please adorn yourself in the way our son Sudinna found you especially attractive.”

349. 349

     “एवं,e·vaṃ अय्ये”ति,ay·ye खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पुराणदुतियिकाpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kā आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa मातुयाmā·tu·yā पच्चस्सोसि।pac·cas·so·si

     “Evaṁ, ayye”ti, kho āyasmato sudinnassa purāṇadutiyikā āyasmato sudinnassa mātuyā paccassosi.

     “Yes, ma’am.”

350. 350

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सुदिन्नोsu·din·no पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya येनye·na सकपितुsa·ka·pi·tu निवेसनंni·ve·sa·naṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho āyasmā sudinno pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena sakapitu nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi.

     Then, after robing up, Venerable Sudinna took his bowl and robe and went to his father’s house where he sat down on the prepared seat.

351. 351

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पिताpi·tā येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā सुदिन्नोsu·din·no तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā तेte पुञ्जेpuñ·je विवरापेत्वाvi·va·rā·pet·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa pitā yenāyasmā sudinno tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā te puñje vivarāpetvā āyasmantaṁ sudinnaṁ etadavoca—

     His father went up to him, uncovered the heaps, and said,

352. 352

     “इदंi·daṃ ते,te तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na मातुmā·tu मत्तिकंmat·ti·kaṃ इत्थिकायit·thi·kā·ya इत्थिधनं,it·thi·dha·naṃ अञ्ञंañ·ñaṃ पेत्तिकंpet·ti·kaṃ अञ्ञंañ·ñaṃ पितामहं।pi·tā·ma·haṃ

     “idaṁ te, tāta sudinna, mātu mattikaṁ itthikāya itthidhanaṁ, aññaṁ pettikaṁ aññaṁ pitāmahaṁ.

     “This dowry, dear Sudinna, is the fortune from your mother. It’s yours. Another is the fortune from your father and another the fortune from your ancestors.

353. 353

     लब्भा,lab·bhā तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na हीनायावत्तित्वाhī·nā·yā·vat·tit·vā भोगाbho·gā चca भुञ्जितुंbhuñ·ji·tuṃ पुञ्ञानिpuñ·ñā·ni चca कातुं।kā·tuṃ

     Labbhā, tāta sudinna, hīnāyāvattitvā bhogā ca bhuñjituṁ puññāni ca kātuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

354. 354

     एहिe·hi त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na हीनायावत्तित्वाhī·nā·yā·vat·tit·vā भोगेbho·ge चca भुञ्जस्सुbhuñ·jas·su पुञ्ञानिpuñ·ñā·ni चca करोही”ति।ka·ro·hī

     Ehi tvaṁ, tāta sudinna, hīnāyāvattitvā bhoge ca bhuñjassu puññāni ca karohī”ti.

     Please return to the lower life, enjoy wealth, and make merit.”

355. 355

     “तात,tā·ta नna उस्सहामिus·sa·hā·mi नna विसहामि,vi·sa·hā·mi अभिरतोa·bhi·ra·to अहंa·haṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरामी”ति।ca·rā·mī

     “Tāta, na ussahāmi na visahāmi, abhirato ahaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carāmī”ti.

     “I can’t, father. I’m enjoying the spiritual life.”

356. 356

     दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho …पे…pe

     Dutiyampi kho …pe…

     Sudinna’s father repeated his request and Sudinna replied as before.

357. 357

     ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पिताpi·tā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     tatiyampi kho āyasmato sudinnassa pitā āyasmantaṁ sudinnaṁ etadavoca—

     When Sudinna’s father repeated his request a third time, Sudinna said,

358. 358

     “इदंi·daṃ ते,te तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na मातुmā·tu मत्तिकं,mat·ti·kaṃ इत्थिकायit·thi·kā·ya इत्थिधनं,it·thi·dha·naṃ अञ्ञंañ·ñaṃ पेत्तिकं,pet·ti·kaṃ अञ्ञंañ·ñaṃ पितामहं।pi·tā·ma·haṃ

     “idaṁ te, tāta sudinna, mātu mattikaṁ, itthikāya itthidhanaṁ, aññaṁ pettikaṁ, aññaṁ pitāmahaṁ.

     (Pāli only)

359. 359

     लब्भा,lab·bhā तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na हीनायावत्तित्वाhī·nā·yā·vat·tit·vā भोगाbho·gā चca भुञ्जितुंbhuñ·ji·tuṃ पुञ्ञानिpuñ·ñā·ni चca कातुं।kā·tuṃ

     Labbhā, tāta sudinna, hīnāyāvattitvā bhogā ca bhuñjituṁ puññāni ca kātuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

360. 360

     एहिe·hi त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na हीनायावत्तित्वाhī·nā·yā·vat·tit·vā भोगेbho·ge चca भुञ्जस्सुbhuñ·jas·su पुञ्ञानिpuñ·ñā·ni चca करोही”ति।ka·ro·hī

     Ehi tvaṁ, tāta sudinna, hīnāyāvattitvā bhoge ca bhuñjassu puññāni ca karohī”ti.

     (Pāli only)

361. 361

     “वदेय्यामva·dey·yā·ma खोkho तं,taṃ गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti सचेsa·ce त्वंtvaṃ नातिकड्ढेय्यासी”ति।nā·ti·kaḍ·ḍhey·yā·sī

     “Vadeyyāma kho taṁ, gahapati, sace tvaṁ nātikaḍḍheyyāsī”ti.

     “If you wouldn’t get offended, I could tell you what to do.”

362. 362

     “वदेहि,va·de·hi तातtā·ta सुदिन्ना”ति।su·din·nā

     “Vadehi, tāta sudinnā”ti.

     “Let’s hear it.”

363. 363

     “तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti महन्तेma·han·te महन्तेma·han·te साणिपसिब्बकेsā·ṇi·pa·sib·ba·ke कारापेत्वाkā·rā·pet·vā हिरञ्ञसुवण्णस्सhi·rañ·ña·su·vaṇ·ṇas·sa पूरापेत्वाpū·rā·pet·vā सकटेहिsa·ka·ṭe·hi निब्बाहापेत्वाnib·bā·hā·pet·vā मज्झेmaj·jhe गङ्गायgaṅ·gā·ya सोतेso·te ओपातेहि।o·pā·te·hi

     “Tena hi tvaṁ, gahapati, mahante mahante sāṇipasibbake kārāpetvā hiraññasuvaṇṇassa pūrāpetvā sakaṭehi nibbāhāpetvā majjhe gaṅgāya sote opātehi.

     “Well then, make some large hempen sacks, put all the money and gold inside, take it all away in carts, and dump it in the middle of the Ganges.

364. 364

     तंtaṃ किस्सkis·sa हेतु?he·tu

     Taṁ kissa hetu?

     And why?

365. 365

     यञ्हिyañ·hi ते,te गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti भविस्सतिbha·vis·sa·ti ततोनिदानंta·to·ni·dā·naṃ भयंbha·yaṃ वाvā छम्भितत्तंcham·bhi·tat·taṃ वाvā लोमहंसोlo·ma·haṃ·so वाvā आरक्खोā·rak·kho वाvā सोso तेte नna भविस्सती”ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

     Yañhi te, gahapati, bhavissati tatonidānaṁ bhayaṁ vā chambhitattaṁ vā lomahaṁso vā ārakkho vā so te na bhavissatī”ti.

     Because that way you will avoid the danger, fear, and terror that it will otherwise cause you, as well as the trouble with protecting it.”

366. 366

     एवंe·vaṃ वुत्ते,vut·te आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पिताpi·tā अनत्तमनोa·nat·ta·ma·no अहोसि—a·ho·si “कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma पुत्तोput·to सुदिन्नोsu·din·no एवंe·vaṃ वक्खती”ति।vak·kha·tī

     Evaṁ vutte, āyasmato sudinnassa pitā anattamano ahosi— “kathañhi nāma putto sudinno evaṁ vakkhatī”ti.

     His father became upset, thinking, “How can our son Sudinna say such things?”

367. 367

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पिताpi·tā आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पुराणदुतियिकंpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kaṃ आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa pitā āyasmato sudinnassa purāṇadutiyikaṁ āmantesi—

     He then said to Sudinna’s ex-wife,

368. 368

     “तेनte·na हि,hi वधु,va·dhu त्वंtvaṃ पियाpi·yā चca मनापाma·nā·pā च।ca अप्पेवap·pe·va नामnā·ma पुत्तोput·to सुदिन्नोsu·din·no तुय्हम्पिtuy·ham·pi वचनंva·ca·naṃ करेय्या”ति।ka·rey·yā

     “tena hi, vadhu, tvaṁ piyā ca manāpā ca. Appeva nāma putto sudinno tuyhampi vacanaṁ kareyyā”ti.

     “Well then, since you were so dear to him, perhaps our son Sudinna will listen to you?”

369. 369

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पुराणदुतियिकाpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kā आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पादेसुpā·de·su गहेत्वाga·het·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa purāṇadutiyikā āyasmato sudinnassa pādesu gahetvā āyasmantaṁ sudinnaṁ etadavoca—

     Sudinna’s ex-wife took hold of his feet and said,

370. 370

     “कीदिसाkī·di·sā नामnā·ma ता,tā अय्यपुत्त,ay·ya·put·ta अच्छरायोac·cha·rā·yo यासंyā·saṃ त्वंtvaṃ हेतुhe·tu ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरसी”ति?ca·ra·sī

     “kīdisā nāma tā, ayyaputta, accharāyo yāsaṁ tvaṁ hetu brahmacariyaṁ carasī”ti?

     “What are these nymphs like, sir, for which you practice the spiritual life?”

371. 371

     “नna खोkho अहं,a·haṃ भगिनि,bha·gi·ni अच्छरानंac·cha·rā·naṃ हेतुhe·tu ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरामी”ति।ca·rā·mī

     “Na kho ahaṁ, bhagini, accharānaṁ hetu brahmacariyaṁ carāmī”ti.

     “Sister, I don’t practice the spiritual life for the sake of nymphs.”

372. 372

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पुराणदुतियिका—pu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kā “अज्जतग्गेaj·ja·tag·ge मंmaṃ अय्यपुत्तोay·ya·put·to सुदिन्नोsu·din·no भगिनिवादेनbha·gi·ni·vā·de·na समुदाचरती”ति,sa·mu·dā·ca·ra·tī तत्थेवtat·the·va मुच्छिताmuc·chi·tā पपता।pa·pa·tā

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa purāṇadutiyikā— “ajjatagge maṁ ayyaputto sudinno bhaginivādena samudācaratī”ti, tattheva mucchitā papatā.

     His ex-wife thought, “Sudinna is now calling me ‘sister’,” and she fainted right there.

373. 373

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सुदिन्नोsu·din·no पितरंpi·ta·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho āyasmā sudinno pitaraṁ etadavoca—

     Sudinna said to his father,

374. 374

     “सचे,sa·ce गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti भोजनंbho·ja·naṃ दातब्बंdā·tab·baṃ देथ,de·tha

     “sace, gahapati, bhojanaṁ dātabbaṁ detha,

     “If there’s food to be given, householder, give it,

375. 375

     माmā नोno विहेठयित्था”ति।vi·he·ṭha·yit·thā

     mā no viheṭhayitthā”ti.

     but don’t annoy me.”

376. 376

     “भुञ्ज,bhuñ·ja तातtā·ta सुदिन्ना”ति।su·din·nā

     “Bhuñja, tāta sudinnā”ti.

     “Eat, Sudinna,” he said.

377. 377

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa माताmā·tā चca पिताpi·tā चca आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ पणीतेनpa·ṇī·te·na खादनीयेनkhā·da·nī·ye·na भोजनीयेनbho·ja·nī·ye·na सहत्थाsa·hat·thā सन्तप्पेसुंsan·tap·pe·suṃ सम्पवारेसुं।sam·pa·vā·re·suṃ

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa mātā ca pitā ca āyasmantaṁ sudinnaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesuṁ sampavāresuṁ.

     And Sudinna’s mother and father personally served and satisfied him with various kinds of fine foods.

378. 378

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa माताmā·tā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ भुत्ताविंbhut·tā·viṃ ओनीतपत्तपाणिंo·nī·ta·pat·ta·pā·ṇiṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa mātā āyasmantaṁ sudinnaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ etadavoca—

     When Sudinna had finished his meal, his mother said to him:

379. 379

     “इदं,i·daṃ तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na कुलंku·laṃ अड्ढंaḍ·ḍhaṃ महद्धनंma·had·dha·naṃ महाभोगंma·hā·bho·gaṃ पहूतजातरूपरजतंpa·hū·ta·jā·ta·rū·pa·ra·ja·taṃ पहूतवित्तूपकरणंpa·hū·ta·vit·tū·pa·ka·ra·ṇaṃ पहूतधनधञ्ञं।pa·hū·ta·dha·na·dhañ·ñaṃ

     “idaṁ, tāta sudinna, kulaṁ aḍḍhaṁ mahaddhanaṁ mahābhogaṁ pahūtajātarūparajataṁ pahūtavittūpakaraṇaṁ pahūtadhanadhaññaṁ.

     “Sudinna dear, our family is rich.

380. 380

     लब्भा,lab·bhā तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na हीनायावत्तित्वाhī·nā·yā·vat·tit·vā भोगाbho·gā चca भुञ्जितुंbhuñ·ji·tuṃ पुञ्ञानिpuñ·ñā·ni चca कातुं।kā·tuṃ

     Labbhā, tāta sudinna, hīnāyāvattitvā bhogā ca bhuñjituṁ puññāni ca kātuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

381. 381

     एहिe·hi त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na हीनायावत्तित्वाhī·nā·yā·vat·tit·vā भोगेbho·ge चca भुञ्जस्सुbhuñ·jas·su पुञ्ञानिpuñ·ñā·ni चca करोही”ति।ka·ro·hī

     Ehi tvaṁ, tāta sudinna, hīnāyāvattitvā bhoge ca bhuñjassu puññāni ca karohī”ti.

     Please return to the lower life, enjoy wealth, and make merit.”

382. 382

     “अम्म,am·ma नna उस्सहामिus·sa·hā·mi नna विसहामि,vi·sa·hā·mi अभिरतोa·bhi·ra·to अहंa·haṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरामी”ति।ca·rā·mī

     “Amma, na ussahāmi na visahāmi, abhirato ahaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carāmī”ti.

     “Mother, I can’t. I’m enjoying the spiritual life.”

383. 383

     दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho …पे…pe

     Dutiyampi kho …pe…

     His mother repeated her request a second time, but got the same reply.

384. 384

     ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa माताmā·tā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     tatiyampi kho āyasmato sudinnassa mātā āyasmantaṁ sudinnaṁ etadavoca—

     She then said,

385. 385

     “इदं,i·daṃ तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na कुलंku·laṃ अड्ढंaḍ·ḍhaṃ महद्धनंma·had·dha·naṃ महाभोगंma·hā·bho·gaṃ पहूतजातरूपरजतंpa·hū·ta·jā·ta·rū·pa·ra·ja·taṃ पहूतवित्तूपकरणंpa·hū·ta·vit·tū·pa·ka·ra·ṇaṃ पहूतधनधञ्ञं।pa·hū·ta·dha·na·dhañ·ñaṃ

     “idaṁ, tāta sudinna, kulaṁ aḍḍhaṁ mahaddhanaṁ mahābhogaṁ pahūtajātarūparajataṁ pahūtavittūpakaraṇaṁ pahūtadhanadhaññaṁ.

     “Our family is wealthy, Sudinna.

386. 386

     तेनte·na हि,hi तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na बीजकम्पिbī·ja·kam·pi देहि—de·hi

     Tena hi, tāta sudinna, bījakampi dehi—

     Please give us an offspring,

387. 387

     माmā नोno अपुत्तकंa·put·ta·kaṃ सापतेय्यंsā·pa·tey·yaṃ लिच्छवयोlic·cha·va·yo अतिहरापेसुन्”ति।a·ti·ha·rā·pe·sun

     mā no aputtakaṁ sāpateyyaṁ licchavayo atiharāpesun”ti.

     so that the Licchavīs don’t take over our heirless property.”

388. 388

     “एतंe·taṃ खोkho मे,me अम्म,am·ma सक्काsak·kā कातुन्”ति।kā·tun

     “Etaṁ kho me, amma, sakkā kātun”ti.

     “Yes, mother, I can do that.”

389. 389

     “कहंka·haṃ पन,pa·na तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na एतरहिe·ta·ra·hi विहरसी”ति?vi·ha·ra·sī

     “Kahaṁ pana, tāta sudinna, etarahi viharasī”ti?

     “But where are you staying?”

390. 390

     “महावने,ma·hā·va·ne अम्मा”ति।am·mā

     “Mahāvane, ammā”ti.

     “In the Great Wood.”

391. 391

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सुदिन्नोsu·din·no उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho āyasmā sudinno uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

     And he got up from his seat and left.

392. 392

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa माताmā·tā आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पुराणदुतियिकंpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kaṃ आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa mātā āyasmato sudinnassa purāṇadutiyikaṁ āmantesi—

     Sudinna’s mother then said to his ex-wife,

393. 393

     “तेनte·na हि,hi वधु,va·dhu यदाya·dā उतुनीu·tu·nī अहोसि,a·ho·si पुप्फंpup·phaṃ तेte उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ होति,ho·ti अथa·tha मेme आरोचेय्यासी”ति।ā·ro·cey·yā·sī

     “tena hi, vadhu, yadā utunī ahosi, pupphaṁ te uppannaṁ hoti, atha me āroceyyāsī”ti.

     “Well then, as soon as you reach your fertile period, please tell me.”

394. 394

     “एवं,e·vaṃ अय्ये”तिay·ye खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पुराणदुतियिकाpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kā आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa मातुयाmā·tu·yā पच्चस्सोसि।pac·cas·so·si

     “Evaṁ, ayye”ti kho āyasmato sudinnassa purāṇadutiyikā āyasmato sudinnassa mātuyā paccassosi.

     “Yes, ma’am.”

395. 395

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पुराणदुतियिकाpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kā नचिरस्सेवna·ci·ras·se·va उतुनीu·tu·nī अहोसि,a·ho·si पुप्फंसाpup·phaṃ·sā उप्पज्जि।up·paj·ji

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa purāṇadutiyikā nacirasseva utunī ahosi, pupphaṁsā uppajji.

     Not long afterwards Sudinna’s ex-wife reached her fertile period,

396. 396

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पुराणदुतियिकाpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kā आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa मातरंmā·ta·raṃ एतदवोच—“उतुनीम्हि,e·ta·da·vo·ca अय्ये,ay·ye पुप्फंpup·phaṃ मेme उप्पन्नन्”ति।up·pan·nan

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa purāṇadutiyikā āyasmato sudinnassa mātaraṁ etadavoca—“utunīmhi, ayye, pupphaṁ me uppannan”ti.

     and she reported it to Sudinna’s mother.

397. 397

     “तेनte·na हि,hi वधु,va·dhu येनye·na अलङ्कारेनa·laṅ·kā·re·na अलङ्कताa·laṅ·ka·tā पुत्तस्सput·tas·sa सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पियाpi·yā अहोसिa·ho·si मनापाma·nā·pā तेनte·na अलङ्कारेनa·laṅ·kā·re·na अलङ्करा”ति।a·laṅ·ka·rā

     “Tena hi, vadhu, yena alaṅkārena alaṅkatā puttassa sudinnassa piyā ahosi manāpā tena alaṅkārena alaṅkarā”ti.

     “Now, please adorn yourself in the way that our son Sudinna found you especially attractive.”

398. 398

     “एवं,e·vaṃ अय्ये”तिay·ye खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पुराणदुतियिकाpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kā आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa मातुयाmā·tu·yā पच्चस्सोसि।pac·cas·so·si

     “Evaṁ, ayye”ti kho āyasmato sudinnassa purāṇadutiyikā āyasmato sudinnassa mātuyā paccassosi.

     “Yes.”

399. 399

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa माताmā·tā आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पुराणदुतियिकंpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kaṃ आदायā·dā·ya येनye·na महावनंma·hā·va·naṃ येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā सुदिन्नोsu·din·no तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa mātā āyasmato sudinnassa purāṇadutiyikaṁ ādāya yena mahāvanaṁ yenāyasmā sudinno tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ sudinnaṁ etadavoca—

     Then Sudinna’s mother, together with his ex-wife, went to Sudinna in the Great Wood, and she said to him:

400. 400

     “इदं,i·daṃ तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na कुलंku·laṃ अड्ढंaḍ·ḍhaṃ महद्धनंma·had·dha·naṃ महाभोगंma·hā·bho·gaṃ पहूतजातरूपरजतंpa·hū·ta·jā·ta·rū·pa·ra·ja·taṃ पहूतवित्तूपकरणंpa·hū·ta·vit·tū·pa·ka·ra·ṇaṃ पहूतधनधञ्ञं।pa·hū·ta·dha·na·dhañ·ñaṃ

     “idaṁ, tāta sudinna, kulaṁ aḍḍhaṁ mahaddhanaṁ mahābhogaṁ pahūtajātarūparajataṁ pahūtavittūpakaraṇaṁ pahūtadhanadhaññaṁ.

     “Our family, dear Sudinna, is rich.

401. 401

     लब्भा,lab·bhā तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na हीनायावत्तित्वाhī·nā·yā·vat·tit·vā भोगाbho·gā चca भुञ्जितुंbhuñ·ji·tuṃ पुञ्ञानिpuñ·ñā·ni चca कातुं।kā·tuṃ

     Labbhā, tāta sudinna, hīnāyāvattitvā bhogā ca bhuñjituṁ puññāni ca kātuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

402. 402

     एहिe·hi त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na हीनायावत्तित्वाhī·nā·yā·vat·tit·vā भोगेbho·ge चca भुञ्जस्सुbhuñ·jas·su पुञ्ञानिpuñ·ñā·ni चca करोही”ति।ka·ro·hī

     Ehi tvaṁ, tāta sudinna, hīnāyāvattitvā bhoge ca bhuñjassu puññāni ca karohī”ti.

     Please return to the lower life, enjoy wealth, and make merit.”

403. 403

     “अम्म,am·ma नna उस्सहामिus·sa·hā·mi नna विसहामि,vi·sa·hā·mi

     “Amma, na ussahāmi na visahāmi,

     “Mother, I can’t.

404. 404

     अभिरतोa·bhi·ra·to अहंa·haṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरामी”ति।ca·rā·mī

     abhirato ahaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carāmī”ti.

     I’m enjoying the spiritual life.”

405. 405

     दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho …पे…pe

     Dutiyampi kho …pe…

     His mother repeated her request a second time, but got the same reply.

406. 406

     ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa माताmā·tā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     tatiyampi kho āyasmato sudinnassa mātā āyasmantaṁ sudinnaṁ etadavoca—

     She then said this:

407. 407

     “इदं,i·daṃ तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na कुलंku·laṃ अड्ढंaḍ·ḍhaṃ महद्धनंma·had·dha·naṃ महाभोगंma·hā·bho·gaṃ पहूतजातरूपरजतंpa·hū·ta·jā·ta·rū·pa·ra·ja·taṃ पहूतवित्तूपकरणंpa·hū·ta·vit·tū·pa·ka·ra·ṇaṃ पहूतधनधञ्ञं।pa·hū·ta·dha·na·dhañ·ñaṃ

     “idaṁ, tāta sudinna, kulaṁ aḍḍhaṁ mahaddhanaṁ mahābhogaṁ pahūtajātarūparajataṁ pahūtavittūpakaraṇaṁ pahūtadhanadhaññaṁ.

     (Pāli only)

408. 408

     तेनte·na हि,hi तातtā·ta सुदिन्न,su·din·na बीजकम्पिbī·ja·kam·pi देहि—de·hi

     Tena hi, tāta sudinna, bījakampi dehi—

     “Well then, please give us an offspring.

409. 409

     माmā नोno अपुत्तकंa·put·ta·kaṃ सापतेय्यंsā·pa·tey·yaṃ लिच्छवयोlic·cha·va·yo अतिहरापेसुन्”ति।a·ti·ha·rā·pe·sun

     mā no aputtakaṁ sāpateyyaṁ licchavayo atiharāpesun”ti.

     We don’t want the Licchavīs to take over our heirless property.”

410. 410

     “एतंe·taṃ खोkho मे,me अम्म,am·ma सक्काsak·kā कातुन्”ति,kā·tun

     “Etaṁ kho me, amma, sakkā kātun”ti,

     “Alright, mother.”

411. 411

     पुराणदुतियिकायpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kā·ya बाहायंbā·hā·yaṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā महावनंma·hā·va·naṃ अज्झोगाहेत्वाaj·jho·gā·het·vā अपञ्ञत्तेa·pañ·ñat·te सिक्खापदेsik·khā·pa·de अनादीनवदस्सोa·nā·dī·na·va·das·so पुराणदुतियिकायpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kā·ya तिक्खत्तुंtik·khat·tuṃ मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ अभिविञ्ञापेसि।a·bhi·viñ·ñā·pe·si

     purāṇadutiyikāya bāhāyaṁ gahetvā mahāvanaṁ ajjhogāhetvā apaññatte sikkhāpade anādīnavadasso purāṇadutiyikāya tikkhattuṁ methunaṁ dhammaṁ abhiviññāpesi.

     He then took his ex-wife by the arm, disappeared into the Great Wood and—there being no training rule and he seeing no danger—had sexual intercourse with her three times.

412. 412

     साsā तेनte·na गब्भंgab·bhaṃ गण्हि।gaṇ·hi

     Sā tena gabbhaṁ gaṇhi.

     As a result she conceived.

413. 413

     भुम्माbhum·mā देवाde·vā सद्दमनुस्सावेसुं—sad·da·ma·nus·sā·ve·suṃ

     Bhummā devā saddamanussāvesuṁ—

     And the earth gods cried out:

414. 414

     “निरब्बुदोni·rab·bu·do वतva·ta भोbho भिक्खुसङ्घोbhik·khu·saṅ·gho निरादीनवो;ni·rā·dī·na·vo

     “nirabbudo vata bho bhikkhusaṅgho nirādīnavo;

     “Sirs, the Sangha of monks has been free from cancer and danger.

415. 415

     सुदिन्नेनsu·din·ne·na कलन्दपुत्तेनka·lan·da·put·te·na अब्बुदंab·bu·daṃ उप्पादितं,up·pā·di·taṃ आदीनवोā·dī·na·vo उप्पादितो”ति।up·pā·di·to

     sudinnena kalandaputtena abbudaṁ uppāditaṁ, ādīnavo uppādito”ti.

     But Sudinna of Kalanda has produced a cancer and endangered it.”

416. 416

     भुम्मानंbhum·mā·naṃ देवानंde·vā·naṃ सद्दंsad·daṃ सुत्वाsut·vā चातुमहाराजिकाcā·tu·ma·hā·rā·ji·kā देवाde·vā सद्दमनुस्सावेसुंsad·da·ma·nus·sā·ve·suṃ …पे…pe

     Bhummānaṁ devānaṁ saddaṁ sutvā cātumahārājikā devā saddamanussāvesuṁ …pe…

     Hearing the earth gods, the gods of the four great kings cried out …

417. 417

     तावतिंसाtā·va·tiṃ·sā देवाde·vā …

     tāvatiṁsā devā …

     the gods of the Thirty-three …

418. 418

     यामाyā·mā देवाde·vā …

     yāmā devā …

     the Yāma gods …

419. 419

     तुसिताtu·si·tā देवाde·vā …

     tusitā devā …

     the contented gods …

420. 420

     निम्मानरतीnim·mā·na·ra·tī देवाde·vā …

     nimmānaratī devā …

     the gods who delight in creation …

421. 421

     परनिम्मितवसवत्तीpa·ra·nim·mi·ta·va·sa·vat·tī देवाde·vā …

     paranimmitavasavattī devā …

     the gods who control the creation of others …

422. 422

     ब्रह्मकायिकाbrah·ma·kā·yi·kā देवाde·vā सद्दमनुस्सावेसुं—sad·da·ma·nus·sā·ve·suṃ

     brahmakāyikā devā saddamanussāvesuṁ—

     the gods of the realm of the supreme beings cried out:

423. 423

     “निरब्बुदोni·rab·bu·do वतva·ta भोbho भिक्खुसङ्घोbhik·khu·saṅ·gho निरादीनवो;ni·rā·dī·na·vo

     “nirabbudo vata bho bhikkhusaṅgho nirādīnavo;

     “Sirs, the Sangha of monks has been free from cancer and danger.

424. 424

     सुदिन्नेनsu·din·ne·na कलन्दपुत्तेनka·lan·da·put·te·na अब्बुदंab·bu·daṃ उप्पादितं,up·pā·di·taṃ आदीनवोā·dī·na·vo उप्पादितो”ति।up·pā·di·to

     sudinnena kalandaputtena abbudaṁ uppāditaṁ, ādīnavo uppādito”ti.

     But Sudinna of Kalanda has produced a cancer and endangered it.”

425. 425

     इतिहi·ti·ha तेनte·na खणेनkha·ṇe·na तेनte·na मुहुत्तेनmu·hut·te·na यावyā·va ब्रह्मलोकाbrah·ma·lo·kā सद्दोsad·do अब्भुग्गच्छि।ab·bhug·gac·chi

     Itiha tena khaṇena tena muhuttena yāva brahmalokā saddo abbhuggacchi.

     Thus in that moment, in that instance, the news spread as far as the world of the supreme beings.

426. 426

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पुराणदुतियिकाpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kā तस्सtas·sa गब्भस्सgab·bhas·sa परिपाकमन्वायpa·ri·pā·ka·man·vā·ya पुत्तंput·taṃ विजायि।vi·jā·yi

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa purāṇadutiyikā tassa gabbhassa paripākamanvāya puttaṁ vijāyi.

     In the meantime, the pregnancy of Sudinna’s ex-wife developed, and she eventually gave birth to a son.

427. 427

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa सहायकाsa·hā·ya·kā तस्सtas·sa दारकस्सdā·ra·kas·sa बीजकोतिbī·ja·ko·ti नामंnā·maṃ अकंसु।a·kaṃ·su

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa sahāyakā tassa dārakassa bījakoti nāmaṁ akaṁsu.

     Sudinna’s friends called him Offspring,

428. 428

     आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa पुराणदुतियिकायpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kā·ya बीजकमातातिbī·ja·ka·mā·tā·ti नामंnā·maṃ अकंसु।a·kaṃ·su

     Āyasmato sudinnassa purāṇadutiyikāya bījakamātāti nāmaṁ akaṁsu.

     while calling Sudinna’s ex-wife Offspring’s mother,

429. 429

     आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa बीजकपितातिbī·ja·ka·pi·tā·ti नामंnā·maṃ अकंसु।a·kaṃ·su

     Āyasmato sudinnassa bījakapitāti nāmaṁ akaṁsu.

     and Venerable Sudinna Offspring’s father.

430. 430

     तेte अपरेनa·pa·re·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na उभोu·bho अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजित्वाpab·ba·jit·vā अरहत्तंa·ra·hat·taṃ सच्छाकंसु।sac·chā·kaṃ·su

     Te aparena samayena ubho agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitvā arahattaṁ sacchākaṁsu.

     After some time, they both went forth into homelessness and realized perfection.

431. 431

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa अहुदेवa·hu·de·va कुक्कुच्चं,kuk·kuc·caṃ अहुa·hu विप्पटिसारो—vip·pa·ṭi·sā·ro

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa ahudeva kukkuccaṁ, ahu vippaṭisāro—

     But Sudinna was anxious and remorseful, thinking,

432. 432

     “अलाभाa·lā·bhā वतva·ta मे,me नna वतva·ta मेme लाभा;lā·bhā दुल्लद्धंdul·lad·dhaṃ वतva·ta मे,me नna वतva·ta मेme सुलद्धं;su·lad·dhaṃ

     “alābhā vata me, na vata me lābhā; dulladdhaṁ vata me, na vata me suladdhaṁ;

     “This is truly bad for me,

433. 433

     योहंyo·haṃ एवंe·vaṃ स्वाक्खातेsvāk·khā·te धम्मविनयेdham·ma·vi·na·ye पब्बजित्वाpab·ba·jit·vā नासक्खिंnā·sak·khiṃ यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ परिपुण्णंpa·ri·puṇ·ṇaṃ परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरितुन्”ति।ca·ri·tun

     yohaṁ evaṁ svākkhāte dhammavinaye pabbajitvā nāsakkhiṁ yāvajīvaṁ paripuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ caritun”ti.

     that after going forth on such a well-proclaimed spiritual path, I wasn’t able to practice the perfectly complete and pure spiritual life to the end.”

434. 434

     सोso तेनेवte·ne·va कुक्कुच्चेनkuk·kuc·ce·na तेनte·na विप्पटिसारेनvip·pa·ṭi·sā·re·na किसोki·so अहोसिa·ho·si लूखोlū·kho दुब्बण्णोdub·baṇ·ṇo उप्पण्डुप्पण्डुकजातोup·paṇ·ḍup·paṇ·ḍu·ka·jā·to धमनिसन्थतगत्तोdha·ma·ni·san·tha·ta·gat·to अन्तोमनोan·to·ma·no लीनमनोlī·na·ma·no दुक्खीduk·khī दुम्मनोdum·ma·no विप्पटिसारीvip·pa·ṭi·sā·rī पज्झायि।paj·jhā·yi

     So teneva kukkuccena tena vippaṭisārena kiso ahosi lūkho dubbaṇṇo uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāto dhamanisanthatagatto antomano līnamano dukkhī dummano vippaṭisārī pajjhāyi.

     And because of his anxiety and remorse, he became thin, haggard, and pale, with veins protruding all over his body. He became sad, sluggish, miserable, and depressed, weighed down by remorse.

435. 435

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सुदिन्नस्सsu·din·nas·sa सहायकाsa·hā·ya·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa sahāyakā bhikkhū āyasmantaṁ sudinnaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     The monks who were Sudinna’s friends said to him:

436. 436

     “पुब्बेpub·be खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ आवुसोā·vu·so सुदिन्न,su·din·na वण्णवाvaṇ·ṇa·vā अहोसिa·ho·si पीणिन्द्रियोpī·ṇin·dri·yo पसन्नमुखवण्णोpa·san·na·mu·kha·vaṇ·ṇo विप्पसन्नछविवण्णो;vip·pa·san·na·cha·vi·vaṇ·ṇo

     “pubbe kho tvaṁ, āvuso sudinna, vaṇṇavā ahosi pīṇindriyo pasannamukhavaṇṇo vippasannachavivaṇṇo;

     “In the past, Sudinna, you had a good color, a bright face, clear skin, and sharp senses.

437. 437

     सोso दानिdā·ni त्वंtvaṃ एतरहिe·ta·ra·hi किसोki·so लूखोlū·kho दुब्बण्णोdub·baṇ·ṇo उप्पण्डुप्पण्डुकजातोup·paṇ·ḍup·paṇ·ḍu·ka·jā·to धमनिसन्थतगत्तोdha·ma·ni·san·tha·ta·gat·to अन्तोमनोan·to·ma·no लीनमनोlī·na·ma·no दुक्खीduk·khī दुम्मनोdum·ma·no विप्पटिसारीvip·pa·ṭi·sā·rī पज्झायसि।paj·jhā·ya·si

     so dāni tvaṁ etarahi kiso lūkho dubbaṇṇo uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāto dhamanisanthatagatto antomano līnamano dukkhī dummano vippaṭisārī pajjhāyasi.

     But look at you now.

438. 438

     कच्चिkac·ci नोno त्वं,tvaṃ आवुसोā·vu·so सुदिन्न,su·din·na अनभिरतोa·na·bhi·ra·to ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरसी”ति?ca·ra·sī

     Kacci no tvaṁ, āvuso sudinna, anabhirato brahmacariyaṁ carasī”ti?

     Could it be that you are dissatisfied with the spiritual life?”

439. 439

     “नna खोkho अहं,a·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अनभिरतोa·na·bhi·ra·to ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरामि।ca·rā·mi

     “Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, anabhirato brahmacariyaṁ carāmi.

     “I am not dissatisfied with the spiritual life,

440. 440

     अत्थिat·thi मेme पापकम्मंpā·pa·kam·maṃ कतं;ka·taṃ

     Atthi me pāpakammaṁ kataṁ;

     but I’ve done something bad.

441. 441

     पुराणदुतियिकायpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kā·ya मेथुनोme·thu·no धम्मोdham·mo पटिसेवितो;pa·ṭi·se·vi·to

     purāṇadutiyikāya methuno dhammo paṭisevito;

     I’ve had sexual intercourse with my ex-wife.

442. 442

     तस्सtas·sa मय्हं,may·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अहुदेवa·hu·de·va कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहुa·hu विप्पटिसारो—vip·pa·ṭi·sā·ro

     tassa mayhaṁ, āvuso, ahudeva kukkuccaṁ ahu vippaṭisāro—

     I’m anxious and remorseful

443. 443

     ‘अलाभाa·lā·bhā वतva·ta मे,me नna वतva·ta मेme लाभा;lā·bhā दुल्लद्धंdul·lad·dhaṃ वतva·ta मे,me नna वतva·ta मेme सुलद्धं;su·lad·dhaṃ योहंyo·haṃ एवंe·vaṃ स्वाक्खातेsvāk·khā·te धम्मविनयेdham·ma·vi·na·ye पब्बजित्वाpab·ba·jit·vā नासक्खिंnā·sak·khiṃ यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ परिपुण्णंpa·ri·puṇ·ṇaṃ परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरितुन्’”ति।ca·ri·tun

     ‘alābhā vata me, na vata me lābhā; dulladdhaṁ vata me, na vata me suladdhaṁ; yohaṁ evaṁ svākkhāte dhammavinaye pabbajitvā nāsakkhiṁ yāvajīvaṁ paripuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ caritun’”ti.

     because I wasn’t able to practice the perfectly complete and pure spiritual life to the end.”

444. 444

     “अलञ्हिa·lañ·hi ते,te आवुसोā·vu·so सुदिन्न,su·din·na कुक्कुच्चायkuk·kuc·cā·ya अलंa·laṃ विप्पटिसारायvip·pa·ṭi·sā·rā·ya यंyaṃ त्वंtvaṃ एवंe·vaṃ स्वाक्खातेsvāk·khā·te धम्मविनयेdham·ma·vi·na·ye पब्बजित्वाpab·ba·jit·vā नna सक्खिस्ससिsak·khis·sa·si यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ परिपुण्णंpa·ri·puṇ·ṇaṃ परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरितुं।ca·ri·tuṃ

     “Alañhi te, āvuso sudinna, kukkuccāya alaṁ vippaṭisārāya yaṁ tvaṁ evaṁ svākkhāte dhammavinaye pabbajitvā na sakkhissasi yāvajīvaṁ paripuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ.

     “No wonder you’re anxious, Sudinna, no wonder you have remorse.

445. 445

     ननु,na·nu आवुसो,ā·vu·so भगवताbha·ga·va·tā अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na विरागायvi·rā·gā·ya धम्मोdham·mo देसितो,de·si·to नोno सरागाय;sa·rā·gā·ya

     Nanu, āvuso, bhagavatā anekapariyāyena virāgāya dhammo desito, no sarāgāya;

     Hasn’t the Buddha given many teachings for the sake of dispassion, not for the sake of lust;

446. 446

     विसंयोगायvi·saṃ·yo·gā·ya धम्मोdham·mo देसितो,de·si·to नोno संयोगाय;saṃ·yo·gā·ya

     visaṁyogāya dhammo desito, no saṁyogāya;

     for the sake of freedom from bondage, not for the sake of bondage;

447. 447

     अनुपादानायa·nu·pā·dā·nā·ya धम्मोdham·mo देसितो,de·si·to नोno सउपादानाय।sa·u·pā·dā·nā·ya

     anupādānāya dhammo desito, no saupādānāya.

     for the sake of non-grasping, not for the sake of grasping?

448. 448

     तत्थtat·tha नामnā·ma त्वं,tvaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भगवताbha·ga·va·tā विरागायvi·rā·gā·ya धम्मेdham·me देसितेde·si·te सरागायsa·rā·gā·ya चेतेस्ससि,ce·tes·sa·si विसंयोगायvi·saṃ·yo·gā·ya धम्मेdham·me देसितेde·si·te संयोगायsaṃ·yo·gā·ya चेतेस्ससि,ce·tes·sa·si अनुपादानायa·nu·pā·dā·nā·ya धम्मेdham·me देसितेde·si·te सउपादानायsa·u·pā·dā·nā·ya चेतेस्ससि।ce·tes·sa·si

     Tattha nāma tvaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā virāgāya dhamme desite sarāgāya cetessasi, visaṁyogāya dhamme desite saṁyogāya cetessasi, anupādānāya dhamme desite saupādānāya cetessasi.

     When the Buddha has taught in this way, how could you choose lust, bondage, and grasping?

449. 449

     ननु,na·nu आवुसो,ā·vu·so भगवताbha·ga·va·tā अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na रागविरागायrā·ga·vi·rā·gā·ya धम्मोdham·mo देसितो,de·si·to

     Nanu, āvuso, bhagavatā anekapariyāyena rāgavirāgāya dhammo desito,

     Hasn’t the Buddha given many teachings for the fading away of lust,

450. 450

     मदनिम्मदनायma·da·nim·ma·da·nā·ya पिपासविनयायpi·pā·sa·vi·na·yā·ya आलयसमुग्घातायā·la·ya·sa·mug·ghā·tā·ya वट्टुपच्छेदायvaṭ·ṭu·pac·che·dā·ya तण्हाक्खयायtaṇ·hāk·kha·yā·ya विरागायvi·rā·gā·ya निरोधायni·ro·dhā·ya निब्बानायnib·bā·nā·ya धम्मोdham·mo देसितो।de·si·to

     madanimmadanāya pipāsavinayāya ālayasamugghātāya vaṭṭupacchedāya taṇhākkhayāya virāgāya nirodhāya nibbānāya dhammo desito.

     for the clearing away of intoxication, for the removal of thirst, for the uprooting of attachment, for the cutting off of the round of rebirth, for the stopping of craving, for fading away, for ending, for extinguishment?

451. 451

     ननु,na·nu आवुसो,ā·vu·so भगवताbha·ga·va·tā अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na कामानंkā·mā·naṃ पहानंpa·hā·naṃ अक्खातं,ak·khā·taṃ

     Nanu, āvuso, bhagavatā anekapariyāyena kāmānaṁ pahānaṁ akkhātaṁ,

     Hasn’t the Buddha in many ways taught the abandoning of worldly pleasures,

452. 452

     कामसञ्ञानंkā·ma·sañ·ñā·naṃ परिञ्ञाpa·riñ·ñā अक्खाता,ak·khā·tā

     kāmasaññānaṁ pariññā akkhātā,

     the full understanding of the perceptions of worldly pleasures,

453. 453

     कामपिपासानंkā·ma·pi·pā·sā·naṃ पटिविनयोpa·ṭi·vi·na·yo अक्खातो,ak·khā·to

     kāmapipāsānaṁ paṭivinayo akkhāto,

     the removal of thirst for worldly pleasures,

454. 454

     कामवितक्कानंkā·ma·vi·tak·kā·naṃ समुग्घातोsa·mug·ghā·to अक्खातो,ak·khā·to

     kāmavitakkānaṁ samugghāto akkhāto,

     the elimination of thoughts of worldly pleasures,

455. 455

     कामपरिळाहानंkā·ma·pa·ri·ḷā·hā·naṃ वूपसमोvū·pa·sa·mo अक्खातो।ak·khā·to

     kāmapariḷāhānaṁ vūpasamo akkhāto.

     the stilling of the fevers of worldly pleasures?

456. 456

     नेतं,ne·taṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अप्पसन्नानंap·pa·san·nā·naṃ वाvā पसादाय,pa·sā·dā·ya पसन्नानंpa·san·nā·naṃ वाvā भिय्योभावाय।bhiy·yo·bhā·vā·ya

     Netaṁ, āvuso, appasannānaṁ vā pasādāya, pasannānaṁ vā bhiyyobhāvāya.

     This will affect people’s confidence

457. 457

     अथa·tha ख्वेतं,khve·taṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अप्पसन्नानञ्चेवap·pa·san·nā·nañ·ce·va अप्पसादायap·pa·sā·dā·ya पसन्नानञ्चpa·san·nā·nañ·ca एकच्चानंe·kac·cā·naṃ अञ्ञथत्ताया”ति।añ·ña·that·tā·yā

     Atha khvetaṁ, āvuso, appasannānañceva appasādāya pasannānañca ekaccānaṁ aññathattāyā”ti.

     and cause some to lose it.”

458. 458

     अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Atha kho te bhikkhū āyasmantaṁ sudinnaṁ anekapariyāyena vigarahitvā bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     After rebuking Sudinna in many ways, they told the Buddha.

459. 459

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ सन्निपातापेत्वाsan·ni·pā·tā·pet·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ पटिपुच्छि—pa·ṭi·puc·chi

     Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe bhikkhusaṅghaṁ sannipātāpetvā āyasmantaṁ sudinnaṁ paṭipucchi—

     The Buddha then had the Sangha of monks gathered and questioned Sudinna:

460. 460

     “सच्चंsac·caṃ किरki·ra त्वं,tvaṃ सुदिन्न,su·din·na पुराणदुतियिकायpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kā·ya मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवी”ति?pa·ṭi·se·vī

     “saccaṁ kira tvaṁ, sudinna, purāṇadutiyikāya methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevī”ti?

     “Is it true, Sudinna, that you had sexual intercourse with your ex-wife?”

461. 461

     “सच्चं,sac·caṃ भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

     “Saccaṁ, bhagavā”ti.

     “It’s true, sir.”

462. 462

     विगरहिvi·ga·ra·hi बुद्धोbud·dho भगवा—bha·ga·vā

     Vigarahi buddho bhagavā—

     The Buddha rebuked him,

463. 463

     “अननुच्छविकं,a·na·nuc·cha·vi·kaṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अननुलोमिकंa·na·nu·lo·mi·kaṃ अप्पटिरूपंap·pa·ṭi·rū·paṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अकप्पियंa·kap·pi·yaṃ अकरणीयं।a·ka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ

     “ananucchavikaṁ, moghapurisa, ananulomikaṁ appaṭirūpaṁ assāmaṇakaṁ akappiyaṁ akaraṇīyaṁ.

     “Foolish man, it’s not suitable, it’s not proper, it’s not worthy of a monastic, it’s not allowable, it’s not to be done.

464. 464

     कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma त्वं,tvaṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa एवंe·vaṃ स्वाक्खातेsvāk·khā·te धम्मविनयेdham·ma·vi·na·ye पब्बजित्वाpab·ba·jit·vā नna सक्खिस्ससिsak·khis·sa·si यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ परिपुण्णंpa·ri·puṇ·ṇaṃ परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरितुं।ca·ri·tuṃ

     Kathañhi nāma tvaṁ, moghapurisa, evaṁ svākkhāte dhammavinaye pabbajitvā na sakkhissasi yāvajīvaṁ paripuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ.

     How could you go forth on such a well-proclaimed spiritual path and not be able to practice the perfectly complete and pure spiritual life to the end?

465. 465

     ननुna·nu मया,ma·yā मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na विरागायvi·rā·gā·ya धम्मोdham·mo देसितो,de·si·to नोno सरागाय;sa·rā·gā·ya

     Nanu mayā, moghapurisa, anekapariyāyena virāgāya dhammo desito, no sarāgāya;

     Haven’t I given many teachings for the sake of dispassion, not for the sake of lust;

466. 466

     विसंयोगायvi·saṃ·yo·gā·ya धम्मोdham·mo देसितो,de·si·to नोno संयोगाय;saṃ·yo·gā·ya

     visaṁyogāya dhammo desito, no saṁyogāya;

     for the sake of freedom from bondage, not for the sake of bondage;

467. 467

     अनुपादानायa·nu·pā·dā·nā·ya धम्मोdham·mo देसितो,de·si·to नोno सउपादानाय।sa·u·pā·dā·nā·ya

     anupādānāya dhammo desito, no saupādānāya.

     for the sake of non-grasping, not for the sake of grasping?

468. 468

     तत्थtat·tha नामnā·ma त्वं,tvaṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa मयाma·yā विरागायvi·rā·gā·ya धम्मेdham·me देसितेde·si·te सरागायsa·rā·gā·ya चेतेस्ससि,ce·tes·sa·si विसंयोगायvi·saṃ·yo·gā·ya धम्मेdham·me देसितेde·si·te संयोगायsaṃ·yo·gā·ya चेतेस्ससि,ce·tes·sa·si अनुपादानायa·nu·pā·dā·nā·ya धम्मेdham·me देसितेde·si·te सउपादानायsa·u·pā·dā·nā·ya चेतेस्ससि।ce·tes·sa·si

     Tattha nāma tvaṁ, moghapurisa, mayā virāgāya dhamme desite sarāgāya cetessasi, visaṁyogāya dhamme desite saṁyogāya cetessasi, anupādānāya dhamme desite saupādānāya cetessasi.

     When I have taught in this way, how could you choose lust, bondage, and grasping?

469. 469

     ननुna·nu मया,ma·yā मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na रागविरागायrā·ga·vi·rā·gā·ya धम्मोdham·mo देसितो।de·si·to

     Nanu mayā, moghapurisa, anekapariyāyena rāgavirāgāya dhammo desito.

     Haven’t I given many teachings for the fading away of lust,

470. 470

     मदनिम्मदनायma·da·nim·ma·da·nā·ya पिपासविनयायpi·pā·sa·vi·na·yā·ya आलयसमुग्घातायā·la·ya·sa·mug·ghā·tā·ya वट्टुपच्छेदायvaṭ·ṭu·pac·che·dā·ya तण्हाक्खयायtaṇ·hāk·kha·yā·ya विरागायvi·rā·gā·ya निरोधायni·ro·dhā·ya निब्बानायnib·bā·nā·ya धम्मोdham·mo देसितो।de·si·to

     Madanimmadanāya pipāsavinayāya ālayasamugghātāya vaṭṭupacchedāya taṇhākkhayāya virāgāya nirodhāya nibbānāya dhammo desito.

     for the clearing away of intoxication, for the removal of thirst, for the uprooting of attachment, for the cutting off of the round of rebirth, for the stopping of craving, for fading away, for ending, for extinguishment?

471. 471

     ननुna·nu मया,ma·yā मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na कामानंkā·mā·naṃ पहानंpa·hā·naṃ अक्खातं,ak·khā·taṃ

     Nanu mayā, moghapurisa, anekapariyāyena kāmānaṁ pahānaṁ akkhātaṁ,

     Haven’t I given many teachings for the abandoning of worldly pleasures,

472. 472

     कामसञ्ञानंkā·ma·sañ·ñā·naṃ परिञ्ञाpa·riñ·ñā अक्खाता,ak·khā·tā

     kāmasaññānaṁ pariññā akkhātā,

     for the full understanding of the perceptions of worldly pleasures,

473. 473

     कामपिपासानंkā·ma·pi·pā·sā·naṃ पटिविनयोpa·ṭi·vi·na·yo अक्खातो,ak·khā·to

     kāmapipāsānaṁ paṭivinayo akkhāto,

     for the removal of thirst for worldly pleasures,

474. 474

     कामवितक्कानंkā·ma·vi·tak·kā·naṃ समुग्घातोsa·mug·ghā·to अक्खातो,ak·khā·to

     kāmavitakkānaṁ samugghāto akkhāto,

     for the elimination of thoughts of worldly pleasures,

475. 475

     कामपरिळाहानंkā·ma·pa·ri·ḷā·hā·naṃ वूपसमोvū·pa·sa·mo अक्खातो।ak·khā·to

     kāmapariḷāhānaṁ vūpasamo akkhāto.

     for the stilling of the fevers of worldly pleasures?

476. 476

     वरंva·raṃ ते,te मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa आसिविसस्सā·si·vi·sas·sa घोरविसस्सgho·ra·vi·sas·sa मुखेmu·khe अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पक्खित्तं,pak·khit·taṃ नna त्वेवtve·va मातुगामस्सmā·tu·gā·mas·sa अङ्गजातेaṅ·ga·jā·te अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पक्खित्तं।pak·khit·taṃ

     Varaṁ te, moghapurisa, āsivisassa ghoravisassa mukhe aṅgajātaṁ pakkhittaṁ, na tveva mātugāmassa aṅgajāte aṅgajātaṁ pakkhittaṁ.

     It would be better, foolish man, for your penis to enter the mouth of a highly venomous snake than to enter a woman.

477. 477

     वरंva·raṃ ते,te मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa कण्हसप्पस्सkaṇ·ha·sap·pas·sa मुखेmu·khe अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पक्खित्तं,pak·khit·taṃ नna त्वेवtve·va मातुगामस्सmā·tu·gā·mas·sa अङ्गजातेaṅ·ga·jā·te अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पक्खित्तं।pak·khit·taṃ

     Varaṁ te, moghapurisa, kaṇhasappassa mukhe aṅgajātaṁ pakkhittaṁ, na tveva mātugāmassa aṅgajāte aṅgajātaṁ pakkhittaṁ.

     It would be better for your penis to enter the mouth of a black snake than to enter a woman.

478. 478

     वरंva·raṃ ते,te मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अङ्गारकासुयाaṅ·gā·ra·kā·su·yā आदित्तायā·dit·tā·ya सम्पज्जलितायsam·paj·ja·li·tā·ya सजोतिभूतायsa·jo·ti·bhū·tā·ya अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पक्खित्तं,pak·khit·taṃ नna त्वेवtve·va मातुगामस्सmā·tu·gā·mas·sa अङ्गजातेaṅ·ga·jā·te अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पक्खित्तं।pak·khit·taṃ

     Varaṁ te, moghapurisa, aṅgārakāsuyā ādittāya sampajjalitāya sajotibhūtāya aṅgajātaṁ pakkhittaṁ, na tveva mātugāmassa aṅgajāte aṅgajātaṁ pakkhittaṁ.

     It would be better for your penis to enter a blazing charcoal pit than to enter a woman.

479. 479

     तंtaṃ किस्सkis·sa हेतु?he·tu

     Taṁ kissa hetu?

     Why is that?

480. 480

     ततोनिदानञ्हि,ta·to·ni·dā·nañ·hi मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa मरणंma·ra·ṇaṃ वाvā निगच्छेय्यni·gac·chey·ya मरणमत्तंma·ra·ṇa·mat·taṃ वाvā दुक्खं,duk·khaṃ नna त्वेवtve·va तप्पच्चयाtap·pac·ca·yā कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā अपायंa·pā·yaṃ दुग्गतिंdug·ga·tiṃ विनिपातंvi·ni·pā·taṃ निरयंni·ra·yaṃ उपपज्जेय्य।u·pa·paj·jey·ya

     Tatonidānañhi, moghapurisa, maraṇaṁ vā nigaccheyya maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhaṁ, na tveva tappaccayā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyya.

     For although it might cause death or death-like suffering, it would not cause you to be reborn in a bad destination.

481. 481

     इतोनिदानञ्चi·to·ni·dā·nañ·ca खो,kho मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā अपायंa·pā·yaṃ दुग्गतिंdug·ga·tiṃ विनिपातंvi·ni·pā·taṃ निरयंni·ra·yaṃ उपपज्जेय्य।u·pa·paj·jey·ya

     Itonidānañca kho, moghapurisa, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyya.

     But <em>this</em> might.

482. 482

     तत्थtat·tha नामnā·ma त्वं,tvaṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa यंyaṃ त्वंtvaṃ असद्धम्मंa·sad·dham·maṃ गामधम्मंgā·ma·dham·maṃ वसलधम्मंva·sa·la·dham·maṃ दुट्ठुल्लंduṭ·ṭhul·laṃ ओदकन्तिकंo·da·kan·ti·kaṃ रहस्संra·has·saṃ द्वयंद्वयसमापत्तिंdva·yaṃd·va·ya·sa·mā·pat·tiṃ समापज्जिस्ससि,sa·mā·paj·jis·sa·si

     Tattha nāma tvaṁ, moghapurisa, yaṁ tvaṁ asaddhammaṁ gāmadhammaṁ vasaladhammaṁ duṭṭhullaṁ odakantikaṁ rahassaṁ dvayaṁdvayasamāpattiṁ samāpajjissasi,

     Foolish man, you’ve practiced what is contrary to the true Teaching, the common practice, the low practice, the coarse practice, that which ends with a wash, that which is done in private, that which is done wherever there are couples.

483. 483

     बहूनंba·hū·naṃ खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अकुसलानंa·ku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ आदिकत्ताā·di·kat·tā पुब्बङ्गमो।pub·baṅ·ga·mo

     bahūnaṁ kho tvaṁ, moghapurisa, akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ādikattā pubbaṅgamo.

     You are the forerunner, the first performer of many unwholesome things.

484. 484

     नेतं,ne·taṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अप्पसन्नानंap·pa·san·nā·naṃ वाvā पसादाय,pa·sā·dā·ya पसन्नानंpa·san·nā·naṃ वाvā भिय्योभावाय;bhiy·yo·bhā·vā·ya

     Netaṁ, moghapurisa, appasannānaṁ vā pasādāya, pasannānaṁ vā bhiyyobhāvāya;

     This will affect people’s confidence,

485. 485

     अथa·tha ख्वेतं,khve·taṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अप्पसन्नानञ्चेवap·pa·san·nā·nañ·ce·va अप्पसादाय,ap·pa·sā·dā·ya पसन्नानञ्चpa·san·nā·nañ·ca एकच्चानंe·kac·cā·naṃ अञ्ञथत्ताया”ति।añ·ña·that·tā·yā

     atha khvetaṁ, moghapurisa, appasannānañceva appasādāya, pasannānañca ekaccānaṁ aññathattāyā”ti.

     and cause some to lose it.”

486. 486

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सुदिन्नंsu·din·naṃ अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā दुब्भरतायdub·bha·ra·tā·ya दुप्पोसतायdup·po·sa·tā·ya महिच्छतायma·hic·cha·tā·ya असन्तुट्ठितायa·san·tuṭ·ṭhi·tā·ya सङ्गणिकायsaṅ·ga·ṇi·kā·ya कोसज्जस्सko·saj·jas·sa अवण्णंa·vaṇ·ṇaṃ भासित्वाbhā·sit·vā अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na सुभरतायsu·bha·ra·tā·ya सुपोसतायsu·po·sa·tā·ya अप्पिच्छस्सap·pic·chas·sa सन्तुट्ठस्सsan·tuṭ·ṭhas·sa सल्लेखस्सsal·le·khas·sa धुतस्सdhu·tas·sa पासादिकस्सpā·sā·di·kas·sa अपचयस्सa·pa·ca·yas·sa वीरियारम्भस्सvī·ri·yā·ram·bhas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासित्वाbhā·sit·vā

     Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ sudinnaṁ anekapariyāyena vigarahitvā dubbharatāya dupposatāya mahicchatāya asantuṭṭhitāya saṅgaṇikāya kosajjassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsitvā anekapariyāyena subharatāya suposatāya appicchassa santuṭṭhassa sallekhassa dhutassa pāsādikassa apacayassa vīriyārambhassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsitvā

     Then the Buddha spoke in many ways in dispraise of being difficult to support and maintain, in dispraise of great desires, discontent, socializing, and laziness; but he spoke in many ways in praise of being easy to support and maintain, of fewness of wishes, contentment, self-effacement, ascetic practices, serenity, reduction in things, and being energetic.

487. 487

     भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ तदनुच्छविकंta·da·nuc·cha·vi·kaṃ तदनुलोमिकंta·da·nu·lo·mi·kaṃ धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     bhikkhūnaṁ tadanucchavikaṁ tadanulomikaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     After giving a teaching on what is right and proper, he addressed the monks:

488. 488

     “तेनte·na हि,hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञपेस्सामिpañ·ña·pes·sā·mi दसda·sa अत्थवसेat·tha·va·se पटिच्च—pa·ṭic·ca

     “tena hi, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ paññapessāmi dasa atthavase paṭicca—

     “Well then, monks, I will lay down a training rule for the following ten reasons:

489. 489

     सङ्घसुट्ठुताय,saṅ·gha·suṭ·ṭhu·tā·ya सङ्घफासुताय,saṅ·gha·phā·su·tā·ya दुम्मङ्कूनंdum·maṅ·kū·naṃ पुग्गलानंpug·ga·lā·naṃ निग्गहाय,nig·ga·hā·ya पेसलानंpe·sa·lā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ फासुविहाराय,phā·su·vi·hā·rā·ya दिट्ठधम्मिकानंdiṭ·ṭha·dham·mi·kā·naṃ आसवानंā·sa·vā·naṃ संवराय,saṃ·va·rā·ya सम्परायिकानंsam·pa·rā·yi·kā·naṃ आसवानंā·sa·vā·naṃ पटिघाताय,pa·ṭi·ghā·tā·ya अप्पसन्नानंap·pa·san·nā·naṃ पसादाय,pa·sā·dā·ya पसन्नानंpa·san·nā·naṃ भिय्योभावाय,bhiy·yo·bhā·vā·ya सद्धम्मट्ठितिया,sad·dham·maṭ·ṭhi·ti·yā विनयानुग्गहाय।vi·na·yā·nug·ga·hā·ya

     saṅghasuṭṭhutāya, saṅghaphāsutāya, dummaṅkūnaṁ puggalānaṁ niggahāya, pesalānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ phāsuvihārāya, diṭṭhadhammikānaṁ āsavānaṁ saṁvarāya, samparāyikānaṁ āsavānaṁ paṭighātāya, appasannānaṁ pasādāya, pasannānaṁ bhiyyobhāvāya, saddhammaṭṭhitiyā, vinayānuggahāya.

     for the well-being of the Sangha, for the comfort of the Sangha, for the restraint of bad people, for the ease of good monks, for the restraint of the corruptions relating to the present life, for the restraint of the corruptions relating to future lives, to give rise to confidence in those without it, to increase the confidence of those who have it, for the longevity of the true Teaching, and for supporting the training.

490. 490

     एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve इमंi·maṃ सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ उद्दिसेय्याथ—ud·di·sey·yā·tha

     Evañca pana, bhikkhave, imaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ uddiseyyātha—

     And, monks, this training rule should be recited like this:

491. 491

     First preliminary ruling

492. 492

     “योyo पनpa·na भिक्खुbhik·khu मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवेय्य,pa·ṭi·se·vey·ya पाराजिकोpā·rā·ji·ko होतिho·ti असंवासो”ति।a·saṃ·vā·so

     “Yo pana bhikkhu methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭiseveyya, pārājiko hoti asaṁvāso”ti.

     ‘If a monk has sexual intercourse, he is expelled and excluded from the community.’”

493. 493

     एवञ्चिदंe·vañ·ci·daṃ भगवताbha·ga·va·tā भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ होति।ho·ti

     Evañcidaṁ bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ paññattaṁ hoti.

     In this way the Buddha laid down this training rule for the monks.

494. 494

     सुदिन्नभाणवारोsu·din·na·bhā·ṇa·vā·ro निट्ठितो।niṭ·ṭhi·to

     Sudinnabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.

     The section for recitation on Sudinna is finished.

495. 495

     2। मक्कटीवत्थुmak·ka·ṭī·vat·thu

     2. Makkaṭīvatthu

     Second substory: the account of the female monkey

496. 496

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ महावनेma·hā·va·ne मक्कटिंmak·ka·ṭiṃ आमिसेनā·mi·se·na उपलापेत्वाu·pa·lā·pet·vā तस्साtas·sā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवति।pa·ṭi·se·va·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu vesāliyaṁ mahāvane makkaṭiṁ āmisena upalāpetvā tassā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevati.

     Sometime later, in the Great Wood near Vesālī, a certain monk befriended a female monkey by giving her food. He then had sexual intercourse with her.

497. 497

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरंpat·ta·cī·va·raṃ आदायā·dā·ya वेसालिंve·sā·liṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya पाविसि।pā·vi·si

     Atha kho so bhikkhu pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaraṁ ādāya vesāliṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi.

     Soon afterwards, after robing up in the morning, he took his bowl and robe and entered Vesālī for alms.

498. 498

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā भिक्खूbhik·khū सेनासनचारिकंse·nā·sa·na·cā·ri·kaṃ आहिण्डन्ताā·hiṇ·ḍan·tā येनye·na तस्सtas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no विहारोvi·hā·ro तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su

     Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā bhikkhū senāsanacārikaṁ āhiṇḍantā yena tassa bhikkhuno vihāro tenupasaṅkamiṁsu.

     Just then a number of monks who were walking about the dwellings came to the one belonging to this monk.

499. 499

     अद्दसad·da·sa खोkho साsā मक्कटीmak·ka·ṭī तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū दूरतोवdū·ra·to·va आगच्छन्ते।ā·gac·chan·te

     Addasa kho sā makkaṭī te bhikkhū dūratova āgacchante.

     The female monkey saw those monks coming.

500. 500

     दिस्वानdis·vā·na येनye·na तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā तेसंte·saṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पुरतोpu·ra·to कटिम्पिka·ṭim·pi चालेसिcā·le·si छेप्पम्पिchep·pam·pi चालेसि,cā·le·si कटिम्पिka·ṭim·pi ओड्डि,oḍ·ḍi निमित्तम्पिni·mit·tam·pi अकासि।a·kā·si

     Disvāna yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ purato kaṭimpi cālesi cheppampi cālesi, kaṭimpi oḍḍi, nimittampi akāsi.

     She went up to them, shook her buttocks in front of them, wagged her tail, presented her backside, and made a gesture.

501. 501

     अथa·tha खोkho तेसंte·saṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतदहोसि—“निस्संसयंe·ta·da·ho·si खोkho सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu इमिस्साi·mis·sā मक्कटियाmak·ka·ṭi·yā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवती”ति।pa·ṭi·se·va·tī एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निलीयिंसु।ni·lī·yiṃ·su

     Atha kho tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi—“nissaṁsayaṁ kho so bhikkhu imissā makkaṭiyā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevatī”ti. Ekamantaṁ nilīyiṁsu.

     The monks thought, “This monk must be having sexual intercourse with this monkey,” and they hid to one side.

502. 502

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरित्वाca·rit·vā पिण्डपातंpiṇ·ḍa·pā·taṃ आदायā·dā·ya पटिक्कमि।pa·ṭik·ka·mi

     Atha kho so bhikkhu vesāliyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā piṇḍapātaṁ ādāya paṭikkami.

     Then, when that monk had finished his almsround in Vesālī and had returned with his almsfood,

503. 503

     अथa·tha खोkho साsā मक्कटीmak·ka·ṭī येनye·na सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu तेनुपसङ्कमि।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi

     Atha kho sā makkaṭī yena so bhikkhu tenupasaṅkami.

     (Pāli only)

504. 504

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu तंtaṃ पिण्डपातंpiṇ·ḍa·pā·taṃ एकदेसंe·ka·de·saṃ भुञ्जित्वाbhuñ·jit·vā एकदेसंe·ka·de·saṃ तस्साtas·sā मक्कटियाmak·ka·ṭi·yā अदासि।a·dā·si

     Atha kho so bhikkhu taṁ piṇḍapātaṁ ekadesaṁ bhuñjitvā ekadesaṁ tassā makkaṭiyā adāsi.

     he ate one part himself and gave the rest to that female monkey.

505. 505

     अथa·tha खोkho साsā मक्कटीmak·ka·ṭī तंtaṃ पिण्डपातंpiṇ·ḍa·pā·taṃ भुञ्जित्वाbhuñ·jit·vā तस्सtas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no कटिंka·ṭiṃ ओड्डि।oḍ·ḍi अथa·tha खोkho सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu तस्साtas·sā मक्कटियाmak·ka·ṭi·yā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवति।pa·ṭi·se·va·ti

     Atha kho sā makkaṭī taṁ piṇḍapātaṁ bhuñjitvā tassa bhikkhuno kaṭiṁ oḍḍi. Atha kho so bhikkhu tassā makkaṭiyā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevati.

     After eating the food, the monkey presented her buttocks to the monk, and he had sexual intercourse with her.

506. 506

     अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ एतदवोचुं—“ननु,e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भगवताbha·ga·va·tā सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञत्तं;pañ·ñat·taṃ

     Atha kho te bhikkhū taṁ bhikkhuṁ etadavocuṁ—“nanu, āvuso, bhagavatā sikkhāpadaṁ paññattaṁ;

     The other monks said to him, “Hasn’t a training rule been laid down by the Buddha?

507. 507

     किस्सkis·sa त्वं,tvaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so मक्कटियाmak·ka·ṭi·yā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवसी”ति?pa·ṭi·se·va·sī

     kissa tvaṁ, āvuso, makkaṭiyā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevasī”ti?

     Why then do you have sexual intercourse with a monkey?”

508. 508

     “सच्चं,sac·caṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भगवताbha·ga·va·tā सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञत्तं;pañ·ñat·taṃ तञ्चtañ·ca खोkho मनुस्सित्थिया,ma·nus·sit·thi·yā नोno तिरच्छानगताया”ति।ti·rac·chā·na·ga·tā·yā

     “Saccaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā sikkhāpadaṁ paññattaṁ; tañca kho manussitthiyā, no tiracchānagatāyā”ti.

     “It’s true that a training rule has been laid down by the Buddha, but it concerns women, not animals.”

509. 509

     “ननु,na·nu आवुसो,ā·vu·so तथेवta·the·va तंtaṃ होति।ho·ti

     “Nanu, āvuso, tatheva taṁ hoti.

     “But that’s just the same.

510. 510

     अननुच्छविकं,a·na·nuc·cha·vi·kaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अननुलोमिकंa·na·nu·lo·mi·kaṃ अप्पटिरूपंap·pa·ṭi·rū·paṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अकप्पियंa·kap·pi·yaṃ अकरणीयं।a·ka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ

     Ananucchavikaṁ, āvuso, ananulomikaṁ appaṭirūpaṁ assāmaṇakaṁ akappiyaṁ akaraṇīyaṁ.

     It’s not suitable, it’s not proper, it’s not worthy of a monastic, it’s not allowable, it’s not to be done.

511. 511

     कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma त्वं,tvaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so एवंe·vaṃ स्वाक्खातेsvāk·khā·te धम्मविनयेdham·ma·vi·na·ye पब्बजित्वाpab·ba·jit·vā नna सक्खिस्ससिsak·khis·sa·si यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ परिपुण्णंpa·ri·puṇ·ṇaṃ परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरितुं।ca·ri·tuṃ

     Kathañhi nāma tvaṁ, āvuso, evaṁ svākkhāte dhammavinaye pabbajitvā na sakkhissasi yāvajīvaṁ paripuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ.

     How could you go forth on such a well-proclaimed spiritual path and not be able to practice the perfectly complete and pure spiritual life to the end?

512. 512

     ननु,na·nu आवुसो,ā·vu·so भगवताbha·ga·va·tā अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na विरागायvi·rā·gā·ya धम्मोdham·mo देसितो,de·si·to नोno सरागायsa·rā·gā·ya …पे…pe

     Nanu, āvuso, bhagavatā anekapariyāyena virāgāya dhammo desito, no sarāgāya …pe…

     Hasn’t the Buddha given many teachings for the sake of dispassion …

513. 513

     कामपरिळाहानंkā·ma·pa·ri·ḷā·hā·naṃ वूपसमोvū·pa·sa·mo अक्खातो।ak·khā·to

     kāmapariḷāhānaṁ vūpasamo akkhāto.

     the stilling of the fevers of worldly pleasures?

514. 514

     नेतं,ne·taṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अप्पसन्नानंap·pa·san·nā·naṃ वाvā पसादायpa·sā·dā·ya पसन्नानंpa·san·nā·naṃ वाvā भिय्योभावाय।bhiy·yo·bhā·vā·ya

     Netaṁ, āvuso, appasannānaṁ vā pasādāya pasannānaṁ vā bhiyyobhāvāya.

     This will affect people’s confidence,

515. 515

     अथa·tha ख्वेतं,khve·taṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अप्पसन्नानञ्चेवap·pa·san·nā·nañ·ce·va अप्पसादाय,ap·pa·sā·dā·ya पसन्नानञ्चpa·san·nā·nañ·ca एकच्चानंe·kac·cā·naṃ अञ्ञथत्ताया”ति।añ·ña·that·tā·yā

     Atha khvetaṁ, āvuso, appasannānañceva appasādāya, pasannānañca ekaccānaṁ aññathattāyā”ti.

     and cause some to lose it.”

516. 516

     अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Atha kho te bhikkhū taṁ bhikkhuṁ anekapariyāyena vigarahitvā bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     After rebuking that monk in many ways, they told the Buddha.

517. 517

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ सन्निपातापेत्वाsan·ni·pā·tā·pet·vā तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ पटिपुच्छि—pa·ṭi·puc·chi

     Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe bhikkhusaṅghaṁ sannipātāpetvā taṁ bhikkhuṁ paṭipucchi—

     The Buddha then had the Sangha of monks gathered and questioned that monk:

518. 518

     “सच्चंsac·caṃ किरki·ra त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu मक्कटियाmak·ka·ṭi·yā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवी”ति?pa·ṭi·se·vī

     “saccaṁ kira tvaṁ, bhikkhu, makkaṭiyā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevī”ti?

     “Is it true, monk, that you did this?”

519. 519

     “सच्चं,sac·caṃ भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

     “Saccaṁ, bhagavā”ti.

     “It’s true, sir.”

520. 520

     विगरहिvi·ga·ra·hi बुद्धोbud·dho भगवा—bha·ga·vā

     Vigarahi buddho bhagavā—

     The Buddha rebuked him,

521. 521

     “अननुच्छविकं,a·na·nuc·cha·vi·kaṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अननुलोमिकंa·na·nu·lo·mi·kaṃ अप्पतिरूपंap·pa·ti·rū·paṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अकप्पियंa·kap·pi·yaṃ अकरणीयं।a·ka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ

     “ananucchavikaṁ, moghapurisa, ananulomikaṁ appatirūpaṁ assāmaṇakaṁ akappiyaṁ akaraṇīyaṁ.

     “Foolish man, it’s not suitable, it’s not proper, it’s not worthy of a monastic, it’s not allowable, it’s not to be done.

522. 522

     कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma त्वं,tvaṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa एवंe·vaṃ स्वाक्खातेsvāk·khā·te धम्मविनयेdham·ma·vi·na·ye पब्बजित्वाpab·ba·jit·vā नna सक्खिस्ससिsak·khis·sa·si यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ परिपुण्णंpa·ri·puṇ·ṇaṃ परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरितुं।ca·ri·tuṃ

     Kathañhi nāma tvaṁ, moghapurisa, evaṁ svākkhāte dhammavinaye pabbajitvā na sakkhissasi yāvajīvaṁ paripuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ.

     How could you go forth on such a well-proclaimed spiritual path and not be able to practice the perfectly complete and pure spiritual life to the end?

523. 523

     ननुna·nu मया,ma·yā मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na विरागायvi·rā·gā·ya धम्मोdham·mo देसितो,de·si·to नोno सरागायsa·rā·gā·ya …पे…pe

     Nanu mayā, moghapurisa, anekapariyāyena virāgāya dhammo desito, no sarāgāya …pe…

     Haven’t I given many teachings for the sake of dispassion …

524. 524

     कामपरिळाहानंkā·ma·pa·ri·ḷā·hā·naṃ वूपसमोvū·pa·sa·mo अक्खातो।ak·khā·to

     kāmapariḷāhānaṁ vūpasamo akkhāto.

     for the stilling of the fevers of worldly desire?

525. 525

     वरंva·raṃ ते,te मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa आसिविसस्सā·si·vi·sas·sa घोरविसस्सgho·ra·vi·sas·sa मुखेmu·khe अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पक्खित्तं,pak·khit·taṃ नna त्वेवtve·va मक्कटियाmak·ka·ṭi·yā अङ्गजातेaṅ·ga·jā·te अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पक्खित्तं।pak·khit·taṃ

     Varaṁ te, moghapurisa, āsivisassa ghoravisassa mukhe aṅgajātaṁ pakkhittaṁ, na tveva makkaṭiyā aṅgajāte aṅgajātaṁ pakkhittaṁ.

     It would be better, foolish man, for your penis to enter the mouth of a highly venomous snake than to enter a female monkey.

526. 526

     वरंva·raṃ ते,te मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa कण्हसप्पस्सkaṇ·ha·sap·pas·sa मुखेmu·khe अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पक्खित्तं,pak·khit·taṃ नna त्वेवtve·va मक्कटियाmak·ka·ṭi·yā अङ्गजातेaṅ·ga·jā·te अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पक्खित्तं।pak·khit·taṃ

     Varaṁ te, moghapurisa, kaṇhasappassa mukhe aṅgajātaṁ pakkhittaṁ, na tveva makkaṭiyā aṅgajāte aṅgajātaṁ pakkhittaṁ.

     It would be better for your penis to enter the mouth of a black snake than to enter a female monkey.

527. 527

     वरंva·raṃ ते,te मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अङ्गारकासुयाaṅ·gā·ra·kā·su·yā आदित्तायā·dit·tā·ya सम्पज्जलितायsam·paj·ja·li·tā·ya सजोतिभूतायsa·jo·ti·bhū·tā·ya अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पक्खित्तं,pak·khit·taṃ नna त्वेवtve·va मक्कटियाmak·ka·ṭi·yā अङ्गजातेaṅ·ga·jā·te अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पक्खित्तं।pak·khit·taṃ

     Varaṁ te, moghapurisa, aṅgārakāsuyā ādittāya sampajjalitāya sajotibhūtāya aṅgajātaṁ pakkhittaṁ, na tveva makkaṭiyā aṅgajāte aṅgajātaṁ pakkhittaṁ.

     It would be better for your penis to enter a blazing charcoal pit than to enter a female monkey.

528. 528

     तंtaṃ किस्सkis·sa हेतु?he·tu

     Taṁ kissa hetu?

     Why is that?

529. 529

     ततोनिदानञ्हि,ta·to·ni·dā·nañ·hi मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa मरणंma·ra·ṇaṃ वाvā निगच्छेय्यni·gac·chey·ya मरणमत्तंma·ra·ṇa·mat·taṃ वाvā दुक्खं;duk·khaṃ

     Tatonidānañhi, moghapurisa, maraṇaṁ vā nigaccheyya maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhaṁ;

     For although it might cause death or death-like suffering,

530. 530

     नna त्वेवtve·va तप्पच्चयाtap·pac·ca·yā कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā अपायंa·pā·yaṃ दुग्गतिंdug·ga·tiṃ विनिपातंvi·ni·pā·taṃ निरयंni·ra·yaṃ उपपज्जेय्य।u·pa·paj·jey·ya

     na tveva tappaccayā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyya.

     it would not cause you to be reborn in a bad destination.

531. 531

     इतोनिदानञ्चi·to·ni·dā·nañ·ca खो,kho मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā अपायंa·pā·yaṃ दुग्गतिंdug·ga·tiṃ विनिपातंvi·ni·pā·taṃ निरयंni·ra·yaṃ उपपज्जेय्य।u·pa·paj·jey·ya

     Itonidānañca kho, moghapurisa, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyya.

     But <em>this</em> might.

532. 532

     तत्थtat·tha नामnā·ma त्वं,tvaṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa यंyaṃ त्वंtvaṃ असद्धम्मंa·sad·dham·maṃ गामधम्मंgā·ma·dham·maṃ वसलधम्मंva·sa·la·dham·maṃ दुट्ठुल्लंduṭ·ṭhul·laṃ ओदकन्तिकंo·da·kan·ti·kaṃ रहस्संra·has·saṃ द्वयंद्वयसमापत्तिंdva·yaṃd·va·ya·sa·mā·pat·tiṃ समापज्जिस्ससि।sa·mā·paj·jis·sa·si

     Tattha nāma tvaṁ, moghapurisa, yaṁ tvaṁ asaddhammaṁ gāmadhammaṁ vasaladhammaṁ duṭṭhullaṁ odakantikaṁ rahassaṁ dvayaṁdvayasamāpattiṁ samāpajjissasi.

     Foolish man, you’ve practiced what is contrary to the true Teaching, the common practice, the low practice, the coarse practice, that which ends with a wash, that which is done in private, that which is done wherever there are couples.

533. 533

     नेतं,ne·taṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अप्पसन्नानंap·pa·san·nā·naṃ वाvā पसादायpa·sā·dā·ya …पे…pe

     Netaṁ, moghapurisa, appasannānaṁ vā pasādāya …pe…

     This will affect people’s confidence …” …

534. 534

     एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve इमंi·maṃ सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ उद्दिसेय्याथ—ud·di·sey·yā·tha

     evañca pana, bhikkhave, imaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ uddiseyyātha—

     “And so, monks, this training rule should be recited like this:

535. 535

     Second preliminary ruling

536. 536

     “योyo पनpa·na भिक्खुbhik·khu मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवेय्यpa·ṭi·se·vey·ya अन्तमसोan·ta·ma·so तिरच्छानगतायपि,ti·rac·chā·na·ga·tā·ya·pi पाराजिकोpā·rā·ji·ko होतिho·ti असंवासो”ति।a·saṃ·vā·so

     “Yo pana bhikkhu methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭiseveyya antamaso tiracchānagatāyapi, pārājiko hoti asaṁvāso”ti.

     ‘If a monk has sexual intercourse, even with a female animal, he is expelled and excluded from the community.’”

537. 537

     एवञ्चिदंe·vañ·ci·daṃ भगवताbha·ga·va·tā भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ होति।ho·ti

     Evañcidaṁ bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ paññattaṁ hoti.

     In this way the Buddha laid down this training rule for the monks.

538. 538

     मक्कटीवत्थुmak·ka·ṭī·vat·thu निट्ठितं।niṭ·ṭhi·taṃ

     Makkaṭīvatthu niṭṭhitaṁ.

     The account of the female monkey is finished.

539. 539

     3। सन्थतभाणवारsan·tha·ta·bhā·ṇa·vā·ra

     3. Santhatabhāṇavāra

     Third substory: the section for recitation on covering

540. 540

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā वेसालिकाve·sā·li·kā वज्जिपुत्तकाvaj·ji·put·ta·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ भुञ्जिंसु,bhuñ·jiṃ·su यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ सुपिंसु,su·piṃ·su यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ न्हायिंसु।nhā·yiṃ·su

     Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā vesālikā vajjiputtakā bhikkhū yāvadatthaṁ bhuñjiṁsu, yāvadatthaṁ supiṁsu, yāvadatthaṁ nhāyiṁsu.

     Soon afterwards there were a number of Vajjian monks from Vesālī who ate, slept, and bathed as much as they liked.

541. 541

     यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ भुञ्जित्वाbhuñ·jit·vā यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ सुपित्वाsu·pit·vā यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ न्हायित्वाnhā·yit·vā अयोनिसोa·yo·ni·so मनसिma·na·si करित्वाka·rit·vā सिक्खंsik·khaṃ अपच्चक्खायa·pac·cak·khā·ya दुब्बल्यंdub·bal·yaṃ अनाविकत्वाa·nā·vi·kat·vā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेविंसु।pa·ṭi·se·viṃ·su

     Yāvadatthaṁ bhuñjitvā yāvadatthaṁ supitvā yāvadatthaṁ nhāyitvā ayoniso manasi karitvā sikkhaṁ apaccakkhāya dubbalyaṁ anāvikatvā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭiseviṁsu.

     Then, not reflecting properly and without first renouncing the training and revealing their weakness, they had sexual intercourse.

542. 542

     तेte अपरेनa·pa·re·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na ञातिब्यसनेनपिñā·tib·ya·sa·ne·na·pi फुट्ठाphuṭ·ṭhā भोगब्यसनेनपिbho·gab·ya·sa·ne·na·pi फुट्ठाphuṭ·ṭhā रोगब्यसनेनपिro·gab·ya·sa·ne·na·pi फुट्ठाphuṭ·ṭhā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एवंe·vaṃ वदन्ति—va·dan·ti

     Te aparena samayena ñātibyasanenapi phuṭṭhā bhogabyasanenapi phuṭṭhā rogabyasanenapi phuṭṭhā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadanti—

     After some time they were affected by loss of relatives, loss of property, and loss of health. They then went to Venerable Ānanda and said,

543. 543

     “नna मयं,ma·yaṃ भन्तेbhan·te आनन्द,ā·nan·da बुद्धगरहिनोbud·dha·ga·ra·hi·no नna धम्मगरहिनोdham·ma·ga·ra·hi·no नna सङ्घगरहिनो;saṅ·gha·ga·ra·hi·no

     “na mayaṁ, bhante ānanda, buddhagarahino na dhammagarahino na saṅghagarahino;

     “Venerable Ānanda, we don’t blame the Buddha, the Teaching, or the Sangha;

544. 544

     अत्तगरहिनोat·ta·ga·ra·hi·no मयं,ma·yaṃ भन्तेbhan·te आनन्द,ā·nan·da अनञ्ञगरहिनो।a·nañ·ña·ga·ra·hi·no

     attagarahino mayaṁ, bhante ānanda, anaññagarahino.

     we only have ourselves to blame.

545. 545

     मयमेवम्हाma·ya·me·vam·hā अलक्खिकाa·lak·khi·kā मयंma·yaṃ अप्पपुञ्ञा,ap·pa·puñ·ñā

     Mayamevamhā alakkhikā mayaṁ appapuññā,

     We were unfortunate and had little merit—

546. 546

     येye मयंma·yaṃ एवंe·vaṃ स्वाक्खातेsvāk·khā·te धम्मविनयेdham·ma·vi·na·ye पब्बजित्वाpab·ba·jit·vā नासक्खिम्हाnā·sak·khim·hā यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ परिपुण्णंpa·ri·puṇ·ṇaṃ परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरितुं।ca·ri·tuṃ

     ye mayaṁ evaṁ svākkhāte dhammavinaye pabbajitvā nāsakkhimhā yāvajīvaṁ paripuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ.

     after going forth on such a well-proclaimed spiritual path, we were unable to practice the perfectly complete and pure spiritual life to the end.

547. 547

     इदानिi·dā·ni चेपिce·pi मयं,ma·yaṃ भन्तेbhan·te आनन्द,ā·nan·da लभेय्यामla·bhey·yā·ma भगवतोbha·ga·va·to सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke पब्बज्जंpab·baj·jaṃ लभेय्यामla·bhey·yā·ma उपसम्पदं,u·pa·sam·pa·daṃ इदानिपिi·dā·ni·pi मयंma·yaṃ विपस्सकाvi·pas·sa·kā कुसलानंku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ पुब्बरत्तापररत्तंpub·ba·rat·tā·pa·ra·rat·taṃ बोधिपक्खिकानंbo·dhi·pak·khi·kā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ भावनानुयोगमनुयुत्ताbhā·va·nā·nu·yo·ga·ma·nu·yut·tā विहरेय्याम।vi·ha·rey·yā·ma

     Idāni cepi mayaṁ, bhante ānanda, labheyyāma bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ labheyyāma upasampadaṁ, idānipi mayaṁ vipassakā kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pubbarattāpararattaṁ bodhipakkhikānaṁ dhammānaṁ bhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā vihareyyāma.

     If we were now to get the going forth and the full ordination in the presence of the Buddha, we would have clarity about wholesome qualities and be devoted day in and day out to developing the aids to awakening.

548. 548

     साधु,sā·dhu भन्तेbhan·te आनन्द,ā·nan·da भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेही”ति।ā·ro·ce·hī

     Sādhu, bhante ānanda, bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocehī”ti.

     Venerable Ānanda, please inform the Buddha.”

549. 549

     “एवमावुसो”तिe·va·mā·vu·so खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do वेसालिकानंve·sā·li·kā·naṃ वज्जिपुत्तकानंvaj·ji·put·ta·kā·naṃ पटिस्सुणित्वाpa·ṭis·su·ṇit·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसि।ā·ro·ce·si

     “Evamāvuso”ti kho āyasmā ānando vesālikānaṁ vajjiputtakānaṁ paṭissuṇitvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesi.

     Saying, “Yes,” he went to the Buddha and told him.

550. 550

     “अट्ठानमेतं,aṭ·ṭhā·na·me·taṃ आनन्द,ā·nan·da अनवकासोa·na·va·kā·so यंyaṃ तथागतोta·thā·ga·to वज्जीनंvaj·jī·naṃ वाvā वज्जिपुत्तकानंvaj·ji·put·ta·kā·naṃ वाvā कारणाkā·ra·ṇā सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ समूहनेय्या”ति।sa·mū·ha·ney·yā

     “Aṭṭhānametaṁ, ānanda, anavakāso yaṁ tathāgato vajjīnaṁ vā vajjiputtakānaṁ vā kāraṇā sāvakānaṁ pārājikaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ paññattaṁ samūhaneyyā”ti.

     “It’s impossible, Ānanda, that the Buddha should abolish a training rule that entails expulsion because of the Vajjians.”

551. 551

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     The Buddha then gave a teaching and addressed the monks:

552. 552

     “यो,yo भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सिक्खंsik·khaṃ अपच्चक्खायa·pac·cak·khā·ya दुब्बल्यंdub·bal·yaṃ अनाविकत्वाa·nā·vi·kat·vā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवतिpa·ṭi·se·va·ti सोso आगतोā·ga·to नna उपसम्पादेतब्बो।u·pa·sam·pā·de·tab·bo

     “yo, bhikkhave, sikkhaṁ apaccakkhāya dubbalyaṁ anāvikatvā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevati so āgato na upasampādetabbo.

     “Monks, if someone, without first renouncing the training and revealing their weakness, has sexual intercourse, they may not receive the full ordination once again.

553. 553

     योyo चca खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खायpac·cak·khā·ya दुब्बल्यंdub·bal·yaṃ आविकत्वाā·vi·kat·vā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवतिpa·ṭi·se·va·ti सोso आगतोā·ga·to उपसम्पादेतब्बो।u·pa·sam·pā·de·tab·bo

     Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, sikkhaṁ paccakkhāya dubbalyaṁ āvikatvā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevati so āgato upasampādetabbo.

     But, monks, if someone has sexual intercourse after first renouncing the training and revealing their weakness, they may receive the full ordination once again.

554. 554

     एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve इमंi·maṃ सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ उद्दिसेय्याथ—ud·di·sey·yā·tha

     Evañca pana, bhikkhave, imaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ uddiseyyātha—

     And so, monks, this training rule should be recited like this:

555. 555

     Final ruling

556. 556

     “योyo पनpa·na भिक्खुbhik·khu भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ सिक्खासाजीवसमापन्नोsik·khā·sā·jī·va·sa·mā·pan·no सिक्खंsik·khaṃ अपच्चक्खायa·pac·cak·khā·ya दुब्बल्यंdub·bal·yaṃ अनाविकत्वाa·nā·vi·kat·vā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवेय्य,pa·ṭi·se·vey·ya अन्तमसोan·ta·ma·so तिरच्छानगतायपि,ti·rac·chā·na·ga·tā·ya·pi पाराजिकोpā·rā·ji·ko होतिho·ti असंवासो”ति।a·saṃ·vā·so

     “Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhūnaṁ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno sikkhaṁ apaccakkhāya dubbalyaṁ anāvikatvā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭiseveyya, antamaso tiracchānagatāyapi, pārājiko hoti asaṁvāso”ti.

     ‘If a monk, after taking on the monks’ training and way of life, without first renouncing the training and revealing his weakness, has sexual intercourse, even with a female animal, he is expelled and excluded from the community.’”

557. 557

     Definitions

558. 558

     योyo पनातिpa·nā·ti

     Yo panāti

     A:

559. 559

     योyo यादिसोyā·di·so यथायुत्तोya·thā·yut·to यथाजच्चोya·thā·jac·co यथानामोya·thā·nā·mo यथागोत्तोya·thā·got·to यथासीलोya·thā·sī·lo यथाविहारीya·thā·vi·hā·rī यथागोचरोya·thā·go·ca·ro थेरोthe·ro वाvā नवोna·vo वाvā मज्झिमोmaj·jhi·mo वा।vā एसोe·so वुच्चतिvuc·ca·ti “योyo पना”ति।pa·nā

     yo yādiso yathāyutto yathājacco yathānāmo yathāgotto yathāsīlo yathāvihārī yathāgocaro thero vā navo vā majjhimo vā. Eso vuccati “yo panā”ti.

     whoever, of such a kind, of such activity, of such caste, of such name, of such family, of such conduct, of such behavior, of such association, who is senior, who is junior, or who is of middle standing—this is called “a”.

560. 560

     भिक्खूतिbhik·khū·ti

     Bhikkhūti

     Monk:

561. 561

     भिक्खकोतिbhik·kha·ko·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu

     bhikkhakoti bhikkhu,

     he is a monk because he lives on alms;

562. 562

     भिक्खाचरियंbhik·khā·ca·ri·yaṃ अज्झुपगतोतिaj·jhu·pa·ga·to·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu

     bhikkhācariyaṁ ajjhupagatoti bhikkhu,

     a monk because he has gone over to living on alms;

563. 563

     भिन्नपटधरोतिbhin·na·pa·ṭa·dha·ro·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu

     bhinnapaṭadharoti bhikkhu,

     a monk because he wears a patchwork cloth;

564. 564

     समञ्ञायsa·mañ·ñā·ya भिक्खु,bhik·khu

     samaññāya bhikkhu,

     a monk by convention;

565. 565

     पटिञ्ञायpa·ṭiñ·ñā·ya भिक्खु,bhik·khu

     paṭiññāya bhikkhu,

     a monk on account of his claim;

566. 566

     एहिe·hi भिक्खूतिbhik·khū·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu

     ehi bhikkhūti bhikkhu,

     a “come, monk” monk;

567. 567

     तीहिtī·hi सरणगमनेहिsa·ra·ṇa·ga·ma·ne·hi उपसम्पन्नोतिu·pa·sam·pan·no·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu

     tīhi saraṇagamanehi upasampannoti bhikkhu,

     a monk given the full ordination by taking the three refuges;

568. 568

     भद्रोbhad·ro भिक्खु,bhik·khu

     bhadro bhikkhu,

     a good monk;

569. 569

     सारोsā·ro भिक्खु,bhik·khu

     sāro bhikkhu,

     a monk of substance;

570. 570

     सेखोse·kho भिक्खु,bhik·khu

     sekho bhikkhu,

     a trainee monk;

571. 571

     असेखोa·se·kho भिक्खु,bhik·khu

     asekho bhikkhu,

     a fully trained monk;

572. 572

     समग्गेनsa·mag·ge·na सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na ञत्तिचतुत्थेनñat·ti·ca·tut·the·na कम्मेनkam·me·na अकुप्पेनa·kup·pe·na ठानारहेनṭhā·nā·ra·he·na उपसम्पन्नोतिu·pa·sam·pan·no·ti भिक्खु।bhik·khu

     samaggena saṅghena ñatticatutthena kammena akuppena ṭhānārahena upasampannoti bhikkhu.

     a monk who has been given the full ordination by a unanimous Sangha through a legal procedure consisting of one motion and three announcements that is irreversible and fit to stand.

573. 573

     तत्रtat·ra य्वायंyvā·yaṃ भिक्खुbhik·khu समग्गेनsa·mag·ge·na सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na ञत्तिचतुत्थेनñat·ti·ca·tut·the·na कम्मेनkam·me·na अकुप्पेनa·kup·pe·na ठानारहेनṭhā·nā·ra·he·na उपसम्पन्नो,u·pa·sam·pan·no अयंa·yaṃ इमस्मिंi·mas·miṃ अत्थेat·the अधिप्पेतोa·dhip·pe·to भिक्खूति।bhik·khū·ti

     Tatra yvāyaṁ bhikkhu samaggena saṅghena ñatticatutthena kammena akuppena ṭhānārahena upasampanno, ayaṁ imasmiṁ atthe adhippeto bhikkhūti.

     The monk who has been given the full ordination by a unanimous Sangha through a legal procedure consisting of one motion and three announcements that is irreversible and fit to stand—this sort of monk is meant in this case.

574. 574

     सिक्खातिsik·khā·ti

     Sikkhāti

     Training:

575. 575

     तिस्सोtis·so सिक्खा—अधिसीलसिक्खा,sik·khā अधिचित्तसिक्खा,a·dhi·cit·ta·sik·khā अधिपञ्ञासिक्खा।a·dhi·pañ·ñā·sik·khā

     tisso sikkhā—adhisīlasikkhā, adhicittasikkhā, adhipaññāsikkhā.

     the three trainings: the training in the higher morality, the training in the higher mind, the training in the higher wisdom.

576. 576

     तत्रtat·ra यायंyā·yaṃ अधिसीलसिक्खा,a·dhi·sī·la·sik·khā अयंa·yaṃ इमस्मिंi·mas·miṃ अत्थेat·the अधिप्पेताa·dhip·pe·tā सिक्खाति।sik·khā·ti

     Tatra yāyaṁ adhisīlasikkhā, ayaṁ imasmiṁ atthe adhippetā sikkhāti.

     The training in the higher morality is the training meant in this case.

577. 577

     साजीवंsā·jī·vaṃ नामnā·ma

     Sājīvaṁ nāma

     Way of life:

578. 578

     यंyaṃ भगवताbha·ga·va·tā पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ सिक्खापदं,sik·khā·pa·daṃ एतंe·taṃ साजीवंsā·jī·vaṃ नाम।nā·ma

     yaṁ bhagavatā paññattaṁ sikkhāpadaṁ, etaṁ sājīvaṁ nāma.

     whatever training rule has been laid down by the Buddha—this is called “way of life”.

579. 579

     तस्मिंtas·miṃ सिक्खति,sik·kha·ti तेनte·na वुच्चतिvuc·ca·ti साजीवसमापन्नोति।sā·jī·va·sa·mā·pan·no·ti

     Tasmiṁ sikkhati, tena vuccati sājīvasamāpannoti.

     One trains in this; therefore it is called “after taking on the way of life”.

580. 580

     सिक्खंsik·khaṃ अपच्चक्खायa·pac·cak·khā·ya दुब्बल्यंdub·bal·yaṃ अनाविकत्वातिa·nā·vi·kat·vā·ti

     Sikkhaṁ apaccakkhāya dubbalyaṁ anāvikatvāti

     Without first renouncing the training and revealing his weakness:

581. 581

     अत्थि,at·thi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दुब्बल्याविकम्मञ्चेवdub·bal·yā·vi·kam·mañ·ce·va होतिho·ti सिक्खाsik·khā चca अपच्चक्खाता;a·pac·cak·khā·tā

     atthi, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca apaccakkhātā;

     “There is, monks, a revealing of weakness without the training being renounced;

582. 582

     अत्थि,at·thi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दुब्बल्याविकम्मञ्चेवdub·bal·yā·vi·kam·mañ·ce·va होतिho·ti सिक्खाsik·khā चca पच्चक्खाता।pac·cak·khā·tā

     atthi, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca paccakkhātā.

     and there is a revealing of weakness together with the training being renounced.

583. 583

     कथञ्च,ka·thañ·ca भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दुब्बल्याविकम्मञ्चेवdub·bal·yā·vi·kam·mañ·ce·va होतिho·ti सिक्खाsik·khā चca अपच्चक्खाता।a·pac·cak·khā·tā

     Kathañca, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca apaccakkhātā.

     And how is there a revealing of weakness without the training being renounced?

584. 584

     इध,i·dha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu उक्कण्ठितोuk·kaṇ·ṭhi·to अनभिरतोa·na·bhi·ra·to सामञ्ञाsā·mañ·ñā चवितुकामोca·vi·tu·kā·mo

     Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ukkaṇṭhito anabhirato sāmaññā cavitukāmo

     It may be that a monk is dissatisfied, discontent, desiring to give up the monastic life;

585. 585

     भिक्खुभावंbhik·khu·bhā·vaṃ अट्टीयमानोaṭ·ṭī·ya·mā·no हरायमानोha·rā·ya·mā·no जिगुच्छमानोji·guc·cha·mā·no

     bhikkhubhāvaṁ aṭṭīyamāno harāyamāno jigucchamāno

     troubled, ashamed, and disgusted with the monkhood;

586. 586

     गिहिभावंgi·hi·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानोpat·tha·ya·mā·no

     gihibhāvaṁ patthayamāno

     longing to be a householder,

587. 587

     उपासकभावंu·pā·sa·ka·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानोpat·tha·ya·mā·no

     upāsakabhāvaṁ patthayamāno

     longing to be a lay follower,

588. 588

     आरामिकभावंā·rā·mi·ka·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानोpat·tha·ya·mā·no

     ārāmikabhāvaṁ patthayamāno

     longing to be a monastery worker,

589. 589

     सामणेरभावंsā·ma·ṇe·ra·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानोpat·tha·ya·mā·no

     sāmaṇerabhāvaṁ patthayamāno

     longing to be a novice,

590. 590

     तित्थियभावंtit·thi·ya·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानोpat·tha·ya·mā·no

     titthiyabhāvaṁ patthayamāno

     longing to be a monastic of another religion,

591. 591

     तित्थियसावकभावंtit·thi·ya·sā·va·ka·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानोpat·tha·ya·mā·no

     titthiyasāvakabhāvaṁ patthayamāno

     longing to be a lay follower of another religion,

592. 592

     अस्समणभावंas·sa·ma·ṇa·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानोpat·tha·ya·mā·no

     assamaṇabhāvaṁ patthayamāno

     longing to be a non-ascetic,

593. 593

     असक्यपुत्तियभावंa·sak·ya·put·ti·ya·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानो—pat·tha·ya·mā·no

     asakyaputtiyabhāvaṁ patthayamāno—

     longing to be a non-monastic,

594. 594

     “यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ बुद्धंbud·dhaṃ पच्चक्खेय्यन्”तिpac·cak·khey·yan वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेति।viñ·ñā·pe·ti

     “yannūnāhaṁ buddhaṁ paccakkheyyan”ti vadati viññāpeti.

     and he says and declares: ‘Why don’t I renounce the Buddha?’

595. 595

     एवम्पि,e·vam·pi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दुब्बल्याविकम्मञ्चेवdub·bal·yā·vi·kam·mañ·ce·va होतिho·ti सिक्खाsik·khā चca अपच्चक्खाता।a·pac·cak·khā·tā

     Evampi, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca apaccakkhātā.

     In this way, monks, there’s a revealing of weakness without the training being renounced.

596. 596

     अथa·tha वाvā पनpa·na उक्कण्ठितोuk·kaṇ·ṭhi·to अनभिरतोa·na·bhi·ra·to सामञ्ञाsā·mañ·ñā चवितुकामोca·vi·tu·kā·mo

     Atha vā pana ukkaṇṭhito anabhirato sāmaññā cavitukāmo

     Or again, dissatisfied, discontent, desiring to give up the monastic life;

597. 597

     भिक्खुभावंbhik·khu·bhā·vaṃ अट्टीयमानोaṭ·ṭī·ya·mā·no हरायमानोha·rā·ya·mā·no जिगुच्छमानोji·guc·cha·mā·no

     bhikkhubhāvaṁ aṭṭīyamāno harāyamāno jigucchamāno

     troubled, ashamed, and disgusted with the monkhood;

598. 598

     गिहिभावंgi·hi·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानोpat·tha·ya·mā·no …पे…pe

     gihibhāvaṁ patthayamāno …pe…

     longing to be a householder …

599. 599

     असक्यपुत्तियभावंa·sak·ya·put·ti·ya·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानो—pat·tha·ya·mā·no

     asakyaputtiyabhāvaṁ patthayamāno—

     longing to be a non-monastic,

600. 600

     “यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पच्चक्खेय्यन्”तिpac·cak·khey·yan वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …पे…pe

     “yannūnāhaṁ dhammaṁ paccakkheyyan”ti vadati viññāpeti …pe…

     he says and declares: ‘Why don’t I renounce the Teaching?’ …

601. 601

     “यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ …

     “yannūnāhaṁ saṅghaṁ …

     the Sangha?’ …

602. 602

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ सिक्खंsik·khaṃ …

     yannūnāhaṁ sikkhaṁ …

     the practice?’ …

603. 603

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ विनयंvi·na·yaṃ …

     yannūnāhaṁ vinayaṁ …

     the training?’ …

604. 604

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ पातिमोक्खंpā·ti·mok·khaṃ …

     yannūnāhaṁ pātimokkhaṁ …

     the Monastic Code?’ …

605. 605

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ उद्देसंud·de·saṃ …

     yannūnāhaṁ uddesaṁ …

     the recitation?’ …

606. 606

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ उपज्झायंu·paj·jhā·yaṃ …

     yannūnāhaṁ upajjhāyaṁ …

     my preceptor?’ …

607. 607

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ आचरियंā·ca·ri·yaṃ …

     yannūnāhaṁ ācariyaṁ …

     my teacher?’ …

608. 608

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ सद्धिविहारिकंsad·dhi·vi·hā·ri·kaṃ …

     yannūnāhaṁ saddhivihārikaṁ …

     my student?’ …

609. 609

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ अन्तेवासिकंan·te·vā·si·kaṃ …

     yannūnāhaṁ antevāsikaṁ …

     my pupil?’ …

610. 610

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ समानुपज्झायकंsa·mā·nu·paj·jhā·ya·kaṃ …

     yannūnāhaṁ samānupajjhāyakaṁ …

     my co-student?’ …

611. 611

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ समानाचरियकंsa·mā·nā·ca·ri·ya·kaṃ …

     yannūnāhaṁ samānācariyakaṁ …

     my co-pupil?’ …

612. 612

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ सब्रह्मचारिंsab·rah·ma·cā·riṃ पच्चक्खेय्यन्”तिpac·cak·khey·yan वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेति।viñ·ñā·pe·ti

     yannūnāhaṁ sabrahmacāriṁ paccakkheyyan”ti vadati viññāpeti.

     he says and declares: ‘Why don’t I renounce my fellow monastics?’ …

613. 613

     “यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ गिहीgi·hī अस्सन्”तिas·san वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेति।viñ·ñā·pe·ti

     “Yannūnāhaṁ gihī assan”ti vadati viññāpeti.

     ‘Why don’t I become a householder?’ …

614. 614

     “यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ उपासकोu·pā·sa·ko अस्सन्”तिas·san …

     “Yannūnāhaṁ upāsako assan”ti …

     ‘Why don’t I become a lay follower?’ …

615. 615

     “यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ आरामिकोā·rā·mi·ko अस्सन्”तिas·san …

     “yannūnāhaṁ ārāmiko assan”ti …

     ‘Why don’t I become a monastery worker?’ …

616. 616

     “यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ सामणेरोsā·ma·ṇe·ro अस्सन्”तिas·san …

     “yannūnāhaṁ sāmaṇero assan”ti …

     ‘Why don’t I become a novice?’ …

617. 617

     “यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ तित्थियोtit·thi·yo अस्सन्”तिas·san …

     “yannūnāhaṁ titthiyo assan”ti …

     ‘Why don’t I become a monastic of another religion?’ …

618. 618

     “यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ तित्थियसावकोtit·thi·ya·sā·va·ko अस्सन्”तिas·san …

     “yannūnāhaṁ titthiyasāvako assan”ti …

     ‘Why don’t I become a lay follower of another religion?’ …

619. 619

     “यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ अस्समणोas·sa·ma·ṇo अस्सन्”तिas·san …

     “yannūnāhaṁ assamaṇo assan”ti …

     ‘Why don’t I become a non-ascetic?’ …

620. 620

     “यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ असक्यपुत्तियोa·sak·ya·put·ti·yo अस्सन्”तिas·san वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेति।viñ·ñā·pe·ti

     “yannūnāhaṁ asakyaputtiyo assan”ti vadati viññāpeti.

     ‘Why don’t I become a non-monastic?’

621. 621

     एवम्पि,e·vam·pi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दुब्बल्याविकम्मञ्चेवdub·bal·yā·vi·kam·mañ·ce·va होतिho·ti सिक्खाsik·khā चca अपच्चक्खाता।a·pac·cak·khā·tā

     Evampi, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca apaccakkhātā.

     In this way too, monks, there’s a revealing of weakness without the training being renounced.

622. 622

     अथa·tha वाvā पनpa·na उक्कण्ठितोuk·kaṇ·ṭhi·to अनभिरतोa·na·bhi·ra·to सामञ्ञाsā·mañ·ñā चवितुकामोca·vi·tu·kā·mo

     Atha vā pana ukkaṇṭhito anabhirato sāmaññā cavitukāmo

     Or again, dissatisfied, discontent, desiring to give up the monastic life;

623. 623

     भिक्खुभावंbhik·khu·bhā·vaṃ अट्टीयमानोaṭ·ṭī·ya·mā·no हरायमानोha·rā·ya·mā·no जिगुच्छमानोji·guc·cha·mā·no

     bhikkhubhāvaṁ aṭṭīyamāno harāyamāno jigucchamāno

     troubled, ashamed, and disgusted with the monkhood;

624. 624

     गिहिभावंgi·hi·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानोpat·tha·ya·mā·no …पे…pe

     gihibhāvaṁ patthayamāno …pe…

     longing to be a householder …

625. 625

     असक्यपुत्तियभावंa·sak·ya·put·ti·ya·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानो—pat·tha·ya·mā·no

     asakyaputtiyabhāvaṁ patthayamāno—

     longing to be a non-monastic,

626. 626

     “यदिya·di पनाहंpa·nā·haṃ बुद्धंbud·dhaṃ पच्चक्खेय्यन्”तिpac·cak·khey·yan वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …पे…pe

     “yadi panāhaṁ buddhaṁ paccakkheyyan”ti vadati viññāpeti …pe…

     he says and declares: ‘What if I renounced the Buddha?’ …

627. 627

     “यदिya·di पनाहंpa·nā·haṃ असक्यपुत्तियोa·sak·ya·put·ti·yo अस्सन्”तिas·san वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …पे…pe

     “yadi panāhaṁ asakyaputtiyo assan”ti vadati viññāpeti …pe…

     he says and declares: ‘What if I were a non-monastic?’ …

628. 628

     “अपाहंa·pā·haṃ बुद्धंbud·dhaṃ पच्चक्खेय्यन्”तिpac·cak·khey·yan वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …पे…pe

     “apāhaṁ buddhaṁ paccakkheyyan”ti vadati viññāpeti …pe…

     he says and declares: ‘Perhaps I should renounce the Buddha?’ …

629. 629

     “अपाहंa·pā·haṃ असक्यपुत्तियोa·sak·ya·put·ti·yo अस्सन्”तिas·san वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …पे…pe

     “apāhaṁ asakyaputtiyo assan”ti vadati viññāpeti …pe…

     he says and declares: ‘Perhaps I should be a non-monastic?’ …

630. 630

     “हन्दाहंhan·dā·haṃ बुद्धंbud·dhaṃ पच्चक्खेय्यन्”तिpac·cak·khey·yan वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …पे…pe

     “handāhaṁ buddhaṁ paccakkheyyan”ti vadati viññāpeti …pe…

     he says and declares: ‘Well then, I should renounce the Buddha.’ …

631. 631

     “हन्दाहंhan·dā·haṃ असक्यपुत्तियोa·sak·ya·put·ti·yo अस्सन्”तिas·san वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …पे…pe

     “handāhaṁ asakyaputtiyo assan”ti vadati viññāpeti …pe…

     he says and declares: ‘Well then, I should be a non-monastic.’ …

632. 632

     “होतिho·ti मेme बुद्धंbud·dhaṃ पच्चक्खेय्यन्”तिpac·cak·khey·yan वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …पे…pe

     “hoti me buddhaṁ paccakkheyyan”ti vadati viññāpeti …pe…

     he says and declares: ‘I think I should renounce the Buddha.’ …

633. 633

     “होतिho·ti मेme असक्यपुत्तियोa·sak·ya·put·ti·yo अस्सन्”तिas·san वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेति।viñ·ñā·pe·ti

     “hoti me asakyaputtiyo assan”ti vadati viññāpeti.

     he says and declares: ‘I think I should be a non-monastic.’

634. 634

     एवम्पि,e·vam·pi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दुब्बल्याविकम्मञ्चेवdub·bal·yā·vi·kam·mañ·ce·va होतिho·ti सिक्खाsik·khā चca अपच्चक्खाता।a·pac·cak·khā·tā

     Evampi, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca apaccakkhātā.

     In this way too, monks, there’s a revealing of weakness without the training being renounced.

635. 635

     अथa·tha वाvā पनpa·na उक्कण्ठितोuk·kaṇ·ṭhi·to अनभिरतोa·na·bhi·ra·to सामञ्ञाsā·mañ·ñā चवितुकामोca·vi·tu·kā·mo

     Atha vā pana ukkaṇṭhito anabhirato sāmaññā cavitukāmo

     Or again, dissatisfied, discontent, desiring to give up the monastic life;

636. 636

     भिक्खुभावंbhik·khu·bhā·vaṃ अट्टीयमानोaṭ·ṭī·ya·mā·no हरायमानोha·rā·ya·mā·no जिगुच्छमानोji·guc·cha·mā·no

     bhikkhubhāvaṁ aṭṭīyamāno harāyamāno jigucchamāno

     troubled, ashamed, and disgusted with the monkhood;

637. 637

     गिहिभावंgi·hi·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानोpat·tha·ya·mā·no …पे…pe

     gihibhāvaṁ patthayamāno …pe…

     longing to be a householder …

638. 638

     असक्यपुत्तियभावंa·sak·ya·put·ti·ya·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानोpat·tha·ya·mā·no

     asakyaputtiyabhāvaṁ patthayamāno

     longing to be a non-monastic,

639. 639

     “मातरंmā·ta·raṃ सरामी”तिsa·rā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “mātaraṁ sarāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     he says and declares: ‘I remember my mother.’ …

640. 640

     “पितरंpi·ta·raṃ सरामी”तिsa·rā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “pitaraṁ sarāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I remember my father.’ …

641. 641

     “भातरंbhā·ta·raṃ सरामी”तिsa·rā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “bhātaraṁ sarāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I remember my brother.’ …

642. 642

     “भगिनिंbha·gi·niṃ सरामी”तिsa·rā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “bhaginiṁ sarāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I remember my sister.’ …

643. 643

     “पुत्तंput·taṃ सरामी”तिsa·rā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “puttaṁ sarāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I remember my son.’ …

644. 644

     “धीतरंdhī·ta·raṃ सरामी”तिsa·rā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “dhītaraṁ sarāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I remember my daughter.’ …

645. 645

     “पजापतिंpa·jā·pa·tiṃ सरामी”तिsa·rā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “pajāpatiṁ sarāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I remember my wife.’ …

646. 646

     “ञातकेñā·ta·ke सरामी”तिsa·rā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “ñātake sarāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I remember my relations.’ …

647. 647

     “मित्तेmit·te सरामी”तिsa·rā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “mitte sarāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I remember my friends.’ …

648. 648

     “गामंgā·maṃ सरामी”तिsa·rā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “gāmaṁ sarāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I remember my village.’ …

649. 649

     “निगमंni·ga·maṃ सरामी”तिsa·rā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “nigamaṁ sarāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I remember my town.’ …

650. 650

     “खेत्तंkhet·taṃ सरामी”तिsa·rā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “khettaṁ sarāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I remember my fields.’ …

651. 651

     “वत्थुंvat·thuṃ सरामी”तिsa·rā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “vatthuṁ sarāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I remember my land.’ …

652. 652

     “हिरञ्ञंhi·rañ·ñaṃ सरामी”तिsa·rā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “hiraññaṁ sarāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I remember my money.’ …

653. 653

     “सुवण्णंsu·vaṇ·ṇaṃ सरामी”तिsa·rā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “suvaṇṇaṁ sarāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I remember my gold.’ …

654. 654

     “सिप्पंsip·paṃ सरामी”तिsa·rā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “sippaṁ sarāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I remember my profession.’ …

655. 655

     “पुब्बेpub·be हसितंha·si·taṃ लपितंla·pi·taṃ कीळितंkī·ḷi·taṃ समनुस्सरामी”तिsa·ma·nus·sa·rā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेति।viñ·ñā·pe·ti

     “pubbe hasitaṁ lapitaṁ kīḷitaṁ samanussarāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti.

     he says and declares: ‘I remember my former laughter, chatter, and play.’

656. 656

     एवम्पि,e·vam·pi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दुब्बल्याविकम्मञ्चेवdub·bal·yā·vi·kam·mañ·ce·va होतिho·ti सिक्खाsik·khā चca अपच्चक्खाता।a·pac·cak·khā·tā

     Evampi, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca apaccakkhātā.

     In this way too, monks, there’s a revealing of weakness without the training being renounced.

657. 657

     अथa·tha वाvā पनpa·na उक्कण्ठितोuk·kaṇ·ṭhi·to अनभिरतोa·na·bhi·ra·to सामञ्ञाsā·mañ·ñā चवितुकामोca·vi·tu·kā·mo

     Atha vā pana ukkaṇṭhito anabhirato sāmaññā cavitukāmo

     Or again, dissatisfied, discontent, desiring to give up the monastic life;

658. 658

     भिक्खुभावंbhik·khu·bhā·vaṃ अट्टीयमानोaṭ·ṭī·ya·mā·no हरायमानोha·rā·ya·mā·no जिगुच्छमानोji·guc·cha·mā·no

     bhikkhubhāvaṁ aṭṭīyamāno harāyamāno jigucchamāno

     troubled, ashamed, and disgusted with the monkhood;

659. 659

     गिहिभावंgi·hi·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानोpat·tha·ya·mā·no …पे…pe

     gihibhāvaṁ patthayamāno …pe…

     longing to be a householder …

660. 660

     असक्यपुत्तियभावंa·sak·ya·put·ti·ya·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानो—pat·tha·ya·mā·no

     asakyaputtiyabhāvaṁ patthayamāno—

     longing to be a non-monastic,

661. 661

     “माताmā·tā मेme अत्थि,at·thi साsā मयाma·yā पोसेतब्बा”तिpo·se·tab·bā वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “mātā me atthi, sā mayā posetabbā”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     he says and declares: ‘I have a mother who should be supported by me.’ …

662. 662

     “पिताpi·tā मेme अत्थि,at·thi सोso मयाma·yā पोसेतब्बो”तिpo·se·tab·bo वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “pitā me atthi, so mayā posetabbo”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have a father …

663. 663

     “भाताbhā·tā मेme अत्थि,at·thi सोso मयाma·yā पोसेतब्बो”तिpo·se·tab·bo वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “bhātā me atthi, so mayā posetabbo”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have a brother …

664. 664

     “भगिनीbha·gi·nī मेme अत्थि,at·thi साsā मयाma·yā पोसेतब्बा”तिpo·se·tab·bā वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “bhaginī me atthi, sā mayā posetabbā”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have a sister …

665. 665

     “पुत्तोput·to मेme अत्थि,at·thi सोso मयाma·yā पोसेतब्बो”तिpo·se·tab·bo वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “putto me atthi, so mayā posetabbo”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have a son …

666. 666

     “धीताdhī·tā मेme अत्थि,at·thi साsā मयाma·yā पोसेतब्बा”तिpo·se·tab·bā वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “dhītā me atthi, sā mayā posetabbā”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have a daughter …

667. 667

     “पजापतिpa·jā·pa·ti मेme अत्थि,at·thi साsā मयाma·yā पोसेतब्बा”तिpo·se·tab·bā वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “pajāpati me atthi, sā mayā posetabbā”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have a wife …

668. 668

     “ञातकाñā·ta·kā मेme अत्थि,at·thi तेte मयाma·yā पोसेतब्बा”तिpo·se·tab·bā वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “ñātakā me atthi, te mayā posetabbā”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have relations …

669. 669

     “मित्ताmit·tā मेme अत्थि,at·thi तेte मयाma·yā पोसेतब्बा”तिpo·se·tab·bā वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेति।viñ·ñā·pe·ti

     “mittā me atthi, te mayā posetabbā”ti vadati viññāpeti.

     he says and declares: ‘I have friends who should be supported by me.’

670. 670

     एवम्पि,e·vam·pi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दुब्बल्याविकम्मञ्चेवdub·bal·yā·vi·kam·mañ·ce·va होतिho·ti सिक्खाsik·khā चca अपच्चक्खाता।a·pac·cak·khā·tā

     Evampi, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca apaccakkhātā.

     In this way too, monks, there’s a revealing of weakness without the training being renounced.

671. 671

     अथa·tha वाvā पनpa·na उक्कण्ठितोuk·kaṇ·ṭhi·to अनभिरतोa·na·bhi·ra·to सामञ्ञाsā·mañ·ñā चवितुकामोca·vi·tu·kā·mo

     Atha vā pana ukkaṇṭhito anabhirato sāmaññā cavitukāmo

     Or again, dissatisfied, discontent, desiring to give up the monastic life;

672. 672

     भिक्खुभावंbhik·khu·bhā·vaṃ अट्टीयमानोaṭ·ṭī·ya·mā·no हरायमानोha·rā·ya·mā·no जिगुच्छमानोji·guc·cha·mā·no

     bhikkhubhāvaṁ aṭṭīyamāno harāyamāno jigucchamāno

     troubled, ashamed, and disgusted with the monkhood;

673. 673

     गिहिभावंgi·hi·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानोpat·tha·ya·mā·no …पे…pe

     gihibhāvaṁ patthayamāno …pe…

     longing to be a householder …

674. 674

     असक्यपुत्तियभावंa·sak·ya·put·ti·ya·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानो—pat·tha·ya·mā·no

     asakyaputtiyabhāvaṁ patthayamāno—

     longing to be a non-monastic,

675. 675

     “माताmā·tā मेme अत्थि,at·thi साsā मंmaṃ पोसेस्सती”तिpo·ses·sa·tī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “mātā me atthi, sā maṁ posessatī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     he says and declares: ‘I have a mother; she’ll support me.’ …

676. 676

     “पिताpi·tā मेme अत्थि,at·thi सोso मंmaṃ पोसेस्सती”तिpo·ses·sa·tī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “pitā me atthi, so maṁ posessatī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have a father; he’ll support me.’ …

677. 677

     “भाताbhā·tā मेme अत्थि,at·thi सोso मंmaṃ पोसेस्सती”तिpo·ses·sa·tī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “bhātā me atthi, so maṁ posessatī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have a brother; he’ll support me.’ …

678. 678

     “भगिनीbha·gi·nī मेme अत्थि,at·thi साsā मंmaṃ पोसेस्सती”तिpo·ses·sa·tī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “bhaginī me atthi, sā maṁ posessatī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have a sister; she’ll support me.’ …

679. 679

     “पुत्तोput·to मेme अत्थि,at·thi सोso मंmaṃ पोसेस्सती”तिpo·ses·sa·tī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “putto me atthi, so maṁ posessatī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have a son; he’ll support me.’ …

680. 680

     “धीताdhī·tā मेme अत्थि,at·thi साsā मंmaṃ पोसेस्सती”तिpo·ses·sa·tī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “dhītā me atthi, sā maṁ posessatī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have a daughter; she’ll support me.’ …

681. 681

     “पजापतिpa·jā·pa·ti मेme अत्थि,at·thi साsā मंmaṃ पोसेस्सती”तिpo·ses·sa·tī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “pajāpati me atthi, sā maṁ posessatī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have a wife; she’ll support me.’ …

682. 682

     “ञातकाñā·ta·kā मेme अत्थि,at·thi तेte मंmaṃ पोसेस्सन्ती”तिpo·ses·san·tī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “ñātakā me atthi, te maṁ posessantī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have relations; they’ll support me.’ …

683. 683

     “मित्ताmit·tā मेme अत्थि,at·thi तेte मंmaṃ पोसेस्सन्ती”तिpo·ses·san·tī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “mittā me atthi, te maṁ posessantī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have friends; they’ll support me.’ …

684. 684

     “गामोgā·mo मेme अत्थि,at·thi तेनाहंte·nā·haṃ जीविस्सामी”तिjī·vis·sā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “gāmo me atthi, tenāhaṁ jīvissāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have a village; I’ll live by means of it.’ …

685. 685

     “निगमोni·ga·mo मेme अत्थि,at·thi तेनाहंte·nā·haṃ जीविस्सामी”तिjī·vis·sā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “nigamo me atthi, tenāhaṁ jīvissāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have a town; I’ll live by means of it.’ …

686. 686

     “खेत्तंkhet·taṃ मेme अत्थि,at·thi तेनाहंte·nā·haṃ जीविस्सामी”तिjī·vis·sā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “khettaṁ me atthi, tenāhaṁ jīvissāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have fields; I’ll live by means of them.’ …

687. 687

     “वत्थुvat·thu मेme अत्थि,at·thi तेनाहंte·nā·haṃ जीविस्सामी”तिjī·vis·sā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “vatthu me atthi, tenāhaṁ jīvissāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have land; I’ll live by means of it.’ …

688. 688

     “हिरञ्ञंhi·rañ·ñaṃ मेme अत्थि,at·thi तेनाहंte·nā·haṃ जीविस्सामी”तिjī·vis·sā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “hiraññaṁ me atthi, tenāhaṁ jīvissāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have money; I’ll live by means of it.’ …

689. 689

     “सुवण्णंsu·vaṇ·ṇaṃ मेme अत्थि,at·thi तेनाहंte·nā·haṃ जीविस्सामी”तिjī·vis·sā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “suvaṇṇaṁ me atthi, tenāhaṁ jīvissāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I have gold; I’ll live by means of it.’ …

690. 690

     “सिप्पंsip·paṃ मेme अत्थि,at·thi तेनाहंte·nā·haṃ जीविस्सामी”तिjī·vis·sā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेति।viñ·ñā·pe·ti

     “sippaṁ me atthi, tenāhaṁ jīvissāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti.

     he says and declares: ‘I have a profession; I’ll live by means of it.’

691. 691

     एवम्पि,e·vam·pi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दुब्बल्याविकम्मञ्चेवdub·bal·yā·vi·kam·mañ·ce·va होतिho·ti सिक्खाsik·khā चca अपच्चक्खाता।a·pac·cak·khā·tā

     Evampi, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca apaccakkhātā.

     In this way too, monks, there’s a revealing of weakness without the training being renounced.

692. 692

     अथa·tha वाvā पनpa·na उक्कण्ठितोuk·kaṇ·ṭhi·to अनभिरतोa·na·bhi·ra·to सामञ्ञाsā·mañ·ñā चवितुकामोca·vi·tu·kā·mo

     Atha vā pana ukkaṇṭhito anabhirato sāmaññā cavitukāmo

     Or again, dissatisfied, discontent, desiring to give up the monastic life;

693. 693

     भिक्खुभावंbhik·khu·bhā·vaṃ अट्टीयमानोaṭ·ṭī·ya·mā·no हरायमानोha·rā·ya·mā·no जिगुच्छमानोji·guc·cha·mā·no

     bhikkhubhāvaṁ aṭṭīyamāno harāyamāno jigucchamāno

     troubled, ashamed, and disgusted with the monkhood;

694. 694

     गिहिभावंgi·hi·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानोpat·tha·ya·mā·no …पे…pe

     gihibhāvaṁ patthayamāno …pe…

     longing to be a householder …

695. 695

     असक्यपुत्तियभावंa·sak·ya·put·ti·ya·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानोpat·tha·ya·mā·no

     asakyaputtiyabhāvaṁ patthayamāno

     longing to be a non-monastic,

696. 696

     “दुक्करन्”तिduk·ka·ran वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “dukkaran”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     he says and declares: ‘This is difficult to do.’ …

697. 697

     “नna सुकरन्”तिsu·ka·ran वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “na sukaran”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘This isn’t easy to do.’ …

698. 698

     “दुच्चरन्”तिduc·ca·ran वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “duccaran”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘This is difficult.’ …

699. 699

     “नna सुचरन्”तिsu·ca·ran वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “na sucaran”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘This isn’t easy.’ …

700. 700

     “नna उस्सहामी”तिus·sa·hā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “na ussahāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I can’t endure.’ …

701. 701

     “नna विसहामी”तिvi·sa·hā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “na visahāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I’m unable.’ …

702. 702

     “नna रमामी”तिra·mā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “na ramāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I don’t enjoy myself.’ …

703. 703

     “नाभिरमामी”तिnā·bhi·ra·mā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेति।viñ·ñā·pe·ti

     “nābhiramāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti.

     ‘I take no delight.’

704. 704

     एवम्पिe·vam·pi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दुब्बल्याविकम्मञ्चेवdub·bal·yā·vi·kam·mañ·ce·va होतिho·ti सिक्खाsik·khā चca अपच्चक्खाता।a·pac·cak·khā·tā

     Evampi kho, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca apaccakkhātā.

     In this way too, monks, there’s a revealing of weakness without the training being renounced.

705. 705

     कथञ्च,ka·thañ·ca भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दुब्बल्याविकम्मञ्चेवdub·bal·yā·vi·kam·mañ·ce·va होतिho·ti सिक्खाsik·khā चca पच्चक्खाता?pac·cak·khā·tā

     Kathañca, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca paccakkhātā?

     And how is there a revealing of weakness together with the training being renounced?

706. 706

     इध,i·dha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu उक्कण्ठितोuk·kaṇ·ṭhi·to अनभिरतोa·na·bhi·ra·to सामञ्ञाsā·mañ·ñā चवितुकामोca·vi·tu·kā·mo

     Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ukkaṇṭhito anabhirato sāmaññā cavitukāmo

     It may be that a monk is dissatisfied, discontent, desiring to give up the monastic life;

707. 707

     भिक्खुभावंbhik·khu·bhā·vaṃ अट्टीयमानोaṭ·ṭī·ya·mā·no हरायमानोha·rā·ya·mā·no जिगुच्छमानोji·guc·cha·mā·no

     bhikkhubhāvaṁ aṭṭīyamāno harāyamāno jigucchamāno

     troubled, ashamed, and disgusted with the monkhood;

708. 708

     गिहिभावंgi·hi·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानोpat·tha·ya·mā·no …पे…pe

     gihibhāvaṁ patthayamāno …pe…

     longing to be a householder …

709. 709

     असक्यपुत्तियभावंa·sak·ya·put·ti·ya·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानो—pat·tha·ya·mā·no

     asakyaputtiyabhāvaṁ patthayamāno—

     longing to be a non-monastic, and he says and declares:

710. 710

     “बुद्धंbud·dhaṃ पच्चक्खामी”तिpac·cak·khā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेति।viñ·ñā·pe·ti

     “buddhaṁ paccakkhāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti.

     ‘I renounce the Buddha.’

711. 711

     एवम्पि,e·vam·pi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दुब्बल्याविकम्मञ्चेवdub·bal·yā·vi·kam·mañ·ce·va होतिho·ti सिक्खाsik·khā चca पच्चक्खाता।pac·cak·khā·tā

     Evampi, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca paccakkhātā.

     In this way, monks, there’s a revealing of weakness together with the training being renounced.

712. 712

     अथa·tha वाvā पनpa·na उक्कण्ठितोuk·kaṇ·ṭhi·to अनभिरतोa·na·bhi·ra·to सामञ्ञाsā·mañ·ñā चवितुकामोca·vi·tu·kā·mo

     Atha vā pana ukkaṇṭhito anabhirato sāmaññā cavitukāmo

     Or again, dissatisfied, discontent, desiring to give up the monastic life;

713. 713

     भिक्खुभावंbhik·khu·bhā·vaṃ अट्टीयमानोaṭ·ṭī·ya·mā·no हरायमानोha·rā·ya·mā·no जिगुच्छमानोji·guc·cha·mā·no

     bhikkhubhāvaṁ aṭṭīyamāno harāyamāno jigucchamāno

     troubled, ashamed, and disgusted with the monkhood;

714. 714

     गिहिभावंgi·hi·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानोpat·tha·ya·mā·no …पे…pe

     gihibhāvaṁ patthayamāno …pe…

     longing to be a householder …

715. 715

     असक्यपुत्तियभावंa·sak·ya·put·ti·ya·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानो—pat·tha·ya·mā·no

     asakyaputtiyabhāvaṁ patthayamāno—

     longing to be a non-monastic,

716. 716

     “धम्मंdham·maṃ पच्चक्खामी”तिpac·cak·khā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “dhammaṁ paccakkhāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     he says and declares: ‘I renounce the Teaching.’ …

717. 717

     “सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ पच्चक्खामी”तिpac·cak·khā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “saṅghaṁ paccakkhāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I renounce the Sangha.’ …

718. 718

     “सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खामी”तिpac·cak·khā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “sikkhaṁ paccakkhāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I renounce the practice.’ …

719. 719

     “विनयंvi·na·yaṃ पच्चक्खामी”तिpac·cak·khā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “vinayaṁ paccakkhāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I renounce the training.’ …

720. 720

     “पातिमोक्खंpā·ti·mok·khaṃ पच्चक्खामी”तिpac·cak·khā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “pātimokkhaṁ paccakkhāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I renounce the Monastic Code.’ …

721. 721

     “उद्देसंud·de·saṃ पच्चक्खामी”तिpac·cak·khā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “uddesaṁ paccakkhāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I renounce the recitation.’ …

722. 722

     “उपज्झायंu·paj·jhā·yaṃ पच्चक्खामी”तिpac·cak·khā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “upajjhāyaṁ paccakkhāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I renounce my preceptor.’ …

723. 723

     “आचरियंā·ca·ri·yaṃ पच्चक्खामी”तिpac·cak·khā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “ācariyaṁ paccakkhāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I renounce my teacher.’ …

724. 724

     “सद्धिविहारिकंsad·dhi·vi·hā·ri·kaṃ पच्चक्खामी”तिpac·cak·khā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “saddhivihārikaṁ paccakkhāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I renounce my student.’ …

725. 725

     “अन्तेवासिकंan·te·vā·si·kaṃ पच्चक्खामी”तिpac·cak·khā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “antevāsikaṁ paccakkhāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I renounce my pupil.’ …

726. 726

     “समानुपज्झायकंsa·mā·nu·paj·jhā·ya·kaṃ पच्चक्खामी”तिpac·cak·khā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “samānupajjhāyakaṁ paccakkhāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I renounce my co-student.’ …

727. 727

     “समानाचरियकंsa·mā·nā·ca·ri·ya·kaṃ पच्चक्खामी”तिpac·cak·khā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “samānācariyakaṁ paccakkhāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I renounce my co-pupil.’ …

728. 728

     “सब्रह्मचारिंsab·rah·ma·cā·riṃ पच्चक्खामी”तिpac·cak·khā·mī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “sabrahmacāriṁ paccakkhāmī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘I renounce my fellow monastics.’ …

729. 729

     “गिहीतिgi·hī·ti मंmaṃ धारेही”तिdhā·re·hī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “gihīti maṁ dhārehī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘Consider me a householder.’ …

730. 730

     “उपासकोतिu·pā·sa·ko·ti मंmaṃ धारेही”तिdhā·re·hī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “upāsakoti maṁ dhārehī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘Consider me a lay follower.’ …

731. 731

     “आरामिकोतिā·rā·mi·ko·ti मंmaṃ धारेही”तिdhā·re·hī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “ārāmikoti maṁ dhārehī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘Consider me a monastery worker.’ …

732. 732

     “सामणेरोतिsā·ma·ṇe·ro·ti मंmaṃ धारेही”तिdhā·re·hī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “sāmaṇeroti maṁ dhārehī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘Consider me a novice monk.’ …

733. 733

     “तित्थियोतिtit·thi·yo·ti मंmaṃ धारेही”तिdhā·re·hī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “titthiyoti maṁ dhārehī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘Consider me a monastic of another religion.’ …

734. 734

     “तित्थियसावकोतिtit·thi·ya·sā·va·ko·ti मंmaṃ धारेही”तिdhā·re·hī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “titthiyasāvakoti maṁ dhārehī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘Consider me a lay follower of another religion.’ …

735. 735

     “अस्समणोतिas·sa·ma·ṇo·ti मंmaṃ धारेही”तिdhā·re·hī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “assamaṇoti maṁ dhārehī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     ‘Consider me a non-ascetic.’ …

736. 736

     “असक्यपुत्तियोतिa·sak·ya·put·ti·yo·ti मंmaṃ धारेही”तिdhā·re·hī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेति।viñ·ñā·pe·ti

     “asakyaputtiyoti maṁ dhārehī”ti vadati viññāpeti.

     ‘Consider me a non-monastic.’

737. 737

     एवम्पि,e·vam·pi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दुब्बल्याविकम्मञ्चेवdub·bal·yā·vi·kam·mañ·ce·va होतिho·ti सिक्खाsik·khā चca पच्चक्खाता।pac·cak·khā·tā

     Evampi, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca paccakkhātā.

     In this way too, monks, there’s a revealing of weakness together with the training being renounced.

738. 738

     अथa·tha वाvā पनpa·na उक्कण्ठितोuk·kaṇ·ṭhi·to अनभिरतोa·na·bhi·ra·to सामञ्ञाsā·mañ·ñā चवितुकामोca·vi·tu·kā·mo

     Atha vā pana ukkaṇṭhito anabhirato sāmaññā cavitukāmo

     Or again, dissatisfied, discontent, desiring to give up the monastic life;

739. 739

     भिक्खुभावंbhik·khu·bhā·vaṃ अट्टीयमानोaṭ·ṭī·ya·mā·no हरायमानोha·rā·ya·mā·no जिगुच्छमानोji·guc·cha·mā·no

     bhikkhubhāvaṁ aṭṭīyamāno harāyamāno jigucchamāno

     troubled, ashamed, and disgusted with the monkhood;

740. 740

     गिहिभावंgi·hi·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानोpat·tha·ya·mā·no …पे…pe

     gihibhāvaṁ patthayamāno …pe…

     longing to be a householder …

741. 741

     असक्यपुत्तियभावंa·sak·ya·put·ti·ya·bhā·vaṃ पत्थयमानो—pat·tha·ya·mā·no

     asakyaputtiyabhāvaṁ patthayamāno—

     longing to be a non-monastic,

742. 742

     “अलंa·laṃ मेme बुद्धेना”तिbud·dhe·nā वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …पे…pe

     “alaṁ me buddhenā”ti vadati viññāpeti …pe…

     he says and declares: ‘I’m done with the Buddha.’ …

743. 743

     “अलंa·laṃ मेme सब्रह्मचारीही”तिsab·rah·ma·cā·rī·hī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेति।viñ·ñā·pe·ti

     “alaṁ me sabrahmacārīhī”ti vadati viññāpeti.

     ‘I’m done with my fellow monastics.’

744. 744

     एवम्पिe·vam·pi …पे…pe

     Evampi …pe…

     In this way too, monks, there’s a revealing of weakness together with the training being renounced.

745. 745

     अथa·tha वाvā पनpa·na …पे…pe

     atha vā pana …pe…

     (Pāli only)

746. 746

     “किंkiṃ नुnu मेme बुद्धेना”तिbud·dhe·nā वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …पे…pe

     “kiṁ nu me buddhenā”ti vadati viññāpeti …pe…

     (Pāli only)

747. 747

     “किंkiṃ नुnu मेme सब्रह्मचारीही”तिsab·rah·ma·cā·rī·hī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “kiṁ nu me sabrahmacārīhī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     (Pāli only)

748. 748

     “नna ममत्थोma·mat·tho बुद्धेना”तिbud·dhe·nā वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …पे…pe

     “na mamattho buddhenā”ti vadati viññāpeti …pe…

     (Pāli only)

749. 749

     “नna ममत्थोma·mat·tho सब्रह्मचारीही”तिsab·rah·ma·cā·rī·hī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …

     “na mamattho sabrahmacārīhī”ti vadati viññāpeti …

     (Pāli only)

750. 750

     “सुमुत्ताहंsu·mut·tā·haṃ बुद्धेना”तिbud·dhe·nā वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेतिviñ·ñā·pe·ti …पे…pe

     “sumuttāhaṁ buddhenā”ti vadati viññāpeti …pe…

     Or again … he says and declares: ‘No more of the Buddha for me.’ … ‘No more of my fellow monastics for me.’ … ‘The Buddha is of no use to me.’ … ‘My fellow monastics are of no use to me.’ … ‘I’m well freed from the Buddha.’ …

751. 751

     “सुमुत्ताहंsu·mut·tā·haṃ सब्रह्मचारीही”तिsab·rah·ma·cā·rī·hī वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेति।viñ·ñā·pe·ti

     “sumuttāhaṁ sabrahmacārīhī”ti vadati viññāpeti.

     ‘I’m well freed from my fellow monastics.’

752. 752

     एवम्पि,e·vam·pi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दुब्बल्याविकम्मञ्चेवdub·bal·yā·vi·kam·mañ·ce·va होतिho·ti सिक्खाsik·khā चca पच्चक्खाता।pac·cak·khā·tā

     Evampi, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca paccakkhātā.

     In this way too, monks, there’s a revealing of weakness together with the training being renounced.

753. 753

     यानिyā·ni वाvā पनञ्ञानिपिpa·nañ·ñā·ni·pi अत्थिat·thi बुद्धवेवचनानिbud·dha·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā धम्मवेवचनानिdham·ma·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā सङ्घवेवचनानिsaṅ·gha·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā सिक्खावेवचनानिsik·khā·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā विनयवेवचनानिvi·na·ya·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā पातिमोक्खवेवचनानिpā·ti·mok·kha·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā उद्देसवेवचनानिud·de·sa·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā उपज्झायवेवचनानिu·paj·jhā·ya·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā आचरियवेवचनानिā·ca·ri·ya·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā सद्धिविहारिकवेवचनानिsad·dhi·vi·hā·ri·ka·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā अन्तेवासिकवेवचनानिan·te·vā·si·ka·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā समानुपज्झायकवेवचनानिsa·mā·nu·paj·jhā·ya·ka·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā समानाचरियकवेवचनानिsa·mā·nā·ca·ri·ya·ka·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā सब्रह्मचारिवेवचनानिsab·rah·ma·cā·ri·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā गिहिवेवचनानिgi·hi·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā उपासकवेवचनानिu·pā·sa·ka·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā आरामिकवेवचनानिā·rā·mi·ka·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā सामणेरवेवचनानिsā·ma·ṇe·ra·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā तित्थियवेवचनानिtit·thi·ya·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā तित्थियसावकवेवचनानिtit·thi·ya·sā·va·ka·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā अस्समणवेवचनानिas·sa·ma·ṇa·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वाvā असक्यपुत्तियवेवचनानिa·sak·ya·put·ti·ya·ve·va·ca·nā·ni वा,vā

     Yāni vā panaññānipi atthi buddhavevacanāni vā dhammavevacanāni vā saṅghavevacanāni vā sikkhāvevacanāni vā vinayavevacanāni vā pātimokkhavevacanāni vā uddesavevacanāni vā upajjhāyavevacanāni vā ācariyavevacanāni vā saddhivihārikavevacanāni vā antevāsikavevacanāni vā samānupajjhāyakavevacanāni vā samānācariyakavevacanāni vā sabrahmacārivevacanāni vā gihivevacanāni vā upāsakavevacanāni vā ārāmikavevacanāni vā sāmaṇeravevacanāni vā titthiyavevacanāni vā titthiyasāvakavevacanāni vā assamaṇavevacanāni vā asakyaputtiyavevacanāni vā,

     Or whatever other synonyms there are for the Buddha, for the Teaching, for the Sangha, for the practice, for the training, for the Monastic Code, for the recitation, for a preceptor, for a teacher, for a student, for a pupil, for a co-student, for a co-pupil, for a fellow monastic, for a householder, for a lay follower, for a monastery worker, for a novice monk, for a monastic of another religion, for a lay follower of another religion, for a non-ascetic, or for a non-monastic—

754. 754

     तेहिte·hi आकारेहिā·kā·re·hi तेहिte·hi लिङ्गेहिliṅ·ge·hi तेहिte·hi निमित्तेहिni·mit·te·hi वदतिva·da·ti विञ्ञापेति।viñ·ñā·pe·ti

     tehi ākārehi tehi liṅgehi tehi nimittehi vadati viññāpeti.

     he speaks and declares by way of these indications, by way of these marks, by way of these signs.

755. 755

     एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दुब्बल्याविकम्मञ्चेवdub·bal·yā·vi·kam·mañ·ce·va होतिho·ti सिक्खाsik·khā चca पच्चक्खाता।pac·cak·khā·tā

     Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca paccakkhātā.

     In this way, monks, there’s a revealing of weakness together with the training being renounced.

756. 756

     कथञ्च,ka·thañ·ca भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा?sik·khā

     Kathañca, bhikkhave, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā?

     And how is the training not renounced?

757. 757

     इध,i·dha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve येहिye·hi आकारेहिā·kā·re·hi येहिye·hi लिङ्गेहिliṅ·ge·hi येहिye·hi निमित्तेहिni·mit·te·hi सिक्खाsik·khā पच्चक्खाताpac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti तेहिte·hi आकारेहिā·kā·re·hi तेहिte·hi लिङ्गेहिliṅ·ge·hi तेहिte·hi निमित्तेहिni·mit·te·hi उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खाति,pac·cak·khā·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Idha, bhikkhave, yehi ākārehi yehi liṅgehi yehi nimittehi sikkhā paccakkhātā hoti tehi ākārehi tehi liṅgehi tehi nimittehi ummattako sikkhaṁ paccakkhāti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     If you renounce the training by way of these indications, by way of these marks, by way of these signs, but you’re insane, then the training isn’t renounced.

758. 758

     उम्मत्तकस्सum·mat·ta·kas·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खाति,pac·cak·khā·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Ummattakassa santike sikkhaṁ paccakkhāti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     If you renounce the training to one who’s insane, the training isn’t renounced.

759. 759

     खित्तचित्तोkhit·ta·cit·to सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खाति,pac·cak·khā·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Khittacitto sikkhaṁ paccakkhāti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     If you renounce the training when you’re deranged, the training isn’t renounced.

760. 760

     खित्तचित्तस्सkhit·ta·cit·tas·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खाति,pac·cak·khā·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Khittacittassa santike sikkhaṁ paccakkhāti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     If you renounce the training to one who’s deranged, the training isn’t renounced.

761. 761

     वेदनाट्टोve·da·nāṭ·ṭo सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खाति,pac·cak·khā·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Vedanāṭṭo sikkhaṁ paccakkhāti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     If you renounce the training when you’re overwhelmed by pain, the training isn’t renounced.

762. 762

     वेदनाट्टस्सve·da·nāṭ·ṭas·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खाति,pac·cak·khā·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Vedanāṭṭassa santike sikkhaṁ paccakkhāti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     If you renounce the training to one who’s overwhelmed by pain, the training isn’t renounced.

763. 763

     देवतायde·va·tā·ya सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खाति,pac·cak·khā·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Devatāya santike sikkhaṁ paccakkhāti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     If you renounce the training to a god, the training isn’t renounced.

764. 764

     तिरच्छानगतस्सti·rac·chā·na·ga·tas·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खाति,pac·cak·khā·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Tiracchānagatassa santike sikkhaṁ paccakkhāti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     If you renounce the training to an animal, the training isn’t renounced.

765. 765

     अरियकेनa·ri·ya·ke·na मिलक्खस्सmi·lak·khas·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खाति,pac·cak·khā·ti सोso चca नna पटिविजानाति,pa·ṭi·vi·jā·nā·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Ariyakena milakkhassa santike sikkhaṁ paccakkhāti, so ca na paṭivijānāti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     If an Indo-Aryan renounces the training to a non-Indo-Aryan who doesn’t understand, the training isn’t renounced.

766. 766

     मिलक्खकेनmi·lak·kha·ke·na अरियस्सa·ri·yas·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खाति,pac·cak·khā·ti सोso चca नna पटिविजानाति,pa·ṭi·vi·jā·nā·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Milakkhakena ariyassa santike sikkhaṁ paccakkhāti, so ca na paṭivijānāti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     If a non-Indo-Aryan renounces the training to an Indo-Aryan who doesn’t understand, the training isn’t renounced.

767. 767

     अरियकेनa·ri·ya·ke·na अरियस्सa·ri·yas·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खाति,pac·cak·khā·ti सोso चca नna पटिविजानाति,pa·ṭi·vi·jā·nā·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Ariyakena ariyassa santike sikkhaṁ paccakkhāti, so ca na paṭivijānāti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     If an Indo-Aryan renounces the training to an Indo-Aryan who doesn’t understand, the training isn’t renounced.

768. 768

     मिलक्खकेनmi·lak·kha·ke·na मिलक्खस्सmi·lak·khas·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खाति,pac·cak·khā·ti सोso चca नna पटिविजानाति,pa·ṭi·vi·jā·nā·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Milakkhakena milakkhassa santike sikkhaṁ paccakkhāti, so ca na paṭivijānāti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     If a non-Indo-Aryan renounces the training to a non-Indo-Aryan who doesn’t understand, the training isn’t renounced.

769. 769

     दवायda·vā·ya सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खाति,pac·cak·khā·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Davāya sikkhaṁ paccakkhāti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     If you renounce the training as a joke, the training isn’t renounced.

770. 770

     रवायra·vā·ya सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खाति,pac·cak·khā·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Ravāya sikkhaṁ paccakkhāti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     If you renounce the training because of speaking too fast, the training isn’t renounced.

771. 771

     असावेतुकामोa·sā·ve·tu·kā·mo सावेति,sā·ve·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Asāvetukāmo sāveti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     If you announce what you don’t wish to announce, the training isn’t renounced.

772. 772

     सावेतुकामोsā·ve·tu·kā·mo नna सावेति,sā·ve·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Sāvetukāmo na sāveti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     If you don’t announce what you wish to announce, the training isn’t renounced.

773. 773

     अविञ्ञुस्सa·viñ·ñus·sa सावेति,sā·ve·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Aviññussa sāveti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     If you announce to one who doesn’t understand, the training isn’t renounced.

774. 774

     विञ्ञुस्सviñ·ñus·sa नna सावेति,sā·ve·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Viññussa na sāveti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     If you don’t announce to one who understands, the training isn’t renounced.

775. 775

     सब्बसोsab·ba·so वाvā पनpa·na नna सावेति,sā·ve·ti अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Sabbaso vā pana na sāveti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     Or if you don’t make a full announcement, the training isn’t renounced.

776. 776

     एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अपच्चक्खाताa·pac·cak·khā·tā होतिho·ti सिक्खा।sik·khā

     Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā.

     In this way, monks, the training isn’t renounced.”

777. 777

     मेथुनधम्मोme·thu·na·dham·mo नामnā·ma

     Methunadhammo nāma

     Sexual intercourse:

778. 778

     योyo सोso असद्धम्मोa·sad·dham·mo गामधम्मोgā·ma·dham·mo वसलधम्मोva·sa·la·dham·mo दुट्ठुल्लंduṭ·ṭhul·laṃ ओदकन्तिकंo·da·kan·ti·kaṃ रहस्संra·has·saṃ द्वयंद्वयसमापत्ति,dva·yaṃd·va·ya·sa·mā·pat·ti एसोe·so मेथुनधम्मोme·thu·na·dham·mo नाम।nā·ma

     yo so asaddhammo gāmadhammo vasaladhammo duṭṭhullaṁ odakantikaṁ rahassaṁ dvayaṁdvayasamāpatti, eso methunadhammo nāma.

     what is contrary to the true Teaching, the common practice, the low practice, the coarse practice, that which ends with a wash, that which is done in private, that which is done wherever there are couples—this is called “sexual intercourse”.

779. 779

     पटिसेवतिpa·ṭi·se·va·ti नामnā·ma

     Paṭisevati nāma

     Has:

780. 780

     योyo निमित्तेनni·mit·te·na निमित्तंni·mit·taṃ अङ्गजातेनaṅ·ga·jā·te·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अन्तमसोan·ta·ma·so तिलफलमत्तम्पिti·la·pha·la·mat·tam·pi पवेसेति,pa·ve·se·ti एसोe·so पटिसेवतिpa·ṭi·se·va·ti नाम।nā·ma

     yo nimittena nimittaṁ aṅgajātena aṅgajātaṁ antamaso tilaphalamattampi paveseti, eso paṭisevati nāma.

     whoever makes an organ enter an organ, a genital enter a genital, even to the depth of a sesame seed—this is called “has”.

781. 781

     अन्तमसोan·ta·ma·so तिरच्छानगतायपीतिti·rac·chā·na·ga·tā·ya·pī·ti

     Antamaso tiracchānagatāyapīti

     Even with a female animal:

782. 782

     तिरच्छानगतित्थियापिti·rac·chā·na·ga·tit·thi·yā·pi मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवित्वाpa·ṭi·se·vit·vā अस्समणोas·sa·ma·ṇo होतिho·ti असक्यपुत्तियो,a·sak·ya·put·ti·yo पगेवpa·ge·va मनुस्सित्थिया।ma·nus·sit·thi·yā तेनte·na वुच्चति—vuc·ca·ti “अन्तमसोan·ta·ma·so तिरच्छानगतायपी”ति।ti·rac·chā·na·ga·tā·ya·pī

     tiracchānagatitthiyāpi methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevitvā assamaṇo hoti asakyaputtiyo, pageva manussitthiyā. Tena vuccati— “antamaso tiracchānagatāyapī”ti.

     even having had sexual intercourse with a female animal, he is not an ascetic, not a Sakyan monastic, let alone with a woman—therefore it is called “even with a female animal”.

783. 783

     पाराजिकोpā·rā·ji·ko होतीतिho·tī·ti

     Pārājiko hotīti

     He is expelled:

784. 784

     सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi नामnā·ma पुरिसोpu·ri·so सीसच्छिन्नोsī·sac·chin·no अभब्बोa·bhab·bo तेनte·na सरीरबन्धनेनsa·rī·ra·ban·dha·ne·na जीवितुं;jī·vi·tuṃ एवमेवe·va·me·va भिक्खुbhik·khu मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवित्वाpa·ṭi·se·vit·vā अस्समणोas·sa·ma·ṇo होतिho·ti असक्यपुत्तियो।a·sak·ya·put·ti·yo तेनte·na वुच्चति—vuc·ca·ti “पाराजिकोpā·rā·ji·ko होती”ति।ho·tī

     seyyathāpi nāma puriso sīsacchinno abhabbo tena sarīrabandhanena jīvituṁ; evameva bhikkhu methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevitvā assamaṇo hoti asakyaputtiyo. Tena vuccati— “pārājiko hotī”ti.

     just as a man with his head cut off is unable to continue living by reconnecting it to the body, so too is a monk who has had sexual intercourse not an ascetic, not a Sakyan monastic. Therefore it is said, “he is expelled.”

785. 785

     असंवासोतिa·saṃ·vā·so·ti

     Asaṁvāsoti

     Excluded from the community:

786. 786

     संवासोsaṃ·vā·so नामnā·ma एककम्मंe·ka·kam·maṃ एकुद्देसोe·kud·de·so समसिक्खता—sa·ma·sik·kha·tā एसोe·so संवासोsaṃ·vā·so नाम।nā·ma

     saṁvāso nāma ekakammaṁ ekuddeso samasikkhatā— eso saṁvāso nāma.

     Community: joint legal procedures, a joint recitation, the same training—this is called “community”.

787. 787

     सोso तेनte·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ नत्थि।nat·thi तेनte·na वुच्चति—“असंवासो”ति।vuc·ca·ti

     So tena saddhiṁ natthi. Tena vuccati—“asaṁvāso”ti.

     He does not take part in this—therefore it is called “excluded from the community”.

788. 788

     Permutations

789. 789

     Permutations part 1

790. 790

     Summary

791. 791

     तिस्सोtis·so इत्थियो—it·thi·yo

     Tisso itthiyo—

     There are three kinds of females:

792. 792

     मनुस्सित्थी,ma·nus·sit·thī अमनुस्सित्थी,a·ma·nus·sit·thī तिरच्छानगतित्थी।ti·rac·chā·na·ga·tit·thī

     manussitthī, amanussitthī, tiracchānagatitthī.

     a human female, a female spirit, a female animal.

793. 793

     तयोta·yo उभतोब्यञ्जनका—u·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kā

     Tayo ubhatobyañjanakā—

     There are three kinds of gynandromorphs:

794. 794

     मनुस्सुभतोब्यञ्जनको,ma·nus·su·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·ko अमनुस्सुभतोब्यञ्जनको,a·ma·nus·su·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·ko तिरच्छानगतुभतोब्यञ्जनको।ti·rac·chā·na·ga·tu·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·ko

     manussubhatobyañjanako, amanussubhatobyañjanako, tiracchānagatubhatobyañjanako.

     a human gynandromorph, a gynandromorph spirit, a gynandromorph animal.

795. 795

     तयोta·yo पण्डका—paṇ·ḍa·kā

     Tayo paṇḍakā—

     There are three kinds of <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍakas</i>:

796. 796

     मनुस्सपण्डको,ma·nus·sa·paṇ·ḍa·ko अमनुस्सपण्डको,a·ma·nus·sa·paṇ·ḍa·ko तिरच्छानगतपण्डको।ti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·paṇ·ḍa·ko

     manussapaṇḍako, amanussapaṇḍako, tiracchānagatapaṇḍako.

     a human <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i>, a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> spirit, a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> animal.

797. 797

     तयोta·yo पुरिसा—pu·ri·sā

     Tayo purisā—

     There are three kinds of males:

798. 798

     मनुस्सपुरिसो,ma·nus·sa·pu·ri·so अमनुस्सपुरिसो,a·ma·nus·sa·pu·ri·so तिरच्छानगतपुरिसो।ti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·pu·ri·so

     manussapuriso, amanussapuriso, tiracchānagatapuriso.

     a human male, a male spirit, a male animal.

799. 799

     Exposition part 1

800. 800

     मनुस्सित्थियाma·nus·sit·thi·yā तयोta·yo मग्गेmag·ge मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवन्तस्सpa·ṭi·se·van·tas·sa आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स—pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     Manussitthiyā tayo magge methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevantassa āpatti pārājikassa—

     He commits an offense entailing expulsion if he has sexual intercourse with a human female through three orifices:

801. 801

     वच्चमग्गे,vac·ca·mag·ge पस्सावमग्गे,pas·sā·va·mag·ge मुखे।mu·khe

     vaccamagge, passāvamagge, mukhe.

     the anus, the vagina, or the mouth. …

802. 802

     अमनुस्सित्थियाa·ma·nus·sit·thi·yā …पे…pe

     Amanussitthiyā …pe…

     with a female spirit …

803. 803

     तिरच्छानगतित्थियाti·rac·chā·na·ga·tit·thi·yā तयोta·yo मग्गेmag·ge मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवन्तस्सpa·ṭi·se·van·tas·sa आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स—pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     tiracchānagatitthiyā tayo magge methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevantassa āpatti pārājikassa—

     He commits an offense entailing expulsion if he has sexual intercourse with a female animal through three orifices:

804. 804

     वच्चमग्गे,vac·ca·mag·ge पस्सावमग्गे,pas·sā·va·mag·ge मुखे।mu·khe

     vaccamagge, passāvamagge, mukhe.

     the anus, the vagina, or the mouth. …

805. 805

     मनुस्सुभतोब्यञ्जनकस्सma·nus·su·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kas·sa …

     Manussubhatobyañjanakassa …

     with a human gynandromorph …

806. 806

     अमनुस्सुभतोब्यञ्जनकस्सa·ma·nus·su·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kas·sa …

     amanussubhatobyañjanakassa …

     with a gynandromorph spirit …

807. 807

     तिरच्छानगतुभतोब्यञ्जनकस्सti·rac·chā·na·ga·tu·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kas·sa तयोta·yo मग्गेmag·ge मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवन्तस्सpa·ṭi·se·van·tas·sa आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स—pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     tiracchānagatubhatobyañjanakassa tayo magge methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevantassa āpatti pārājikassa—

     He commits an offense entailing expulsion if he has sexual intercourse with a gynandromorph animal through three orifices:

808. 808

     वच्चमग्गे,vac·ca·mag·ge पस्सावमग्गे,pas·sā·va·mag·ge मुखे।mu·khe

     vaccamagge, passāvamagge, mukhe.

     the anus, the vagina, or the mouth.

809. 809

     मनुस्सपण्डकस्सma·nus·sa·paṇ·ḍa·kas·sa द्वेdve मग्गेmag·ge मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवन्तस्सpa·ṭi·se·van·tas·sa आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स—pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     Manussapaṇḍakassa dve magge methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevantassa āpatti pārājikassa—

     He commits an offense entailing expulsion if he has sexual intercourse with a human <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> through two orifices:

810. 810

     वच्चमग्गे,vac·ca·mag·ge मुखे।mu·khe

     vaccamagge, mukhe.

     the anus or the mouth. …

811. 811

     अमनुस्सपण्डकस्सa·ma·nus·sa·paṇ·ḍa·kas·sa …

     Amanussapaṇḍakassa …

     with a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> spirit …

812. 812

     तिरच्छानगतपण्डकस्सti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·paṇ·ḍa·kas·sa …

     tiracchānagatapaṇḍakassa …

     with a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> animal …

813. 813

     मनुस्सपुरिसस्सma·nus·sa·pu·ri·sas·sa …

     manussapurisassa …

     with a human male …

814. 814

     अमनुस्सपुरिसस्सa·ma·nus·sa·pu·ri·sas·sa …

     amanussapurisassa …

     with a male spirit …

815. 815

     तिरच्छानगतपुरिसस्सti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·pu·ri·sas·sa द्वेdve मग्गेmag·ge मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवन्तस्सpa·ṭi·se·van·tas·sa आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स—pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     tiracchānagatapurisassa dve magge methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevantassa āpatti pārājikassa—

     He commits an offense entailing expulsion if he has sexual intercourse with a male animal through two orifices:

816. 816

     वच्चमग्गे,vac·ca·mag·ge मुखे।mu·khe

     vaccamagge, mukhe.

     the anus or the mouth.

817. 817

     Exposition part 2

818. 818

     Voluntary sexual intercourse

819. 819

     भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सेवनचित्तंse·va·na·cit·taṃ उपट्ठितेu·paṭ·ṭhi·te मनुस्सित्थियाma·nus·sit·thi·yā वच्चमग्गंvac·ca·mag·gaṃ अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पवेसेन्तस्सpa·ve·sen·tas·sa आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     Bhikkhussa sevanacittaṁ upaṭṭhite manussitthiyā vaccamaggaṁ aṅgajātaṁ pavesentassa āpatti pārājikassa.

     If a monk has the intention of sexual relations and he makes his penis enter the anus of a human female …

820. 820

     भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सेवनचित्तंse·va·na·cit·taṃ उपट्ठितेu·paṭ·ṭhi·te मनुस्सित्थियाma·nus·sit·thi·yā पस्सावमग्गंpas·sā·va·mag·gaṃ …

     Bhikkhussa sevanacittaṁ upaṭṭhite manussitthiyā passāvamaggaṁ …

     the vagina of a human female …

821. 821

     मुखंmu·khaṃ अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पवेसेन्तस्सpa·ve·sen·tas·sa आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     mukhaṁ aṅgajātaṁ pavesentassa āpatti pārājikassa.

     the mouth of a human female, he commits an offense entailing expulsion.

822. 822

     भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सेवनचित्तंse·va·na·cit·taṃ उपट्ठितेu·paṭ·ṭhi·te अमनुस्सित्थियाa·ma·nus·sit·thi·yā …

     Bhikkhussa sevanacittaṁ upaṭṭhite amanussitthiyā …

     If a monk has the intention of sexual relations and he makes his penis enter the anus of a female spirit …

823. 823

     तिरच्छानगतित्थियाti·rac·chā·na·ga·tit·thi·yā …

     tiracchānagatitthiyā …

     the anus of a female animal …

824. 824

     मनुस्सुभतोब्यञ्जनकस्सma·nus·su·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kas·sa …

     manussubhatobyañjanakassa …

     the anus of a human gynandromorph …

825. 825

     अमनुस्सुभतोब्यञ्जनकस्सa·ma·nus·su·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kas·sa …

     amanussubhatobyañjanakassa …

     the anus of a gynandromorph spirit …

826. 826

     तिरच्छानगतुभतोब्यञ्जनकस्सti·rac·chā·na·ga·tu·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kas·sa …

     tiracchānagatubhatobyañjanakassa …

     the anus of a gynandromorph animal

827. 827

     वच्चमग्गंvac·ca·mag·gaṃ पस्सावमग्गंpas·sā·va·mag·gaṃ मुखंmu·khaṃ अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पवेसेन्तस्सpa·ve·sen·tas·sa आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     vaccamaggaṁ passāvamaggaṁ mukhaṁ aṅgajātaṁ pavesentassa āpatti pārājikassa.

     … the vagina of a gynandromorph animal … the mouth of a gynandromorph animal, he commits an offense entailing expulsion.

828. 828

     भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सेवनचित्तंse·va·na·cit·taṃ उपट्ठितेu·paṭ·ṭhi·te मनुस्सपण्डकस्सma·nus·sa·paṇ·ḍa·kas·sa वच्चमग्गंvac·ca·mag·gaṃ मुखंmu·khaṃ अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पवेसेन्तस्सpa·ve·sen·tas·sa आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     Bhikkhussa sevanacittaṁ upaṭṭhite manussapaṇḍakassa vaccamaggaṁ mukhaṁ aṅgajātaṁ pavesentassa āpatti pārājikassa.

     If a monk has the intention of sexual relations and he makes his penis enter the anus of a human <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> …

829. 829

     भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सेवनचित्तंse·va·na·cit·taṃ उपट्ठितेu·paṭ·ṭhi·te अमनुस्सपण्डकस्सa·ma·nus·sa·paṇ·ḍa·kas·sa …

     Bhikkhussa sevanacittaṁ upaṭṭhite amanussapaṇḍakassa …

     the anus of a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> spirit …

830. 830

     तिरच्छानगतपण्डकस्सti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·paṇ·ḍa·kas·sa …

     tiracchānagatapaṇḍakassa …

     the anus of a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> animal …

831. 831

     मनुस्सपुरिसस्सma·nus·sa·pu·ri·sas·sa …

     manussapurisassa …

     the anus of a human male …

832. 832

     अमनुस्सपुरिसस्सa·ma·nus·sa·pu·ri·sas·sa …

     amanussapurisassa …

     the anus of a male spirit …

833. 833

     तिरच्छानगतपुरिसस्सti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·pu·ri·sas·sa वच्चमग्गंvac·ca·mag·gaṃ मुखंmu·khaṃ अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पवेसेन्तस्सpa·ve·sen·tas·sa आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     tiracchānagatapurisassa vaccamaggaṁ mukhaṁ aṅgajātaṁ pavesentassa āpatti pārājikassa.

     the anus of a male animal … the mouth of a male animal, he commits an offense entailing expulsion.

834. 834

     Forced sexual intercourse: bringing the partner to the monk

835. 835

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā मनुस्सित्थिंma·nus·sit·thiṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā वच्चमग्गेनvac·ca·mag·ge·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति।a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthiṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti.

     Enemy monks bring a human female to a monk and make her sit down so that his penis enters her anus.

836. 836

     सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti pārājikassa.

     If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits an offense entailing expulsion.

837. 837

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā मनुस्सित्थिंma·nus·sit·thiṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā वच्चमग्गेनvac·ca·mag·ge·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति।a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthiṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti.

     Enemy monks bring a human female to a monk and make her sit down so that his penis enters her anus.

838. 838

     सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     So ce pavesanaṁ na sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti pārājikassa.

     If he does not consent to the entry, but he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits an offense entailing expulsion.

839. 839

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā मनुस्सित्थिंma·nus·sit·thiṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā वच्चमग्गेनvac·ca·mag·ge·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति।a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthiṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti.

     Enemy monks bring a human female to a monk and make her sit down so that his penis enters her anus.

840. 840

     सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     So ce pavesanaṁ na sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ na sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti pārājikassa.

     If he does not consent to the entry, nor to having entered, but he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits an offense entailing expulsion.

841. 841

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā मनुस्सित्थिंma·nus·sit·thiṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā वच्चमग्गेनvac·ca·mag·ge·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति।a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthiṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti.

     Enemy monks bring a human female to a monk and make her sit down so that his penis enters her anus.

842. 842

     सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     So ce pavesanaṁ na sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ na sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ na sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti pārājikassa.

     If he does not consent to the entry, nor to having entered, nor to the remaining, but he consents to the taking out, he commits an offense entailing expulsion.

843. 843

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā मनुस्सित्थिंma·nus·sit·thiṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā वच्चमग्गेनvac·ca·mag·ge·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति।a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthiṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti.

     Enemy monks bring a human female to a monk and make her sit down so that his penis enters her anus.

844. 844

     सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

     So ce pavesanaṁ na sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ na sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ na sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ na sādiyati, anāpatti.

     If he does not consent to the entry, nor to having entered, nor to the remaining, nor to the taking out, there is no offense.

845. 845

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā मनुस्सित्थिंma·nus·sit·thiṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā पस्सावमग्गेनpas·sā·va·mag·ge·na …

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthiṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā passāvamaggena …

     Enemy monks bring a human female to a monk and make her sit down so that his penis enters her vagina …

846. 846

     मुखेनmu·khe·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति।a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     mukhena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti.

     her mouth.

847. 847

     सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्सpā·rā·ji·kas·sa …पे…pe

     So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti pārājikassa …pe…

     If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits an offense entailing expulsion. …

848. 848

     नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

     na sādiyati, anāpatti.

     If he does not consent to the entry, nor to having entered, nor to the remaining, nor to the taking out, there is no offense.

849. 849

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā मनुस्सित्थिंma·nus·sit·thiṃ जागरन्तिंjā·ga·ran·tiṃ …

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthiṁ jāgarantiṁ …

     Enemy monks bring a human female who is awake …

850. 850

     सुत्तंsut·taṃ …

     suttaṁ …

     asleep …

851. 851

     मत्तंmat·taṃ …

     mattaṁ …

     intoxicated …

852. 852

     उम्मत्तंum·mat·taṃ …

     ummattaṁ …

     insane …

853. 853

     पमत्तंpa·mat·taṃ …

     pamattaṁ …

     heedless …

854. 854

     मतंma·taṃ अक्खायितंak·khā·yi·taṃ …

     mataṁ akkhāyitaṁ …

     dead but undecomposed …

855. 855

     मतंma·taṃ येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na अक्खायितंak·khā·yi·taṃ …पे…pe

     mataṁ yebhuyyena akkhāyitaṁ …pe…

     dead and mostly undecomposed …

856. 856

     आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     āpatti pārājikassa.

     he commits an offense entailing expulsion.

857. 857

     मतंma·taṃ येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na खायितंkhā·yi·taṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā वच्चमग्गेनvac·ca·mag·ge·na …

     Mataṁ yebhuyyena khāyitaṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena …

     They bring one who is dead and mostly decomposed to a monk and make her sit down so that his penis enters her anus …

858. 858

     पस्सावमग्गेनpas·sā·va·mag·ge·na …

     passāvamaggena …

     her vagina …

859. 859

     मुखेनmu·khe·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति।a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     mukhena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti.

     her mouth.

860. 860

     सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti थुल्लच्चयस्सthul·lac·ca·yas·sa …पे…pe

     So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti thullaccayassa …pe…

     If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits a serious offense. …

861. 861

     नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

     na sādiyati, anāpatti.

     If he does not consent … there is no offense.

862. 862

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā अमनुस्सित्थिंa·ma·nus·sit·thiṃ …

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā amanussitthiṁ …

     Enemy monks bring a female spirit …

863. 863

     तिरच्छानगतित्थिंti·rac·chā·na·ga·tit·thiṃ …

     tiracchānagatitthiṁ …

     a female animal …

864. 864

     मनुस्सुभतोब्यञ्जनकंma·nus·su·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kaṃ …

     manussubhatobyañjanakaṁ …

     a human gynandromorph …

865. 865

     अमनुस्सुभतोब्यञ्जनकंa·ma·nus·su·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kaṃ …

     amanussubhatobyañjanakaṁ …

     a gynandromorph spirit …

866. 866

     तिरच्छानगतुभतोब्यञ्जनकंti·rac·chā·na·ga·tu·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kaṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā वच्चमग्गेनvac·ca·mag·ge·na …

     tiracchānagatubhatobyañjanakaṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena …

     a gynandromorph animal to a monk and make it sit down so that his penis enters its anus …

867. 867

     पस्सावमग्गेनpas·sā·va·mag·ge·na …

     passāvamaggena …

     its vagina …

868. 868

     मुखेनmu·khe·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति।a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     mukhena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti.

     its mouth.

869. 869

     सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्सpā·rā·ji·kas·sa …पे…pe

     So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti pārājikassa …pe…

     If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits an offense entailing expulsion. …

870. 870

     नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

     na sādiyati, anāpatti.

     If he does not consent … there is no offense.

871. 871

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā तिरच्छानगतुभतोब्यञ्जनकंti·rac·chā·na·ga·tu·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kaṃ जागरन्तंjā·ga·ran·taṃ …

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā tiracchānagatubhatobyañjanakaṁ jāgarantaṁ …

     Enemy monks bring a gynandromorph animal that is awake …

872. 872

     सुत्तंsut·taṃ …

     suttaṁ …

     asleep …

873. 873

     मत्तंmat·taṃ …

     mattaṁ …

     intoxicated …

874. 874

     उम्मत्तंum·mat·taṃ …

     ummattaṁ …

     insane …

875. 875

     पमत्तंpa·mat·taṃ …

     pamattaṁ …

     heedless …

876. 876

     मतंma·taṃ अक्खायितंak·khā·yi·taṃ …

     mataṁ akkhāyitaṁ …

     dead but undecomposed …

877. 877

     मतंma·taṃ येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na अक्खायितंak·khā·yi·taṃ …पे…pe

     mataṁ yebhuyyena akkhāyitaṁ …pe…

     dead and mostly undecomposed …

878. 878

     आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     āpatti pārājikassa.

     he commits an offense entailing expulsion.

879. 879

     मतंma·taṃ येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na खायितंkhā·yi·taṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā वच्चमग्गेनvac·ca·mag·ge·na …

     Mataṁ yebhuyyena khāyitaṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena …

     They bring one that is dead and mostly decomposed to a monk and make it sit down so that his penis enters its anus …

880. 880

     पस्सावमग्गेनpas·sā·va·mag·ge·na …

     passāvamaggena …

     its vagina …

881. 881

     मुखेनmu·khe·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति।a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     mukhena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti.

     its mouth.

882. 882

     सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti थुल्लच्चयस्सthul·lac·ca·yas·sa …पे…pe

     So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti thullaccayassa …pe…

     If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits a serious offense. …

883. 883

     नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

     na sādiyati, anāpatti.

     If he does not consent … there is no offense.

884. 884

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā मनुस्सपण्डकंma·nus·sa·paṇ·ḍa·kaṃ …

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā manussapaṇḍakaṁ …

     Enemy monks bring a human <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> …

885. 885

     अमनुस्सपण्डकंa·ma·nus·sa·paṇ·ḍa·kaṃ …

     amanussapaṇḍakaṁ …

     a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> spirit …

886. 886

     तिरच्छानगतपण्डकंti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·paṇ·ḍa·kaṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā वच्चमग्गेनvac·ca·mag·ge·na …

     tiracchānagatapaṇḍakaṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena …

     a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> animal to a monk and make it sit down so that his penis enters its anus …

887. 887

     मुखेनmu·khe·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति।a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     mukhena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti.

     its mouth.

888. 888

     सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्सpā·rā·ji·kas·sa …पे…pe

     So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti pārājikassa …pe…

     If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits an offense entailing expulsion. …

889. 889

     नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

     na sādiyati, anāpatti.

     If he does not consent … there is no offense.

890. 890

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā तिरच्छानगतपण्डकंti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·paṇ·ḍa·kaṃ जागरन्तंjā·ga·ran·taṃ …

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā tiracchānagatapaṇḍakaṁ jāgarantaṁ …

     Enemy monks bring a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> animal that is awake …

891. 891

     सुत्तंsut·taṃ …

     suttaṁ …

     asleep …

892. 892

     मत्तंmat·taṃ …

     mattaṁ …

     intoxicated …

893. 893

     उम्मत्तंum·mat·taṃ …

     ummattaṁ …

     insane …

894. 894

     पमत्तंpa·mat·taṃ …

     pamattaṁ …

     heedless …

895. 895

     मतंma·taṃ अक्खायितंak·khā·yi·taṃ …

     mataṁ akkhāyitaṁ …

     dead but undecomposed …

896. 896

     मतंma·taṃ येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na अक्खायितंak·khā·yi·taṃ …पे…pe

     mataṁ yebhuyyena akkhāyitaṁ …pe…

     dead and mostly undecomposed …

897. 897

     आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     āpatti pārājikassa.

     he commits an offense entailing expulsion.

898. 898

     मतंma·taṃ येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na खायितंkhā·yi·taṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā वच्चमग्गेनvac·ca·mag·ge·na …

     Mataṁ yebhuyyena khāyitaṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena …

     They bring one that is dead and mostly decomposed to a monk and make it sit down so that his penis enters its anus …

899. 899

     मुखेनmu·khe·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति।a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     mukhena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti.

     its mouth.

900. 900

     सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti थुल्लच्चयस्सthul·lac·ca·yas·sa …पे…pe

     So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti thullaccayassa …pe…

     If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits a serious offense. …

901. 901

     नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

     na sādiyati, anāpatti.

     If he does not consent … there is no offense.

902. 902

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā मनुस्सपुरिसंma·nus·sa·pu·ri·saṃ …

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā manussapurisaṁ …

     Enemy monks bring a human male …

903. 903

     अमनुस्सपुरिसंa·ma·nus·sa·pu·ri·saṃ …

     amanussapurisaṁ …

     a male spirit …

904. 904

     तिरच्छानगतपुरिसंti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·pu·ri·saṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā वच्चमग्गेनvac·ca·mag·ge·na …

     tiracchānagatapurisaṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena …

     a male animal to a monk and make it sit down so that his penis enters its anus …

905. 905

     मुखेनmu·khe·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति।a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     mukhena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti.

     its mouth.

906. 906

     सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्सpā·rā·ji·kas·sa …पे…pe

     So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti pārājikassa …pe…

     If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits an offense entailing expulsion. …

907. 907

     नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

     na sādiyati, anāpatti.

     If he does not consent … there is no offense.

908. 908

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā तिरच्छानगतपुरिसंti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·pu·ri·saṃ जागरन्तंjā·ga·ran·taṃ …

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā tiracchānagatapurisaṁ jāgarantaṁ …

     Enemy monks bring a male animal that is awake …

909. 909

     सुत्तंsut·taṃ …

     suttaṁ …

     asleep …

910. 910

     मत्तंmat·taṃ …

     mattaṁ …

     intoxicated …

911. 911

     उम्मत्तंum·mat·taṃ …

     ummattaṁ …

     insane …

912. 912

     पमत्तंpa·mat·taṃ …

     pamattaṁ …

     heedless …

913. 913

     मतंma·taṃ अक्खायितंak·khā·yi·taṃ …

     mataṁ akkhāyitaṁ …

     dead but undecomposed …

914. 914

     मतंma·taṃ येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na अक्खायितंak·khā·yi·taṃ …पे…pe

     mataṁ yebhuyyena akkhāyitaṁ …pe…

     dead and mostly undecomposed …

915. 915

     आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     āpatti pārājikassa.

     he commits an offense entailing expulsion.

916. 916

     मतंma·taṃ येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na खायितंkhā·yi·taṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā वच्चमग्गेनvac·ca·mag·ge·na …

     Mataṁ yebhuyyena khāyitaṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena …

     They bring one that is dead and mostly decomposed to a monk and make it sit down so that his penis enters its anus …

917. 917

     मुखेनmu·khe·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति।a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     mukhena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti.

     its mouth.

918. 918

     सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti थुल्लच्चयस्सthul·lac·ca·yas·sa …पे…pe

     So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti thullaccayassa …pe…

     If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits a serious offense. …

919. 919

     नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

     na sādiyati, anāpatti.

     If he does not consent … there is no offense.

920. 920

     Forced sexual intercourse with cover: bringing the partner to the monk

921. 921

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā मनुस्सित्थिंma·nus·sit·thiṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā वच्चमग्गेनvac·ca·mag·ge·na …

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthiṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena …

     Enemy monks bring a human female to a monk and make her sit down so that his penis enters her anus …

922. 922

     पस्सावमग्गेनpas·sā·va·mag·ge·na …

     passāvamaggena …

     her vagina …

923. 923

     मुखेनmu·khe·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्तिa·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     mukhena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti

     her mouth,

924. 924

     सन्थतायsan·tha·tā·ya असन्थतस्स,a·san·tha·tas·sa

     santhatāya asanthatassa,

     the female covered and the monk uncovered;

925. 925

     असन्थतायa·san·tha·tā·ya सन्थतस्स,san·tha·tas·sa

     asanthatāya santhatassa,

     the female uncovered and the monk covered;

926. 926

     सन्थतायsan·tha·tā·ya सन्थतस्स,san·tha·tas·sa

     santhatāya santhatassa,

     the female covered and the monk covered;

927. 927

     असन्थतायa·san·tha·tā·ya असन्थतस्स।a·san·tha·tas·sa

     asanthatāya asanthatassa.

     the female uncovered and the monk uncovered.

928. 928

     सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्सpā·rā·ji·kas·sa …पे…pe

     So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti pārājikassa …pe…

     If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits an offense entailing expulsion. …

929. 929

     नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

     na sādiyati, anāpatti.

     If he does not consent … there is no offense.

930. 930

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā मनुस्सित्थिंma·nus·sit·thiṃ जागरन्तिंjā·ga·ran·tiṃ …

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthiṁ jāgarantiṁ …

     Enemy monks bring a human female who is awake …

931. 931

     सुत्तंsut·taṃ …

     suttaṁ …

     asleep …

932. 932

     मत्तंmat·taṃ …

     mattaṁ …

     intoxicated …

933. 933

     उम्मत्तंum·mat·taṃ …

     ummattaṁ …

     insane …

934. 934

     पमत्तंpa·mat·taṃ …

     pamattaṁ …

     heedless …

935. 935

     मतंma·taṃ अक्खायितंak·khā·yi·taṃ …

     mataṁ akkhāyitaṁ …

     dead but undecomposed …

936. 936

     मतंma·taṃ येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na अक्खायितंak·khā·yi·taṃ …पे…pe

     mataṁ yebhuyyena akkhāyitaṁ …pe…

     dead and mostly undecomposed …

937. 937

     आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     āpatti pārājikassa.

     he commits an offense entailing expulsion.

938. 938

     मतंma·taṃ येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na खायितंkhā·yi·taṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā वच्चमग्गेनvac·ca·mag·ge·na …

     Mataṁ yebhuyyena khāyitaṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena …

     They bring one who is dead and mostly decomposed to a monk and make her sit down so that his penis enters her anus …

939. 939

     पस्सावमग्गेनpas·sā·va·mag·ge·na …

     passāvamaggena …

     her vagina …

940. 940

     मुखेनmu·khe·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति,a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     mukhena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti,

     her mouth,

941. 941

     सन्थतायsan·tha·tā·ya असन्थतस्स,a·san·tha·tas·sa

     santhatāya asanthatassa,

     the female covered and the monk uncovered;

942. 942

     असन्थतायa·san·tha·tā·ya सन्थतस्स,san·tha·tas·sa

     asanthatāya santhatassa,

     the female uncovered and the monk covered;

943. 943

     सन्थतायsan·tha·tā·ya सन्थतस्स,san·tha·tas·sa

     santhatāya santhatassa,

     the female covered and the monk covered;

944. 944

     असन्थतायa·san·tha·tā·ya असन्थतस्स।a·san·tha·tas·sa

     asanthatāya asanthatassa.

     the female uncovered and the monk uncovered.

945. 945

     सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti थुल्लच्चयस्सthul·lac·ca·yas·sa …पे…pe

     So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti thullaccayassa …pe…

     If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits a serious offense. …

946. 946

     नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

     na sādiyati, anāpatti.

     If he does not consent … there is no offense.

947. 947

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā अमनुस्सित्थिंa·ma·nus·sit·thiṃ …

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā amanussitthiṁ …

     Enemy monks bring a female spirit …

948. 948

     तिरच्छानगतित्थिंti·rac·chā·na·ga·tit·thiṃ …

     tiracchānagatitthiṁ …

     a female animal …

949. 949

     मनुस्सुभतोब्यञ्जनकंma·nus·su·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kaṃ …

     manussubhatobyañjanakaṁ …

     a human gynandromorph …

950. 950

     अमनुस्सुभतोब्यञ्जनकंa·ma·nus·su·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kaṃ …

     amanussubhatobyañjanakaṁ …

     a gynandromorph spirit …

951. 951

     तिरच्छानगतुभतोब्यञ्जनकंti·rac·chā·na·ga·tu·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kaṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā वच्चमग्गेनvac·ca·mag·ge·na …

     tiracchānagatubhatobyañjanakaṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena …

     a gynandromorph animal to a monk and make it sit down so that his penis enters its anus …

952. 952

     पस्सावमग्गेनpas·sā·va·mag·ge·na …

     passāvamaggena …

     its vagina …

953. 953

     मुखेनmu·khe·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्तिa·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     mukhena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti

     its mouth,

954. 954

     सन्थतस्सsan·tha·tas·sa असन्थतस्स,a·san·tha·tas·sa

     santhatassa asanthatassa,

     the animal covered and the monk uncovered;

955. 955

     असन्थतस्सa·san·tha·tas·sa सन्थतस्स,san·tha·tas·sa

     asanthatassa santhatassa,

     the animal uncovered and the monk covered;

956. 956

     सन्थतस्सsan·tha·tas·sa सन्थतस्स,san·tha·tas·sa

     santhatassa santhatassa,

     the animal covered and the monk covered;

957. 957

     असन्थतस्सa·san·tha·tas·sa असन्थतस्स।a·san·tha·tas·sa

     asanthatassa asanthatassa.

     the animal uncovered and the monk uncovered.

958. 958

     सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्सpā·rā·ji·kas·sa …पे…pe

     So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti pārājikassa …pe…

     If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits an offense entailing expulsion. …

959. 959

     नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

     na sādiyati, anāpatti.

     If he does not consent … there is no offense.

960. 960

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā तिरच्छानगतुभतोब्यञ्जनकंti·rac·chā·na·ga·tu·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kaṃ जागरन्तंjā·ga·ran·taṃ …

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā tiracchānagatubhatobyañjanakaṁ jāgarantaṁ …

     Enemy monks bring a gynandromorph animal that is awake …

961. 961

     सुत्तंsut·taṃ …

     suttaṁ …

     asleep …

962. 962

     मत्तंmat·taṃ …

     mattaṁ …

     intoxicated …

963. 963

     उम्मत्तंum·mat·taṃ …

     ummattaṁ …

     insane …

964. 964

     पमत्तंpa·mat·taṃ …

     pamattaṁ …

     heedless …

965. 965

     मतंma·taṃ अक्खायितंak·khā·yi·taṃ …

     mataṁ akkhāyitaṁ …

     dead but undecomposed …

966. 966

     मतंma·taṃ येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na अक्खायितंak·khā·yi·taṃ …पे…pe

     mataṁ yebhuyyena akkhāyitaṁ …pe…

     dead and mostly undecomposed …

967. 967

     आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     āpatti pārājikassa.

     he commits an offense entailing expulsion.

968. 968

     मतंma·taṃ येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na खायितंkhā·yi·taṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā वच्चमग्गेनvac·ca·mag·ge·na …

     Mataṁ yebhuyyena khāyitaṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena …

     They bring one that is dead and mostly decomposed to a monk and make it sit down so that his penis enters its anus …

969. 969

     पस्सावमग्गेनpas·sā·va·mag·ge·na …

     passāvamaggena …

     its vagina …

970. 970

     मुखेनmu·khe·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति,a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     mukhena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti,

     its mouth,

971. 971

     सन्थतस्सsan·tha·tas·sa असन्थतस्स,a·san·tha·tas·sa

     santhatassa asanthatassa,

     the animal covered and the monk uncovered;

972. 972

     असन्थतस्सa·san·tha·tas·sa सन्थतस्स,san·tha·tas·sa

     asanthatassa santhatassa,

     the animal uncovered and the monk covered;

973. 973

     सन्थतस्सsan·tha·tas·sa सन्थतस्स,san·tha·tas·sa

     santhatassa santhatassa,

     the animal covered and the monk covered;

974. 974

     असन्थतस्सa·san·tha·tas·sa असन्थतस्स।a·san·tha·tas·sa

     asanthatassa asanthatassa.

     the animal uncovered and the monk uncovered.

975. 975

     सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti थुल्लच्चयस्सthul·lac·ca·yas·sa …पे…pe

     So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti thullaccayassa …pe…

     If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits a serious offense. …

976. 976

     नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

     na sādiyati, anāpatti.

     If he does not consent … there is no offense.

977. 977

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā मनुस्सपण्डकंma·nus·sa·paṇ·ḍa·kaṃ …

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā manussapaṇḍakaṁ …

     Enemy monks bring a human <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> …

978. 978

     अमनुस्सपण्डकंa·ma·nus·sa·paṇ·ḍa·kaṃ …

     amanussapaṇḍakaṁ …

     a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> spirit …

979. 979

     तिरच्छानगतपण्डकंti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·paṇ·ḍa·kaṃ …

     tiracchānagatapaṇḍakaṁ …

     a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> animal …

980. 980

     मनुस्सपुरिसंma·nus·sa·pu·ri·saṃ …

     manussapurisaṁ …

     a human male …

981. 981

     अमनुस्सपुरिसंa·ma·nus·sa·pu·ri·saṃ …

     amanussapurisaṁ …

     a male spirit …

982. 982

     तिरच्छानगतपुरिसंti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·pu·ri·saṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā वच्चमग्गेनvac·ca·mag·ge·na …

     tiracchānagatapurisaṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena …

     a male animal to a monk and make it sit down so that his penis enters its anus …

983. 983

     मुखेनmu·khe·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्तिa·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     mukhena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti

     its mouth,

984. 984

     सन्थतस्सsan·tha·tas·sa असन्थतस्स,a·san·tha·tas·sa

     santhatassa asanthatassa,

     the animal covered and the monk uncovered;

985. 985

     असन्थतस्सa·san·tha·tas·sa सन्थतस्स,san·tha·tas·sa

     asanthatassa santhatassa,

     the animal uncovered and the monk covered;

986. 986

     सन्थतस्सsan·tha·tas·sa सन्थतस्स,san·tha·tas·sa

     santhatassa santhatassa,

     the animal covered and the monk covered;

987. 987

     असन्थतस्सa·san·tha·tas·sa असन्थतस्स।a·san·tha·tas·sa

     asanthatassa asanthatassa.

     the animal uncovered and the monk uncovered.

988. 988

     सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्सpā·rā·ji·kas·sa …पे…pe

     So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti pārājikassa …pe…

     If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits an offense entailing expulsion. …

989. 989

     नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

     na sādiyati, anāpatti.

     If he does not consent … there is no offense.

990. 990

     भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā तिरच्छानगतपुरिसंti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·pu·ri·saṃ जागरन्तंjā·ga·ran·taṃ …

     Bhikkhupaccatthikā tiracchānagatapurisaṁ jāgarantaṁ …

     Enemy monks bring a male animal that is awake …

991. 991

     सुत्तंsut·taṃ …

     suttaṁ …

     asleep …

992. 992

     मत्तंmat·taṃ …

     mattaṁ …

     intoxicated …

993. 993

     उम्मत्तंum·mat·taṃ …

     ummattaṁ …

     insane …

994. 994

     पमत्तंpa·mat·taṃ …

     pamattaṁ …

     heedless …

995. 995

     मतंma·taṃ अक्खायितंak·khā·yi·taṃ …

     mataṁ akkhāyitaṁ …

     dead but undecomposed …

996. 996

     मतंma·taṃ येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na अक्खायितंak·khā·yi·taṃ …पे…pe

     mataṁ yebhuyyena akkhāyitaṁ …pe…

     dead and mostly undecomposed …

997. 997

     आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

     āpatti pārājikassa.

     he commits an offense entailing expulsion.

998. 998

     मतंma·taṃ येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na खायितंkhā·yi·taṃ भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā वच्चमग्गेनvac·ca·mag·ge·na …

     Mataṁ yebhuyyena khāyitaṁ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena …

     They bring one that is dead and mostly decomposed to a monk and make it sit down so that his penis enters its anus …

999. 999

     मुखेनmu·khe·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति,a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

     mukhena aṅgajātaṁ abhinisīdenti,

     its mouth,

1000. 1000

      सन्थतस्सsan·tha·tas·sa असन्थतस्स,a·san·tha·tas·sa

      santhatassa asanthatassa,

      the animal covered and the monk uncovered;

1001. 1001

      असन्थतस्सa·san·tha·tas·sa सन्थतस्स,san·tha·tas·sa

      asanthatassa santhatassa,

      the animal uncovered and the monk covered;

1002. 1002

      सन्थतस्सsan·tha·tas·sa सन्थतस्स,san·tha·tas·sa

      santhatassa santhatassa,

      the animal covered and the monk covered;

1003. 1003

      असन्थतस्सa·san·tha·tas·sa असन्थतस्स।a·san·tha·tas·sa

      asanthatassa asanthatassa.

      the animal uncovered and the monk uncovered.

1004. 1004

      सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti थुल्लच्चयस्सthul·lac·ca·yas·sa …पे…pe

      So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti thullaccayassa …pe…

      If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits a serious offense. …

1005. 1005

      नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

      na sādiyati, anāpatti.

      If he does not consent … there is no offense.

1006. 1006

      Forced sexual intercourse: bringing the monk to the partner

1007. 1007

      भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ मनुस्सित्थियाma·nus·sit·thi·yā सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā अङ्गजातेनaṅ·ga·jā·te·na वच्चमग्गंvac·ca·mag·gaṃ …

      Bhikkhupaccatthikā bhikkhuṁ manussitthiyā santike ānetvā aṅgajātena vaccamaggaṁ …

      Enemy monks bring a monk to a human female and make him sit down so that his penis enters her anus …

1008. 1008

      पस्सावमग्गंpas·sā·va·mag·gaṃ …

      passāvamaggaṁ …

      her vagina …

1009. 1009

      मुखंmu·khaṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति।a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

      mukhaṁ abhinisīdenti.

      her mouth.

1010. 1010

      सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्सpā·rā·ji·kas·sa …पे…pe

      So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti pārājikassa …pe…

      If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits an offense entailing expulsion. …

1011. 1011

      नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

      na sādiyati, anāpatti.

      If he does not consent … there is no offense.

1012. 1012

      भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ मनुस्सित्थियाma·nus·sit·thi·yā जागरन्तियाjā·ga·ran·ti·yā …

      Bhikkhupaccatthikā bhikkhuṁ manussitthiyā jāgarantiyā …

      Enemy monks bring a monk to a human female who is awake …

1013. 1013

      सुत्तायsut·tā·ya …

      suttāya …

      asleep …

1014. 1014

      मत्तायmat·tā·ya …

      mattāya …

      intoxicated …

1015. 1015

      उम्मत्तायum·mat·tā·ya …

      ummattāya …

      insane …

1016. 1016

      पमत्तायpa·mat·tā·ya …

      pamattāya …

      heedless …

1017. 1017

      मतायma·tā·ya अक्खायितायak·khā·yi·tā·ya …

      matāya akkhāyitāya …

      dead but undecomposed …

1018. 1018

      मतायma·tā·ya येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na अक्खायितायak·khā·yi·tā·ya …पे…pe

      matāya yebhuyyena akkhāyitāya …pe…

      dead and mostly undecomposed …

1019. 1019

      आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

      āpatti pārājikassa.

      he commits an offense entailing expulsion.

1020. 1020

      मतायma·tā·ya येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na खायितायkhā·yi·tā·ya सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā अङ्गजातेनaṅ·ga·jā·te·na वच्चमग्गंvac·ca·mag·gaṃ …

      Matāya yebhuyyena khāyitāya santike ānetvā aṅgajātena vaccamaggaṁ …

      They bring a monk to one who is dead and mostly decomposed and make him sit down so that his penis enters her anus …

1021. 1021

      पस्सावमग्गंpas·sā·va·mag·gaṃ …

      passāvamaggaṁ …

      her vagina …

1022. 1022

      मुखंmu·khaṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति।a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

      mukhaṁ abhinisīdenti.

      her mouth.

1023. 1023

      सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti थुल्लच्चयस्सthul·lac·ca·yas·sa …पे…pe

      So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti thullaccayassa …pe…

      If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits a serious offense. …

1024. 1024

      नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

      na sādiyati, anāpatti.

      If he does not consent … there is no offense.

1025. 1025

      भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ अमनुस्सित्थियाa·ma·nus·sit·thi·yā …

      Bhikkhupaccatthikā bhikkhuṁ amanussitthiyā …

      Enemy monks bring a monk to a female spirit …

1026. 1026

      तिरच्छानगतित्थियाti·rac·chā·na·ga·tit·thi·yā …

      tiracchānagatitthiyā …

      a female animal …

1027. 1027

      मनुस्सुभतोब्यञ्जनकस्सma·nus·su·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kas·sa …

      manussubhatobyañjanakassa …

      a human gynandromorph …

1028. 1028

      अमनुस्सुभतोब्यञ्जनकस्सa·ma·nus·su·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kas·sa …

      amanussubhatobyañjanakassa …

      a gynandromorph spirit …

1029. 1029

      तिरच्छानगतुभतोब्यञ्जनकस्सti·rac·chā·na·ga·tu·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kas·sa …

      tiracchānagatubhatobyañjanakassa …

      a gynandromorph animal …

1030. 1030

      मनुस्सपण्डकस्सma·nus·sa·paṇ·ḍa·kas·sa …

      manussapaṇḍakassa …

      a human <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> …

1031. 1031

      अमनुस्सपण्डकस्सa·ma·nus·sa·paṇ·ḍa·kas·sa …

      amanussapaṇḍakassa …

      a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> spirit …

1032. 1032

      तिरच्छानगतपण्डकस्सti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·paṇ·ḍa·kas·sa …

      tiracchānagatapaṇḍakassa …

      a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> animal …

1033. 1033

      मनुस्सपुरिसस्सma·nus·sa·pu·ri·sas·sa …

      manussapurisassa …

      a human male …

1034. 1034

      अमनुस्सपुरिसस्सa·ma·nus·sa·pu·ri·sas·sa …

      amanussapurisassa …

      a male spirit …

1035. 1035

      तिरच्छानगतपुरिसस्सti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·pu·ri·sas·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā अङ्गजातेनaṅ·ga·jā·te·na वच्चमग्गंvac·ca·mag·gaṃ …

      tiracchānagatapurisassa santike ānetvā aṅgajātena vaccamaggaṁ …

      a male animal and make him sit down so that his penis enters its anus …

1036. 1036

      मुखंmu·khaṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति।a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

      mukhaṁ abhinisīdenti.

      its mouth.

1037. 1037

      सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्सpā·rā·ji·kas·sa …पे…pe

      So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti pārājikassa …pe…

      If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits an offense entailing expulsion. …

1038. 1038

      नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

      na sādiyati, anāpatti.

      If he does not consent … there is no offense.

1039. 1039

      भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ तिरच्छानगतपुरिसस्सti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·pu·ri·sas·sa जागरन्तस्सjā·ga·ran·tas·sa …

      Bhikkhupaccatthikā bhikkhuṁ tiracchānagatapurisassa jāgarantassa …

      Enemy monks bring a monk to a male animal that is awake …

1040. 1040

      सुत्तस्सsut·tas·sa …

      suttassa …

      asleep …

1041. 1041

      मत्तस्सmat·tas·sa …

      mattassa …

      intoxicated …

1042. 1042

      उम्मत्तस्सum·mat·tas·sa …

      ummattassa …

      insane …

1043. 1043

      पमत्तस्सpa·mat·tas·sa …

      pamattassa …

      heedless …

1044. 1044

      मतस्सma·tas·sa अक्खायितस्सak·khā·yi·tas·sa …

      matassa akkhāyitassa …

      dead but undecomposed …

1045. 1045

      मतस्सma·tas·sa येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na अक्खायितस्सak·khā·yi·tas·sa …पे…pe

      matassa yebhuyyena akkhāyitassa …pe…

      dead and mostly undecomposed …

1046. 1046

      आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

      āpatti pārājikassa.

      he commits an offense entailing expulsion.

1047. 1047

      मतस्सma·tas·sa येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na खायितस्सkhā·yi·tas·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā अङ्गजातेनaṅ·ga·jā·te·na वच्चमग्गंvac·ca·mag·gaṃ …

      Matassa yebhuyyena khāyitassa santike ānetvā aṅgajātena vaccamaggaṁ …

      They bring a monk to one that is dead and mostly decomposed and make him sit down so that his penis enters its anus …

1048. 1048

      मुखंmu·khaṃ अभिनिसीदेन्ति।a·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

      mukhaṁ abhinisīdenti.

      its mouth.

1049. 1049

      सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti थुल्लच्चयस्सthul·lac·ca·yas·sa …पे…pe

      So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti thullaccayassa …pe…

      If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits a serious offense. …

1050. 1050

      नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

      na sādiyati, anāpatti.

      If he does not consent … there is no offense.

1051. 1051

      Forced sexual intercourse with cover: bringing the monk to the partner

1052. 1052

      भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ मनुस्सित्थियाma·nus·sit·thi·yā सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā अङ्गजातेनaṅ·ga·jā·te·na वच्चमग्गंvac·ca·mag·gaṃ …

      Bhikkhupaccatthikā bhikkhuṁ manussitthiyā santike ānetvā aṅgajātena vaccamaggaṁ …

      Enemy monks bring a monk to a human female and make him sit down so that his penis enters her anus …

1053. 1053

      पस्सावमग्गंpas·sā·va·mag·gaṃ …

      passāvamaggaṁ …

      her vagina …

1054. 1054

      मुखंmu·khaṃ अभिनिसीदेन्तिa·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

      mukhaṁ abhinisīdenti

      her mouth,

1055. 1055

      सन्थतस्सsan·tha·tas·sa असन्थताय,a·san·tha·tā·ya

      santhatassa asanthatāya,

      the monk covered and the female uncovered;

1056. 1056

      असन्थतस्सa·san·tha·tas·sa सन्थताय,san·tha·tā·ya

      asanthatassa santhatāya,

      the monk uncovered and the female covered;

1057. 1057

      सन्थतस्सsan·tha·tas·sa सन्थताय,san·tha·tā·ya

      santhatassa santhatāya,

      the monk covered and the female covered;

1058. 1058

      असन्थतस्सa·san·tha·tas·sa असन्थताय।a·san·tha·tā·ya

      asanthatassa asanthatāya.

      the monk uncovered and the female uncovered.

1059. 1059

      सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्सpā·rā·ji·kas·sa …पे…pe

      So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti pārājikassa …pe…

      If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits an offense entailing expulsion. …

1060. 1060

      नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

      na sādiyati, anāpatti.

      If he does not consent … there is no offense.

1061. 1061

      भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ मनुस्सित्थियाma·nus·sit·thi·yā जागरन्तियाjā·ga·ran·ti·yā …

      Bhikkhupaccatthikā bhikkhuṁ manussitthiyā jāgarantiyā …

      Enemy monks bring a monk to a human female who is awake …

1062. 1062

      सुत्तायsut·tā·ya …

      suttāya …

      asleep …

1063. 1063

      मत्तायmat·tā·ya …

      mattāya …

      intoxicated …

1064. 1064

      उम्मत्तायum·mat·tā·ya …

      ummattāya …

      insane …

1065. 1065

      पमत्तायpa·mat·tā·ya …

      pamattāya …

      heedless …

1066. 1066

      मतायma·tā·ya अक्खायितायak·khā·yi·tā·ya …

      matāya akkhāyitāya …

      dead but undecomposed …

1067. 1067

      मतायma·tā·ya येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na अक्खायितायak·khā·yi·tā·ya …पे…pe

      matāya yebhuyyena akkhāyitāya …pe…

      dead and mostly undecomposed …

1068. 1068

      आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

      āpatti pārājikassa.

      he commits an offense entailing expulsion.

1069. 1069

      मतायma·tā·ya येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na खायितायkhā·yi·tā·ya सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā अङ्गजातेनaṅ·ga·jā·te·na वच्चमग्गंvac·ca·mag·gaṃ …

      Matāya yebhuyyena khāyitāya santike ānetvā aṅgajātena vaccamaggaṁ …

      They bring a monk to a human female who is dead and mostly decomposed and make him sit down so that his penis enters her anus …

1070. 1070

      पस्सावमग्गंpas·sā·va·mag·gaṃ …

      passāvamaggaṁ …

      her vagina …

1071. 1071

      मुखंmu·khaṃ अभिनिसीदेन्तिa·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

      mukhaṁ abhinisīdenti

      her mouth,

1072. 1072

      सन्थतस्सsan·tha·tas·sa असन्थताय,a·san·tha·tā·ya

      santhatassa asanthatāya,

      the monk covered and the female uncovered;

1073. 1073

      असन्थतस्सa·san·tha·tas·sa सन्थताय,san·tha·tā·ya

      asanthatassa santhatāya,

      the monk uncovered and the female covered;

1074. 1074

      सन्थतस्सsan·tha·tas·sa सन्थताय,san·tha·tā·ya

      santhatassa santhatāya,

      the monk covered and the female covered;

1075. 1075

      असन्थतस्सa·san·tha·tas·sa असन्थताय।a·san·tha·tā·ya

      asanthatassa asanthatāya.

      the monk uncovered and the female uncovered.

1076. 1076

      सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti थुल्लच्चयस्सthul·lac·ca·yas·sa …पे…pe

      So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti thullaccayassa …pe…

      If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits a serious offense. …

1077. 1077

      नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

      na sādiyati, anāpatti.

      If he does not consent … there is no offense.

1078. 1078

      भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ अमनुस्सित्थियाa·ma·nus·sit·thi·yā …

      Bhikkhupaccatthikā bhikkhuṁ amanussitthiyā …

      Enemy monks bring a monk to a female spirit …

1079. 1079

      तिरच्छानगतित्थियाti·rac·chā·na·ga·tit·thi·yā …

      tiracchānagatitthiyā …

      a female animal …

1080. 1080

      मनुस्सुभतोब्यञ्जनकस्सma·nus·su·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kas·sa …

      manussubhatobyañjanakassa …

      a human gynandromorph …

1081. 1081

      अमनुस्सुभतोब्यञ्जनकस्सa·ma·nus·su·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kas·sa …

      amanussubhatobyañjanakassa …

      a gynandromorph spirit …

1082. 1082

      तिरच्छानगतुभतोब्यञ्जनकस्सti·rac·chā·na·ga·tu·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kas·sa …

      tiracchānagatubhatobyañjanakassa …

      a gynandromorph animal …

1083. 1083

      मनुस्सपण्डकस्सma·nus·sa·paṇ·ḍa·kas·sa …

      manussapaṇḍakassa …

      a human <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> …

1084. 1084

      अमनुस्सपण्डकस्सa·ma·nus·sa·paṇ·ḍa·kas·sa …

      amanussapaṇḍakassa …

      a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> spirit …

1085. 1085

      तिरच्छानगतपण्डकस्सti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·paṇ·ḍa·kas·sa …

      tiracchānagatapaṇḍakassa …

      a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i> animal …

1086. 1086

      मनुस्सपुरिसस्सma·nus·sa·pu·ri·sas·sa …

      manussapurisassa …

      a human male …

1087. 1087

      अमनुस्सपुरिसस्सa·ma·nus·sa·pu·ri·sas·sa …

      amanussapurisassa …

      a male spirit …

1088. 1088

      तिरच्छानगतपुरिसस्सti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·pu·ri·sas·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā अङ्गजातेनaṅ·ga·jā·te·na वच्चमग्गंvac·ca·mag·gaṃ …

      tiracchānagatapurisassa santike ānetvā aṅgajātena vaccamaggaṁ …

      a male animal and make him sit down so that his penis enters its anus …

1089. 1089

      मुखंmu·khaṃ अभिनिसीदेन्तिa·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

      mukhaṁ abhinisīdenti

      its mouth,

1090. 1090

      सन्थतस्सsan·tha·tas·sa असन्थतस्स,a·san·tha·tas·sa

      santhatassa asanthatassa,

      the monk covered and the animal uncovered;

1091. 1091

      असन्थतस्सa·san·tha·tas·sa सन्थतस्स,san·tha·tas·sa

      asanthatassa santhatassa,

      the monk uncovered and the animal covered;

1092. 1092

      सन्थतस्सsan·tha·tas·sa सन्थतस्स,san·tha·tas·sa

      santhatassa santhatassa,

      the monk covered and the animal covered;

1093. 1093

      असन्थतस्सa·san·tha·tas·sa असन्थतस्स,a·san·tha·tas·sa

      asanthatassa asanthatassa,

      the monk uncovered and the animal uncovered.

1094. 1094

      सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्सpā·rā·ji·kas·sa …पे…pe

      So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti pārājikassa …pe…

      If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits an offense entailing expulsion. …

1095. 1095

      नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

      na sādiyati, anāpatti.

      If he does not consent … there is no offense.

1096. 1096

      भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ तिरच्छानगतपुरिसस्सti·rac·chā·na·ga·ta·pu·ri·sas·sa जागरन्तस्सjā·ga·ran·tas·sa …

      Bhikkhupaccatthikā bhikkhuṁ tiracchānagatapurisassa jāgarantassa …

      Enemy monks bring a monk to a male animal that is awake …

1097. 1097

      सुत्तस्सsut·tas·sa …

      suttassa …

      asleep …

1098. 1098

      मत्तस्सmat·tas·sa …

      mattassa …

      intoxicated …

1099. 1099

      उम्मत्तस्सum·mat·tas·sa …

      ummattassa …

      insane …

1100. 1100

      पमत्तस्सpa·mat·tas·sa …

      pamattassa …

      heedless …

1101. 1101

      मतस्सma·tas·sa अक्खायितस्सak·khā·yi·tas·sa …

      matassa akkhāyitassa …

      dead but undecomposed …

1102. 1102

      मतस्सma·tas·sa येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na अक्खायितस्सak·khā·yi·tas·sa …पे…pe

      matassa yebhuyyena akkhāyitassa …pe…

      dead and mostly undecomposed …

1103. 1103

      आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

      āpatti pārājikassa.

      he commits an offense entailing expulsion.

1104. 1104

      मतस्सma·tas·sa येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na खायितस्सkhā·yi·tas·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आनेत्वाā·net·vā अङ्गजातेनaṅ·ga·jā·te·na वच्चमग्गंvac·ca·mag·gaṃ …

      Matassa yebhuyyena khāyitassa santike ānetvā aṅgajātena vaccamaggaṁ …

      They bring a monk to one that is dead and mostly decomposed and make him sit down so that his penis enters its anus …

1105. 1105

      मुखंmu·khaṃ अभिनिसीदेन्तिa·bhi·ni·sī·den·ti

      mukhaṁ abhinisīdenti

      its mouth,

1106. 1106

      सन्थतस्सsan·tha·tas·sa असन्थतस्स,a·san·tha·tas·sa

      santhatassa asanthatassa,

      the monk covered and the animal uncovered;

1107. 1107

      असन्थतस्सa·san·tha·tas·sa सन्थतस्स,san·tha·tas·sa

      asanthatassa santhatassa,

      the monk uncovered and the animal covered;

1108. 1108

      सन्थतस्सsan·tha·tas·sa सन्थतस्स,san·tha·tas·sa

      santhatassa santhatassa,

      the monk covered and the animal covered;

1109. 1109

      असन्थतस्सa·san·tha·tas·sa असन्थतस्स,a·san·tha·tas·sa

      asanthatassa asanthatassa,

      the monk uncovered and the animal uncovered.

1110. 1110

      सोso चेce पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti थुल्लच्चयस्सthul·lac·ca·yas·sa …पे…pe

      So ce pavesanaṁ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyati, ṭhitaṁ sādiyati, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyati, āpatti thullaccayassa …pe…

      If he consents to the entry, and he consents to having entered, and he consents to the remaining, and he consents to the taking out, he commits a serious offense. …

1111. 1111

      नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

      na sādiyati, anāpatti.

      If he does not consent … there is no offense.

1112. 1112

      यथाya·thā भिक्खुपच्चत्थिकाbhik·khu·pac·cat·thi·kā वित्थारिता,vit·thā·ri·tā एवंe·vaṃ वित्थारेतब्बा।vit·thā·re·tab·bā

      Yathā bhikkhupaccatthikā vitthāritā, evaṁ vitthāretabbā.

      As “enemy monks” has been explained in detail, so should the following categories be explained:

1113. 1113

      राजपच्चत्थिकाrā·ja·pac·cat·thi·kā …

      Rājapaccatthikā …

      Enemy kings …

1114. 1114

      चोरपच्चत्थिकाco·ra·pac·cat·thi·kā …

      corapaccatthikā …

      enemy bandits …

1115. 1115

      धुत्तपच्चत्थिकाdhut·ta·pac·cat·thi·kā …

      dhuttapaccatthikā …

      enemy scoundrels …

1116. 1116

      उप्पलगन्धपच्चत्थिका।up·pa·la·gan·dha·pac·cat·thi·kā

      uppalagandhapaccatthikā.

      “water-lily scent” enemies.

1117. 1117

      सङ्खित्तं।saṅ·khit·taṃ

      Saṅkhittaṁ.

      The section in brief is finished.

1118. 1118

      Permutations part 2

1119. 1119

      मग्गेनmag·ge·na मग्गंmag·gaṃ पवेसेति,pa·ve·se·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

      Maggena maggaṁ paveseti, āpatti pārājikassa.

      If he makes a private part enter a private part, there is an offense entailing expulsion.

1120. 1120

      मग्गेनmag·ge·na अमग्गंa·mag·gaṃ पवेसेति,pa·ve·se·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

      Maggena amaggaṁ paveseti, āpatti pārājikassa.

      If he makes the mouth enter a private part, there is an offense entailing expulsion.

1121. 1121

      अमग्गेनa·mag·ge·na मग्गंmag·gaṃ पवेसेति,pa·ve·se·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

      Amaggena maggaṁ paveseti, āpatti pārājikassa.

      If he makes a private part enter the mouth, there is an offense entailing expulsion.

1122. 1122

      अमग्गेनa·mag·ge·na अमग्गंa·mag·gaṃ पवेसेति,pa·ve·se·ti आपत्तिā·pat·ti थुल्लच्चयस्स।thul·lac·ca·yas·sa

      Amaggena amaggaṁ paveseti, āpatti thullaccayassa.

      If he makes the mouth enter the mouth, there is a serious offense.

1123. 1123

      भिक्खुbhik·khu सुत्तभिक्खुम्हिsut·ta·bhik·khum·hi विप्पटिपज्जति;vip·pa·ṭi·paj·ja·ti

      Bhikkhu suttabhikkhumhi vippaṭipajjati;

      A monk rapes a sleeping monk:

1124. 1124

      पटिबुद्धोpa·ṭi·bud·dho सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उभोu·bho नासेतब्बा।nā·se·tab·bā

      paṭibuddho sādiyati, ubho nāsetabbā.

      if he wakes up and consents, both should be expelled;

1125. 1125

      पटिबुद्धोpa·ṭi·bud·dho नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti दूसकोdū·sa·ko नासेतब्बो।nā·se·tab·bo

      Paṭibuddho na sādiyati, dūsako nāsetabbo.

      if he wakes up but does not consent, the rapist should be expelled.

1126. 1126

      भिक्खुbhik·khu सुत्तसामणेरम्हिsut·ta·sā·ma·ṇe·ram·hi विप्पटिपज्जति;vip·pa·ṭi·paj·ja·ti

      Bhikkhu suttasāmaṇeramhi vippaṭipajjati;

      A monk rapes a sleeping novice:

1127. 1127

      पटिबुद्धोpa·ṭi·bud·dho सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उभोu·bho नासेतब्बा।nā·se·tab·bā

      paṭibuddho sādiyati, ubho nāsetabbā.

      if he wakes up and consents, both should be expelled;

1128. 1128

      पटिबुद्धोpa·ṭi·bud·dho नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti दूसकोdū·sa·ko नासेतब्बो।nā·se·tab·bo

      Paṭibuddho na sādiyati, dūsako nāsetabbo.

      if he wakes up but does not consent, the rapist should be expelled.

1129. 1129

      सामणेरोsā·ma·ṇe·ro सुत्तभिक्खुम्हिsut·ta·bhik·khum·hi विप्पटिपज्जति;vip·pa·ṭi·paj·ja·ti

      Sāmaṇero suttabhikkhumhi vippaṭipajjati;

      A novice rapes a sleeping monk:

1130. 1130

      पटिबुद्धोpa·ṭi·bud·dho सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उभोu·bho नासेतब्बा।nā·se·tab·bā

      paṭibuddho sādiyati, ubho nāsetabbā.

      if he wakes up and consents, both should be expelled;

1131. 1131

      पटिबुद्धोpa·ṭi·bud·dho नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti दूसकोdū·sa·ko नासेतब्बो।nā·se·tab·bo

      Paṭibuddho na sādiyati, dūsako nāsetabbo.

      if he wakes up but does not consent, the rapist should be expelled.

1132. 1132

      सामणेरोsā·ma·ṇe·ro सुत्तसामणेरम्हिsut·ta·sā·ma·ṇe·ram·hi विप्पटिपज्जति;vip·pa·ṭi·paj·ja·ti

      Sāmaṇero suttasāmaṇeramhi vippaṭipajjati;

      A novice rapes a sleeping novice:

1133. 1133

      पटिबुद्धोpa·ṭi·bud·dho सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti उभोu·bho नासेतब्बा।nā·se·tab·bā

      paṭibuddho sādiyati, ubho nāsetabbā.

      if he wakes up and consents, both should be expelled;

1134. 1134

      पटिबुद्धोpa·ṭi·bud·dho नna सादियति,sā·di·ya·ti दूसकोdū·sa·ko नासेतब्बो।nā·se·tab·bo

      Paṭibuddho na sādiyati, dūsako nāsetabbo.

      if he wakes up but does not consent, the rapist should be expelled.

1135. 1135

      Non-offenses

1136. 1136

      अनापत्ति—a·nā·pat·ti

      Anāpatti—

      There is no offense:

1137. 1137

      अजानन्तस्स,a·jā·nan·tas·sa

      ajānantassa,

      if he does not know;

1138. 1138

      असादियन्तस्स,a·sā·di·yan·tas·sa

      asādiyantassa,

      if he does not consent;

1139. 1139

      उम्मत्तकस्स,um·mat·ta·kas·sa

      ummattakassa,

      if he is insane;

1140. 1140

      खित्तचित्तस्स,khit·ta·cit·tas·sa

      khittacittassa,

      if he is deranged;

1141. 1141

      वेदनाट्टस्स,ve·da·nāṭ·ṭas·sa

      vedanāṭṭassa,

      if he is overwhelmed by pain;

1142. 1142

      आदिकम्मिकस्साति।ā·di·kam·mi·kas·sā·ti

      ādikammikassāti.

      if he is the first offender.

1143. 1143

      सन्थतभाणवारोsan·tha·ta·bhā·ṇa·vā·ro निट्ठितो।niṭ·ṭhi·to

      Santhatabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.

      The section for recitation on covering is finished.

1144. 1144

      4। विनीतवत्थुउद्दानगाथाvi·nī·ta·vat·thu·ud·dā·na·gā·thā

      4. Vinītavatthuuddānagāthā

      Summary verses of case studies

1145. 1145

      मक्कटीmak·ka·ṭī वज्जिपुत्ताvaj·ji·put·tā च,ca

      Makkaṭī vajjiputtā ca,

      “The female monkey, and the Vajjians,

1146. 1146

      गिहीgi·hī नग्गोnag·go चca तित्थिया;tit·thi·yā

      gihī naggo ca titthiyā;

      Householder, and a naked one, monastics of other religions;

1147. 1147

      दारिकुप्पलवण्णाdā·ri·kup·pa·la·vaṇ·ṇā च,ca

      Dārikuppalavaṇṇā ca,

      The girl, and Uppalavaṇṇā,

1148. 1148

      ब्यञ्जनेहिपरेbyañ·ja·ne·hi·pa·re दुवे।du·ve

      byañjanehipare duve.

      Two others with characteristics.

1149. 1149

      माताmā·tā धीताdhī·tā भगिनीbha·gi·nī च,ca

      Mātā dhītā bhaginī ca,

      Mother, daughter, and sister,

1150. 1150

      जायाjā·yā चca मुदुmu·du लम्बिना;lam·bi·nā

      jāyā ca mudu lambinā;

      And wife, supple, with long;

1151. 1151

      द्वेdve वणाva·ṇā लेपचित्तञ्च,le·pa·cit·tañ·ca

      Dve vaṇā lepacittañca,

      Two on wounds, and a picture,

1152. 1152

      दारुधीतलिकायdā·ru·dhī·ta·li·kā·ya च।ca

      dārudhītalikāya ca.

      And a wooden doll.

1153. 1153

      सुन्दरेनsun·da·re·na सहsa·ha पञ्च,pañ·ca

      Sundarena saha pañca,

      Five with Sundara,

1154. 1154

      पञ्चpañ·ca सिवथिकट्ठिका;si·va·thi·kaṭ·ṭhi·kā

      pañca sivathikaṭṭhikā;

      Five about charnel grounds, bones;

1155. 1155

      नागीnā·gī यक्खीyak·khī चca पेतीpe·tī च,ca

      Nāgī yakkhī ca petī ca,

      A female dragon, and a female spirit, and a female ghost,

1156. 1156

      पण्डकोपहतोpaṇ·ḍa·ko·pa·ha·to छुपे।chu·pe

      paṇḍakopahato chupe.

      A <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i>, impaired, should touch.

1157. 1157

      भद्दियेbhad·di·ye अरहंa·ra·haṃ सुत्तो,sut·to

      Bhaddiye arahaṁ sutto,

      The sleeping Perfected One in Bhaddiya,

1158. 1158

      सावत्थियाsā·vat·thi·yā चतुरोca·tu·ro परे;pa·re

      sāvatthiyā caturo pare;

      Four others in Sāvatthī;

1159. 1159

      वेसालियाve·sā·li·yā तयोta·yo माला,mā·lā

      Vesāliyā tayo mālā,

      Three in Vesālī, garlands,

1160. 1160

      सुपिनेsu·pi·ne भारुकच्छको।bhā·ru·kac·cha·ko

      supine bhārukacchako.

      The one from Bhārukaccha in his dream.

1161. 1161

      सुपब्बाsu·pab·bā सद्धाsad·dhā भिक्खुनी,bhik·khu·nī

      Supabbā saddhā bhikkhunī,

      Supabbā, Saddhā, a nun,

1162. 1162

      सिक्खमानाsik·kha·mā·nā सामणेरीsā·ma·ṇe·rī च;ca

      Sikkhamānā sāmaṇerī ca;

      A trainee nun, and a novice nun;

1163. 1163

      वेसियाve·si·yā पण्डकोpaṇ·ḍa·ko गिही,gi·hī

      Vesiyā paṇḍako gihī,

      A sex worker, a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i>, a female householder,

1164. 1164

      अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ वुड्ढपब्बजितोvuḍ·ḍha·pab·ba·ji·to मिगोति।mi·go·ti

      Aññamaññaṁ vuḍḍhapabbajito migoti.

      Each other, gone forth in old age, a deer.”

1165. 1165

      5। विनीतवत्थुvi·nī·ta·vat·thu

      5. Vinītavatthu

      Case studies

1166. 1166

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu मक्कटियाmak·ka·ṭi·yā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवि।pa·ṭi·se·vi

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu makkaṭiyā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevi.

      At one time a monk had sexual intercourse with a female monkey.

1167. 1167

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसि—a·ho·si

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi—

      He became anxious, thinking,

1168. 1168

      “भगवताbha·ga·va·tā सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञत्तं,pañ·ñat·taṃ

      “bhagavatā sikkhāpadaṁ paññattaṁ,

      “The Buddha has laid down a training rule.

1169. 1169

      कच्चिkac·ci नुnu खोkho अहंa·haṃ पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपन्नो”ति?ā·pan·no

      kacci nu kho ahaṁ pārājikaṁ āpattiṁ āpanno”ti?

      Could it be that I’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion?”

1170. 1170

      भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसि।ā·ro·ce·si

      Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesi.

      He told the Buddha.

1171. 1171

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “Āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1172. 1172

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā वेसालिकाve·sā·li·kā वज्जिपुत्तकाvaj·ji·put·ta·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū सिक्खंsik·khaṃ अपच्चक्खायa·pac·cak·khā·ya दुब्बल्यंdub·bal·yaṃ अनाविकत्वाa·nā·vi·kat·vā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेविंसु।pa·ṭi·se·viṃ·su

      Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā vesālikā vajjiputtakā bhikkhū sikkhaṁ apaccakkhāya dubbalyaṁ anāvikatvā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭiseviṁsu.

      At one time a number of Vajjian monks from Vesālī had sexual intercourse without first renouncing the training and revealing their weakness.

1173. 1173

      तेसंte·saṃ कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसि—a·ho·si

      Tesaṁ kukkuccaṁ ahosi—

      They became anxious, thinking,

1174. 1174

      “भगवताbha·ga·va·tā सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञत्तं,pañ·ñat·taṃ

      “bhagavatā sikkhāpadaṁ paññattaṁ,

      “The Buddha has laid down a training rule.

1175. 1175

      कच्चिkac·ci नुnu खोkho मयंma·yaṃ पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपन्ना”ति?ā·pan·nā

      kacci nu kho mayaṁ pārājikaṁ āpattiṁ āpannā”ti?

      Could it be that we’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion?”

1176. 1176

      भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      They told the Buddha.

1177. 1177

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आपन्नाā·pan·nā पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “Āpattiṁ tumhe, bhikkhave, āpannā pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1178. 1178

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खु—bhik·khu

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu—

      At one time a monk had sexual intercourse while dressed like a householder, thinking he would avoid an offense.

1179. 1179

      “एवंe·vaṃ मेme अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti भविस्सती”ति—bha·vis·sa·tī

      “evaṁ me anāpatti bhavissatī”ti—

      (Pāli only)

1180. 1180

      गिहिलिङ्गेनgi·hi·liṅ·ge·na मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवि।pa·ṭi·se·vi

      gihiliṅgena methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevi.

      (Pāli only)

1181. 1181

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसि—a·ho·si

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi—

      He became anxious, thinking,

1182. 1182

      “भगवताbha·ga·va·tā सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञत्तं,pañ·ñat·taṃ

      “bhagavatā sikkhāpadaṁ paññattaṁ,

      “The Buddha has laid down a training rule.

1183. 1183

      कच्चिkac·ci नुnu खोkho अहंa·haṃ पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपन्नो”ति?ā·pan·no

      kacci nu kho ahaṁ pārājikaṁ āpattiṁ āpanno”ti?

      Could it be that I’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion?”

1184. 1184

      भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसि।ā·ro·ce·si

      Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesi.

      He told the Buddha.

1185. 1185

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “Āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1186. 1186

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खु—bhik·khu

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu—

      At one time a monk had sexual intercourse while naked, thinking he would avoid an offense.

1187. 1187

      “एवंe·vaṃ मेme अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti भविस्सती”ति—bha·vis·sa·tī

      “evaṁ me anāpatti bhavissatī”ti—

      (Pāli only)

1188. 1188

      नग्गोnag·go हुत्वाhut·vā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवि।pa·ṭi·se·vi

      naggo hutvā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevi.

      (Pāli only)

1189. 1189

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1190. 1190

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1191. 1191

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खु—bhik·khu

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu—

      At one time a monk had sexual intercourse while dressed in a grass sarong …

1192. 1192

      “एवंe·vaṃ मेme अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti भविस्सती”ति—bha·vis·sa·tī

      “evaṁ me anāpatti bhavissatī”ti—

      (Pāli only)

1193. 1193

      कुसचीरंku·sa·cī·raṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā …

      kusacīraṁ nivāsetvā …

      (Pāli only)

1194. 1194

      वाकचीरंvā·ka·cī·raṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā …

      vākacīraṁ nivāsetvā …

      while dressed in a bark sarong …

1195. 1195

      फलकचीरंpha·la·ka·cī·raṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā …

      phalakacīraṁ nivāsetvā …

      while dressed in a sarong made of bits of wood …

1196. 1196

      केसकम्बलंke·sa·kam·ba·laṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā …

      kesakambalaṁ nivāsetvā …

      while dressed in a sarong made of human hair …

1197. 1197

      वालकम्बलंvā·la·kam·ba·laṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā …

      vālakambalaṁ nivāsetvā …

      while dressed in a sarong made of horse-hair …

1198. 1198

      उलूकपक्खिकंu·lū·ka·pak·khi·kaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā …

      ulūkapakkhikaṁ nivāsetvā …

      while dressed in a sarong of owls’ wings …

1199. 1199

      अजिनक्खिपंa·ji·nak·khi·paṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवि।pa·ṭi·se·vi

      ajinakkhipaṁ nivāsetvā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevi.

      while dressed in a sarong of antelope hide, thinking he would avoid an offense.

1200. 1200

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1201. 1201

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1202. 1202

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro पिण्डचारिकोpiṇ·ḍa·cā·ri·ko भिक्खुbhik·khu पीठकेpī·ṭha·ke निपन्नंni·pan·naṃ दारिकंdā·ri·kaṃ पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā सारत्तोsā·rat·to अङ्गुट्ठंaṅ·guṭ·ṭhaṃ अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पवेसेसि।pa·ve·se·si

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro piṇḍacāriko bhikkhu pīṭhake nipannaṁ dārikaṁ passitvā sāratto aṅguṭṭhaṁ aṅgajātaṁ pavesesi.

      At one time a monk who was an alms-collector saw a little girl lying on a bench. Being lustful, he inserted his thumb into her vagina.

1203. 1203

      साsā कालमकासि।kā·la·ma·kā·si

      Sā kālamakāsi.

      She died.

1204. 1204

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1205. 1205

      “अनापत्ति,a·nā·pat·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

      “anāpatti, bhikkhu, pārājikassa.

      “There’s no offense entailing expulsion,

1206. 1206

      आपत्तिā·pat·ti सङ्घादिसेसस्सा”ति।saṅ·ghā·di·se·sas·sā

      Āpatti saṅghādisesassā”ti.

      but there’s an offense entailing suspension.”

1207. 1207

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro माणवकोmā·ṇa·va·ko उप्पलवण्णायup·pa·la·vaṇ·ṇā·ya भिक्खुनियाbhik·khu·ni·yā पटिबद्धचित्तोpa·ṭi·bad·dha·cit·to होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro māṇavako uppalavaṇṇāya bhikkhuniyā paṭibaddhacitto hoti.

      At one time a young brahmin had fallen in love with the nun Uppalavaṇṇā.

1208. 1208

      अथa·tha खोkho सोso माणवकोmā·ṇa·va·ko उप्पलवण्णायup·pa·la·vaṇ·ṇā·ya भिक्खुनियाbhik·khu·ni·yā गामंgā·maṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya पविट्ठायpa·viṭ·ṭhā·ya कुटिकंku·ṭi·kaṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā निलीनोni·lī·no अच्छि।ac·chi

      Atha kho so māṇavako uppalavaṇṇāya bhikkhuniyā gāmaṁ piṇḍāya paviṭṭhāya kuṭikaṁ pavisitvā nilīno acchi.

      When Uppalavaṇṇā had gone to the village for alms, he entered her hut and hid himself.

1209. 1209

      उप्पलवण्णाup·pa·la·vaṇ·ṇā भिक्खुनीbhik·khu·nī पच्छाभत्तंpac·chā·bhat·taṃ पिण्डपातपटिक्कन्ताpiṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·pa·ṭik·kan·tā पादेpā·de पक्खालेत्वाpak·khā·let·vā कुटिकंku·ṭi·kaṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā मञ्चकेmañ·ca·ke निसीदि।ni·sī·di

      Uppalavaṇṇā bhikkhunī pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantā pāde pakkhāletvā kuṭikaṁ pavisitvā mañcake nisīdi.

      When she had eaten her meal and returned from almsround, Uppalavaṇṇā washed her feet, entered her hut, and sat down on the bed.

1210. 1210

      अथa·tha खोkho सोso माणवकोmā·ṇa·va·ko उप्पलवण्णंup·pa·la·vaṇ·ṇaṃ भिक्खुनिंbhik·khu·niṃ उग्गहेत्वाug·ga·het·vā दूसेसि।dū·se·si

      Atha kho so māṇavako uppalavaṇṇaṁ bhikkhuniṁ uggahetvā dūsesi.

      Then that young brahmin grabbed hold of her and raped her.

1211. 1211

      उप्पलवण्णाup·pa·la·vaṇ·ṇā भिक्खुनीbhik·khu·nī भिक्खुनीनंbhik·khu·nī·naṃ एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसि।ā·ro·ce·si

      Uppalavaṇṇā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīnaṁ etamatthaṁ ārocesi.

      She told the nuns what had happened.

1212. 1212

      भिक्खुनियोbhik·khu·ni·yo भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Bhikkhuniyo bhikkhūnaṁ etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      The nuns told the monks,

1213. 1213

      भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Bhikkhū bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      who in turn told the Buddha.

1214. 1214

      “अनापत्ति,a·nā·pat·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve असादियन्तिया”ति।a·sā·di·yan·ti·yā

      “Anāpatti, bhikkhave, asādiyantiyā”ti.

      “There’s no offense for one who doesn’t consent.”

1215. 1215

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरस्सañ·ña·ta·ras·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no इत्थिलिङ्गंit·thi·liṅ·gaṃ पातुभूतंpā·tu·bhū·taṃ होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa bhikkhuno itthiliṅgaṁ pātubhūtaṁ hoti.

      At one time a monk acquired female characteristics.

1216. 1216

      भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      They told the Buddha.

1217. 1217

      “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तञ्ञेवtañ·ñe·va उपज्झंu·paj·jhaṃ तमेवta·me·va उपसम्पदंu·pa·sam·pa·daṃ तानियेवtā·ni·ye·va वस्सानिvas·sā·ni भिक्खुनीहिbhik·khu·nī·hi सङ्गमितुं।saṅ·ga·mi·tuṃ

      “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, taññeva upajjhaṁ tameva upasampadaṁ tāniyeva vassāni bhikkhunīhi saṅgamituṁ.

      “Monks, I allow that discipleship, that ordination, those years as a monk, to be transferred to the nuns.

1218. 1218

      याyā आपत्तियोā·pat·ti·yo भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ भिक्खुनीहिbhik·khu·nī·hi साधारणाsā·dhā·ra·ṇā ताtā आपत्तियोā·pat·ti·yo भिक्खुनीनंbhik·khu·nī·naṃ सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke वुट्ठातुं।vuṭ·ṭhā·tuṃ

      Yā āpattiyo bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīhi sādhāraṇā tā āpattiyo bhikkhunīnaṁ santike vuṭṭhātuṁ.

      The monks’ offenses that are in common with the nuns are to be cleared with the nuns.

1219. 1219

      याyā आपत्तियोā·pat·ti·yo भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ भिक्खुनीहिbhik·khu·nī·hi असाधारणाa·sā·dhā·ra·ṇā ताहिtā·hi आपत्तीहिā·pat·tī·hi अनापत्ती”ति।a·nā·pat·tī

      Yā āpattiyo bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīhi asādhāraṇā tāhi āpattīhi anāpattī”ti.

      For the monks’ offenses that are not in common with the nuns, there’s no offense.”

1220. 1220

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरिस्साañ·ña·ta·ris·sā भिक्खुनियाbhik·khu·ni·yā पुरिसलिङ्गंpu·ri·sa·liṅ·gaṃ पातुभूतंpā·tu·bhū·taṃ होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena aññatarissā bhikkhuniyā purisaliṅgaṁ pātubhūtaṁ hoti.

      At one time a nun acquired male characteristics.

1221. 1221

      भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      They told the Buddha.

1222. 1222

      “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तञ्ञेवtañ·ñe·va उपज्झंu·paj·jhaṃ तमेवta·me·va उपसम्पदंu·pa·sam·pa·daṃ तानियेवtā·ni·ye·va वस्सानिvas·sā·ni भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi सङ्गमितुं।saṅ·ga·mi·tuṃ

      “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, taññeva upajjhaṁ tameva upasampadaṁ tāniyeva vassāni bhikkhūhi saṅgamituṁ.

      “Monks, I allow that discipleship, that ordination, those years as a nun, to be transferred to the monks.

1223. 1223

      याyā आपत्तियोā·pat·ti·yo भिक्खुनीनंbhik·khu·nī·naṃ भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi साधारणाsā·dhā·ra·ṇā ताtā आपत्तियोā·pat·ti·yo भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke वुट्ठातुं।vuṭ·ṭhā·tuṃ

      Yā āpattiyo bhikkhunīnaṁ bhikkhūhi sādhāraṇā tā āpattiyo bhikkhūnaṁ santike vuṭṭhātuṁ.

      The nuns’ offenses that are in common with the monks are to be cleared with the monks.

1224. 1224

      याyā आपत्तियोā·pat·ti·yo भिक्खुनीनंbhik·khu·nī·naṃ भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi असाधारणाa·sā·dhā·ra·ṇā ताहिtā·hi आपत्तीहिā·pat·tī·hi अनापत्ती”ति।a·nā·pat·tī

      Yā āpattiyo bhikkhunīnaṁ bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇā tāhi āpattīhi anāpattī”ti.

      For the nuns’ offenses that are not in common with the monks, there’s no offense.”

1225. 1225

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खु—bhik·khu

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu—

      At one time a monk had sexual intercourse with his mother …

1226. 1226

      “एवंe·vaṃ मेme अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti भविस्सती”ति—bha·vis·sa·tī

      “evaṁ me anāpatti bhavissatī”ti—

      (Pāli only)

1227. 1227

      मातुयाmā·tu·yā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेविpa·ṭi·se·vi …

      mātuyā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevi …

      (Pāli only)

1228. 1228

      धीतुयाdhī·tu·yā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेविpa·ṭi·se·vi …

      dhītuyā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevi …

      had sexual intercourse with his daughter …

1229. 1229

      भगिनियाbha·gi·ni·yā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेविpa·ṭi·se·vi …

      bhaginiyā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevi …

      had sexual intercourse with his sister, thinking he would avoid an offense. …

1230. 1230

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1231. 1231

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1232. 1232

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu पुराणदुतियिकायpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kā·ya मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवि।pa·ṭi·se·vi

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu purāṇadutiyikāya methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevi.

      At one time a monk had sexual intercourse with his ex-wife.

1233. 1233

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1234. 1234

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1235. 1235

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu मुदुपिट्ठिकोmu·du·piṭ·ṭhi·ko होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu mudupiṭṭhiko hoti.

      At one time there was a monk with a supple back who was plagued by lust.

1236. 1236

      सोso अनभिरतियाa·na·bhi·ra·ti·yā पीळितोpī·ḷi·to अत्तनोat·ta·no अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ मुखेनmu·khe·na अग्गहेसि।ag·ga·he·si

      So anabhiratiyā pīḷito attano aṅgajātaṁ mukhena aggahesi.

      He inserted his penis into his own mouth.

1237. 1237

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1238. 1238

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1239. 1239

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu लम्बीlam·bī होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu lambī hoti.

      At one time there was a monk with a long penis who was plagued by lust.

1240. 1240

      सोso अनभिरतियाa·na·bhi·ra·ti·yā पीळितोpī·ḷi·to अत्तनोat·ta·no अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अत्तनोat·ta·no वच्चमग्गंvac·ca·mag·gaṃ पवेसेसि।pa·ve·se·si

      So anabhiratiyā pīḷito attano aṅgajātaṁ attano vaccamaggaṁ pavesesi.

      He inserted his penis into his own anus.

1241. 1241

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1242. 1242

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1243. 1243

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu मतसरीरंma·ta·sa·rī·raṃ पस्सि।pas·si

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu matasarīraṁ passi.

      At one time a monk saw a dead body

1244. 1244

      तस्मिञ्चtas·miñ·ca सरीरेsa·rī·re अङ्गजातसामन्ताaṅ·ga·jā·ta·sā·man·tā वणोva·ṇo होति।ho·ti

      Tasmiñca sarīre aṅgajātasāmantā vaṇo hoti.

      with a wound next to the genitals.

1245. 1245

      सो—“एवंso मेme अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti भविस्सती”ति—bha·vis·sa·tī

      So—“evaṁ me anāpatti bhavissatī”ti—

      Thinking he would avoid an offense, he

1246. 1246

      अङ्गजातेaṅ·ga·jā·te अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पवेसेत्वाpa·ve·set·vā वणेनva·ṇe·na नीहरि।nī·ha·ri

      aṅgajāte aṅgajātaṁ pavesetvā vaṇena nīhari.

      inserted his penis into the genitals and exited through the wound.

1247. 1247

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1248. 1248

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1249. 1249

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu मतसरीरंma·ta·sa·rī·raṃ पस्सि।pas·si

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu matasarīraṁ passi.

      At one time a monk saw a dead body

1250. 1250

      तस्मिञ्चtas·miñ·ca सरीरेsa·rī·re अङ्गजातसामन्ताaṅ·ga·jā·ta·sā·man·tā वणोva·ṇo होति।ho·ti

      Tasmiñca sarīre aṅgajātasāmantā vaṇo hoti.

      with a wound next to the genitals.

1251. 1251

      सो—“एवंso मेme अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti भविस्सती”ति—bha·vis·sa·tī

      So—“evaṁ me anāpatti bhavissatī”ti—

      Thinking he would avoid an offense,

1252. 1252

      वणेva·ṇe अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पवेसेत्वाpa·ve·set·vā अङ्गजातेनaṅ·ga·jā·te·na नीहरि।nī·ha·ri

      vaṇe aṅgajātaṁ pavesetvā aṅgajātena nīhari.

      he inserted his penis into the wound and exited through the genitals.

1253. 1253

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1254. 1254

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1255. 1255

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu सारत्तोsā·rat·to लेपचित्तस्सle·pa·cit·tas·sa निमित्तंni·mit·taṃ अङ्गजातेनaṅ·ga·jā·te·na छुपि।chu·pi

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu sāratto lepacittassa nimittaṁ aṅgajātena chupi.

      At one time a lustful monk touched the genitals in a picture with his penis.

1256. 1256

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1257. 1257

      “अनापत्ति,a·nā·pat·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

      “anāpatti, bhikkhu, pārājikassa.

      “There’s no offense entailing expulsion,

1258. 1258

      आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

      Āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

      but there’s an offense of wrong conduct.”

1259. 1259

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu सारत्तोsā·rat·to दारुधीतलिकायdā·ru·dhī·ta·li·kā·ya निमित्तंni·mit·taṃ अङ्गजातेनaṅ·ga·jā·te·na छुपि।chu·pi

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu sāratto dārudhītalikāya nimittaṁ aṅgajātena chupi.

      At one time a lustful monk touched the genitals of a wooden doll with his penis.

1260. 1260

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1261. 1261

      “अनापत्ति,a·nā·pat·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

      “anāpatti, bhikkhu, pārājikassa.

      “There’s no offense entailing expulsion,

1262. 1262

      आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

      Āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

      but there’s an offense of wrong conduct.”

1263. 1263

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सुन्दरोsun·da·ro नामnā·ma भिक्खुbhik·khu राजगहाrā·ja·ga·hā पब्बजितोpab·ba·ji·to रथिकायra·thi·kā·ya गच्छति।gac·cha·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena sundaro nāma bhikkhu rājagahā pabbajito rathikāya gacchati.

      At one time a monk called Sundara who had gone forth in Rājagaha was walking along a street.

1264. 1264

      अञ्ञतराañ·ña·ta·rā इत्थी—it·thī

      Aññatarā itthī—

      A woman said to him,

1265. 1265

      “मुहुत्तं,mu·hut·taṃ भन्ते,bhan·te आगमेहि,ā·ga·me·hi वन्दिस्सामी”तिvan·dis·sā·mī

      “muhuttaṁ, bhante, āgamehi, vandissāmī”ti

      “Please wait, sir, I’ll pay respect to you.”

1266. 1266

      साsā वन्दन्तीvan·dan·tī अन्तरवासकंan·ta·ra·vā·sa·kaṃ उक्खिपित्वाuk·khi·pit·vā मुखेनmu·khe·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अग्गहेसि।ag·ga·he·si

      sā vandantī antaravāsakaṁ ukkhipitvā mukhena aṅgajātaṁ aggahesi.

      As she was paying respect, she held up his sarong and inserted his penis into her mouth.

1267. 1267

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1268. 1268

      “सादियिsā·di·yi त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खू”ति?bhik·khū

      “sādiyi tvaṁ, bhikkhū”ti?

      “Monk, did you consent?”

1269. 1269

      “नाहं,nā·haṃ भगवा,bha·ga·vā सादियिन्”ति।sā·di·yin

      “Nāhaṁ, bhagavā, sādiyin”ti.

      “I didn’t consent, sir.”

1270. 1270

      “अनापत्ति,a·nā·pat·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu असादियन्तस्सा”ति।a·sā·di·yan·tas·sā

      “Anāpatti, bhikkhu, asādiyantassā”ti.

      “There’s no offense for one who doesn’t consent.”

1271. 1271

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतराañ·ña·ta·rā इत्थीit·thī भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

      Tena kho pana samayena aññatarā itthī bhikkhuṁ passitvā etadavoca—

      At one time a woman saw a monk and said,

1272. 1272

      “एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवा”ति।pa·ṭi·se·vā

      “ehi, bhante, methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevā”ti.

      “Sir, come and have sexual intercourse.”

1273. 1273

      “अलं,a·laṃ भगिनि,bha·gi·ni नेतंne·taṃ कप्पती”ति।kap·pa·tī

      “Alaṁ, bhagini, netaṁ kappatī”ti.

      “It’s not allowable.”

1274. 1274

      “एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te अहंa·haṃ वायमिस्सामि,vā·ya·mis·sā·mi त्वंtvaṃ माmā वायमि,vā·ya·mi

      “Ehi, bhante, ahaṁ vāyamissāmi, tvaṁ mā vāyami,

      “I’ll make the effort, not you.

1275. 1275

      एवंe·vaṃ तेte अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti भविस्सती”ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

      evaṁ te anāpatti bhavissatī”ti.

      In this way there won’t be any offense for you.”

1276. 1276

      सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu तथाta·thā अकासि।a·kā·si

      So bhikkhu tathā akāsi.

      The monk acted accordingly.

1277. 1277

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1278. 1278

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1279. 1279

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतराañ·ña·ta·rā इत्थीit·thī भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

      Tena kho pana samayena aññatarā itthī bhikkhuṁ passitvā etadavoca—

      At one time a woman saw a monk and said,

1280. 1280

      “एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवा”ति।pa·ṭi·se·vā

      “ehi, bhante, methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevā”ti.

      “Sir, come and have sexual intercourse.”

1281. 1281

      “अलं,a·laṃ भगिनि,bha·gi·ni नेतंne·taṃ कप्पती”ति।kap·pa·tī

      “Alaṁ, bhagini, netaṁ kappatī”ti.

      “It’s not allowable.”

1282. 1282

      “एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te त्वंtvaṃ वायम,vā·ya·ma अहंa·haṃ नna वायमिस्सामि,vā·ya·mis·sā·mi

      “Ehi, bhante, tvaṁ vāyama, ahaṁ na vāyamissāmi,

      “You make the effort, not I.

1283. 1283

      एवंe·vaṃ तेte अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti भविस्सती”ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

      evaṁ te anāpatti bhavissatī”ti.

      In this way there won’t be any offense for you.”

1284. 1284

      सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu तथाta·thā अकासि।a·kā·si

      So bhikkhu tathā akāsi.

      The monk acted accordingly.

1285. 1285

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1286. 1286

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1287. 1287

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतराañ·ña·ta·rā इत्थीit·thī भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

      Tena kho pana samayena aññatarā itthī bhikkhuṁ passitvā etadavoca—

      At one time a woman saw a monk and said,

1288. 1288

      “एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवा”ति।pa·ṭi·se·vā

      “ehi, bhante, methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevā”ti.

      “Sir, come and have sexual intercourse.”

1289. 1289

      “अलं,a·laṃ भगिनि,bha·gi·ni नेतंne·taṃ कप्पती”ति।kap·pa·tī

      “Alaṁ, bhagini, netaṁ kappatī”ti.

      “It’s not allowable.”

1290. 1290

      “एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te अब्भन्तरंab·bhan·ta·raṃ घट्टेत्वाghaṭ·ṭet·vā बहिba·hi मोचेहिmo·ce·hi …पे…pe

      “Ehi, bhante, abbhantaraṁ ghaṭṭetvā bahi mocehi …pe…

      “Rub inside but discharge outside. …

1291. 1291

      बहिba·hi घट्टेत्वाghaṭ·ṭet·vā अब्भन्तरंab·bhan·ta·raṃ मोचेहि,mo·ce·hi

      bahi ghaṭṭetvā abbhantaraṁ mocehi,

      Rub outside but discharge inside.

1292. 1292

      एवंe·vaṃ तेte अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti भविस्सती”ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

      evaṁ te anāpatti bhavissatī”ti.

      In this way there won’t be any offense for you.”

1293. 1293

      सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu तथाta·thā अकासि।a·kā·si

      So bhikkhu tathā akāsi.

      The monk acted accordingly.

1294. 1294

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1295. 1295

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1296. 1296

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu सिवथिकंsi·va·thi·kaṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā अक्खायितंak·khā·yi·taṃ सरीरंsa·rī·raṃ पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā तस्मिंtas·miṃ मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवि।pa·ṭi·se·vi

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu sivathikaṁ gantvā akkhāyitaṁ sarīraṁ passitvā tasmiṁ methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevi.

      At one time a monk went to a charnel ground where he saw an undecomposed corpse. He had sexual intercourse with it.

1297. 1297

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1298. 1298

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1299. 1299

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu सिवथिकंsi·va·thi·kaṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na अक्खायितंak·khā·yi·taṃ सरीरंsa·rī·raṃ पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā तस्मिंtas·miṃ मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवि।pa·ṭi·se·vi

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu sivathikaṁ gantvā yebhuyyena akkhāyitaṁ sarīraṁ passitvā tasmiṁ methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevi.

      At one time a monk went to a charnel ground where he saw a mostly undecomposed corpse. He had sexual intercourse with it.

1300. 1300

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1301. 1301

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1302. 1302

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu सिवथिकंsi·va·thi·kaṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā येभुय्येनye·bhuy·ye·na खायितंkhā·yi·taṃ सरीरंsa·rī·raṃ पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu sivathikaṁ gantvā yebhuyyena khāyitaṁ sarīraṁ passitvā

      At one time a monk went to a charnel ground where he saw a mostly decomposed corpse.

1303. 1303

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवि।pa·ṭi·se·vi

      tasmiṁ methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevi.

      He had sexual intercourse with it.

1304. 1304

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1305. 1305

      “अनापत्ति,a·nā·pat·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

      “anāpatti, bhikkhu, pārājikassa.

      “There’s no offense entailing expulsion,

1306. 1306

      आपत्तिā·pat·ti थुल्लच्चयस्सा”ति।thul·lac·ca·yas·sā

      Āpatti thullaccayassā”ti.

      but there’s a serious offense.”

1307. 1307

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu सिवथिकंsi·va·thi·kaṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā छिन्नसीसंchin·na·sī·saṃ पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā वट्टकतेvaṭ·ṭa·ka·te मुखेmu·khe छुपन्तंchu·pan·taṃ अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पवेसेसि।pa·ve·se·si

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu sivathikaṁ gantvā chinnasīsaṁ passitvā vaṭṭakate mukhe chupantaṁ aṅgajātaṁ pavesesi.

      At one time a monk went to a charnel ground where he saw a decapitated head. He inserted his penis into the open mouth, making contact as he entered.

1308. 1308

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1309. 1309

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1310. 1310

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu सिवथिकंsi·va·thi·kaṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā छिन्नसीसंchin·na·sī·saṃ पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā वट्टकतेvaṭ·ṭa·ka·te मुखेmu·khe अच्छुपन्तंac·chu·pan·taṃ अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पवेसेसि।pa·ve·se·si

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu sivathikaṁ gantvā chinnasīsaṁ passitvā vaṭṭakate mukhe acchupantaṁ aṅgajātaṁ pavesesi.

      At one time a monk went to a charnel ground where he saw a decapitated head. He inserted his penis into the open mouth, without making contact as he entered.

1311. 1311

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1312. 1312

      “अनापत्ति,a·nā·pat·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

      “anāpatti, bhikkhu, pārājikassa.

      “There’s no offense entailing expulsion,

1313. 1313

      आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

      Āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

      but there’s an offense of wrong conduct.”

1314. 1314

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu अञ्ञतरिस्साañ·ña·ta·ris·sā इत्थियाit·thi·yā पटिबद्धचित्तोpa·ṭi·bad·dha·cit·to होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu aññatarissā itthiyā paṭibaddhacitto hoti.

      At one time a monk was in love with a certain woman.

1315. 1315

      साsā कालङ्कताkā·laṅ·ka·tā सुसानेsu·sā·ne छड्डिता।chaḍ·ḍi·tā

      Sā kālaṅkatā susāne chaḍḍitā.

      When she died, the body was dumped on a charnel ground.

1316. 1316

      अट्ठिकानिaṭ·ṭhi·kā·ni विप्पकिण्णानिvip·pa·kiṇ·ṇā·ni होन्ति।hon·ti

      Aṭṭhikāni vippakiṇṇāni honti.

      After some time only scattered bones remained.

1317. 1317

      अथa·tha खोkho सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu सिवथिकंsi·va·thi·kaṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā अट्ठिकानिaṭ·ṭhi·kā·ni सङ्कड्ढित्वाsaṅ·kaḍ·ḍhit·vā निमित्तेni·mit·te अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ पटिपादेसि।pa·ṭi·pā·de·si

      Atha kho so bhikkhu sivathikaṁ gantvā aṭṭhikāni saṅkaḍḍhitvā nimitte aṅgajātaṁ paṭipādesi.

      The monk went to the charnel ground, collected the bones, and brought his penis into the genital area.

1318. 1318

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1319. 1319

      “अनापत्ति,a·nā·pat·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

      “anāpatti, bhikkhu, pārājikassa.

      “There’s no offense entailing expulsion,

1320. 1320

      आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

      Āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

      but there’s an offense of wrong conduct.”

1321. 1321

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu नागियाnā·gi·yā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेविpa·ṭi·se·vi …

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu nāgiyā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevi …

      At one time a monk had sexual intercourse with a female dragon …

1322. 1322

      यक्खिनियाyak·khi·ni·yā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेविpa·ṭi·se·vi …

      yakkhiniyā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevi …

      had sexual intercourse with a female spirit …

1323. 1323

      पेतियाpe·ti·yā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेविpa·ṭi·se·vi …

      petiyā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevi …

      had sexual intercourse with a female ghost …

1324. 1324

      पण्डकस्सpaṇ·ḍa·kas·sa मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवि।pa·ṭi·se·vi

      paṇḍakassa methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevi.

      had sexual intercourse with a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i>.

1325. 1325

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1326. 1326

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1327. 1327

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu उपहतिन्द्रियोu·pa·ha·tin·dri·yo होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu upahatindriyo hoti.

      At one time there was a monk with impaired faculties.

1328. 1328

      सो—“नाहंso वेदियामिve·di·yā·mi सुखंsu·khaṃ वाvā दुक्खंduk·khaṃ वा,vā अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti मेme भविस्सती”ति—bha·vis·sa·tī

      So—“nāhaṁ vediyāmi sukhaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vā, anāpatti me bhavissatī”ti—

      Thinking he would avoid an offense because he felt neither pleasure nor pain,

1329. 1329

      मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवि।pa·ṭi·se·vi …पे…pe

      methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevi. …pe…

      he had sexual intercourse. …

1330. 1330

      भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      They told the Buddha.

1331. 1331

      “वेदियिve·di·yi वाvā सो,so भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मोघपुरिसोmo·gha·pu·ri·so नna वाvā वेदियि,ve·di·yi आपत्तिā·pat·ti पाराजिकस्सा”ति।pā·rā·ji·kas·sā

      “Vediyi vā so, bhikkhave, moghapuriso na vā vediyi, āpatti pārājikassā”ti.

      “Whether or not that fool felt anything, there’s an offense entailing expulsion.”

1332. 1332

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खु—bhik·khu

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu—

      At one time a monk who intended to have sexual intercourse with a woman

1333. 1333

      “इत्थियाit·thi·yā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेविस्सामी”ति—pa·ṭi·se·vis·sā·mī

      “itthiyā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevissāmī”ti—

      (Pāli only)

1334. 1334

      छुपितमत्तेchu·pi·ta·mat·te विप्पटिसारीvip·pa·ṭi·sā·rī अहोसि।a·ho·si

      chupitamatte vippaṭisārī ahosi.

      felt remorse at the mere touch.

1335. 1335

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1336. 1336

      “अनापत्ति,a·nā·pat·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

      “anāpatti, bhikkhu, pārājikassa.

      “There’s no offense entailing expulsion,

1337. 1337

      आपत्तिā·pat·ti सङ्घादिसेसस्सा”ति।saṅ·ghā·di·se·sas·sā

      Āpatti saṅghādisesassā”ti.

      but there’s an offense entailing suspension.”

1338. 1338

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu भद्दियेbhad·di·ye जातियावनेjā·ti·yā·va·ne दिवाविहारगतोdi·vā·vi·hā·ra·ga·to निपन्नोni·pan·no होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu bhaddiye jātiyāvane divāvihāragato nipanno hoti.

      At one time a monk was lying down in the Jātiyā Grove at Bhaddiya, having gone there for the day’s meditation.

1339. 1339

      तस्सtas·sa अङ्गमङ्गानिaṅ·ga·maṅ·gā·ni वातूपत्थद्धानिvā·tū·pat·thad·dhā·ni होन्ति।hon·ti

      Tassa aṅgamaṅgāni vātūpatthaddhāni honti.

      He had an erection because of wind.

1340. 1340

      अञ्ञतराañ·ña·ta·rā इत्थीit·thī पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā अङ्गजातेaṅ·ga·jā·te अभिनिसीदित्वाa·bhi·ni·sī·dit·vā यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

      Aññatarā itthī passitvā aṅgajāte abhinisīditvā yāvadatthaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

      A certain woman saw him and sat down on his penis. Having taken her pleasure, she left.

1341. 1341

      भिक्खूbhik·khū किलिन्नंki·lin·naṃ पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Bhikkhū kilinnaṁ passitvā bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      Seeing the moisture, the monks told the Buddha.

1342. 1342

      “पञ्चहि,pañ·ca·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आकारेहिā·kā·re·hi अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ कम्मनियंkam·ma·ni·yaṃ होति—ho·ti

      “Pañcahi, bhikkhave, ākārehi aṅgajātaṁ kammaniyaṁ hoti—

      “Monks, an erection occurs for five reasons:

1343. 1343

      रागेन,rā·ge·na वच्चेन,vac·ce·na पस्सावेन,pas·sā·ve·na वातेन,vā·te·na उच्चालिङ्गपाणकदट्ठेन।uc·cā·liṅ·ga·pā·ṇa·ka·daṭ·ṭhe·na

      rāgena, vaccena, passāvena, vātena, uccāliṅgapāṇakadaṭṭhena.

      because of sensual desire, feces, urine, or wind, or because of being stung by caterpillars.

1344. 1344

      इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चहाकारेहिpañ·ca·hā·kā·re·hi अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ कम्मनियंkam·ma·ni·yaṃ होति।ho·ti

      Imehi kho, bhikkhave, pañcahākārehi aṅgajātaṁ kammaniyaṁ hoti.

      (Pāli only)

1345. 1345

      अट्ठानमेतं,aṭ·ṭhā·na·me·taṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अनवकासोa·na·va·kā·so यंyaṃ तस्सtas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no रागेनrā·ge·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ कम्मनियंkam·ma·ni·yaṃ अस्स।as·sa

      Aṭṭhānametaṁ, bhikkhave, anavakāso yaṁ tassa bhikkhuno rāgena aṅgajātaṁ kammaniyaṁ assa.

      It’s impossible that that monk had an erection because of sensual desire.

1346. 1346

      अरहंa·ra·haṃ सो,so भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खु।bhik·khu

      Arahaṁ so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu.

      That monk is a perfected one.

1347. 1347

      अनापत्ति,a·nā·pat·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तस्सtas·sa भिक्खुनो”ति।bhik·khu·no

      Anāpatti, bhikkhave, tassa bhikkhuno”ti.

      There’s no offense for that monk.”

1348. 1348

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu सावत्थियाsā·vat·thi·yā अन्धवनेan·dha·va·ne दिवाविहारगतोdi·vā·vi·hā·ra·ga·to निपन्नोni·pan·no होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu sāvatthiyā andhavane divāvihāragato nipanno hoti.

      At one time a monk was lying down in the Dark Wood at Sāvatthī, having gone there for the day’s meditation.

1349. 1349

      अञ्ञतराañ·ña·ta·rā गोपालिकाgo·pā·li·kā पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā अङ्गजातेaṅ·ga·jā·te अभिनिसीदि।a·bhi·ni·sī·di

      Aññatarā gopālikā passitvā aṅgajāte abhinisīdi.

      A woman cowherd saw him and sat down on his penis.

1350. 1350

      सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियि,sā·di·yi पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियि,sā·di·yi ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियि,sā·di·yi उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियि।sā·di·yi

      So bhikkhu pavesanaṁ sādiyi, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyi, ṭhitaṁ sādiyi, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyi.

      The monk consented to the entry, to having entered, to the remaining, and to the taking out.

1351. 1351

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1352. 1352

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1353. 1353

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu सावत्थियाsā·vat·thi·yā अन्धवनेan·dha·va·ne दिवाविहारगतोdi·vā·vi·hā·ra·ga·to निपन्नोni·pan·no होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu sāvatthiyā andhavane divāvihāragato nipanno hoti.

      At one time a monk was lying down in the Dark Wood at Sāvatthī, having gone there for the day’s meditation.

1354. 1354

      अञ्ञतराañ·ña·ta·rā अजपालिकाa·ja·pā·li·kā पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā …

      Aññatarā ajapālikā passitvā …

      A woman goatherd saw him …

1355. 1355

      अञ्ञतराañ·ña·ta·rā कट्ठहारिकाkaṭ·ṭha·hā·ri·kā पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā …

      aññatarā kaṭṭhahārikā passitvā …

      A woman gathering firewood saw him …

1356. 1356

      अञ्ञतराañ·ña·ta·rā गोमयहारिकाgo·ma·ya·hā·ri·kā पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā अङ्गजातेaṅ·ga·jā·te अभिनिसीदि।a·bhi·ni·sī·di

      aññatarā gomayahārikā passitvā aṅgajāte abhinisīdi.

      A woman gathering cow-dung saw him and sat down on his penis.

1357. 1357

      सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu पवेसनंpa·ve·sa·naṃ सादियि,sā·di·yi पविट्ठंpa·viṭ·ṭhaṃ सादियि,sā·di·yi ठितंṭhi·taṃ सादियि,sā·di·yi उद्धरणंud·dha·ra·ṇaṃ सादियि।sā·di·yi

      So bhikkhu pavesanaṁ sādiyi, paviṭṭhaṁ sādiyi, ṭhitaṁ sādiyi, uddharaṇaṁ sādiyi.

      The monk consented to the entry, to having entered, to the remaining, and to the taking out.

1358. 1358

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1359. 1359

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1360. 1360

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ महावनेma·hā·va·ne दिवाविहारगतोdi·vā·vi·hā·ra·ga·to निपन्नोni·pan·no होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu vesāliyaṁ mahāvane divāvihāragato nipanno hoti.

      At one time a monk was lying down in the Great Wood at Vesālī, having gone there for the day’s meditation.

1361. 1361

      अञ्ञतराañ·ña·ta·rā इत्थीit·thī पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā अङ्गजातेaṅ·ga·jā·te अभिनिसीदित्वाa·bhi·ni·sī·dit·vā यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā सामन्ताsā·man·tā हसमानाha·sa·mā·nā ठिताṭhi·tā होति।ho·ti

      Aññatarā itthī passitvā aṅgajāte abhinisīditvā yāvadatthaṁ katvā sāmantā hasamānā ṭhitā hoti.

      A woman saw him and sat down on his penis. Having taken her pleasure, she stood laughing nearby.

1362. 1362

      सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu पटिबुज्झित्वाpa·ṭi·buj·jhit·vā तंtaṃ इत्थिंit·thiṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

      So bhikkhu paṭibujjhitvā taṁ itthiṁ etadavoca—

      The monk woke up and said,

1363. 1363

      “तुय्हिदंtuy·hi·daṃ कम्मन्”ति?kam·man

      “tuyhidaṁ kamman”ti?

      “Did you do this?”

1364. 1364

      “आम,ā·ma मय्हंmay·haṃ कम्मन्”ति।kam·man

      “Āma, mayhaṁ kamman”ti.

      “Yes.”

1365. 1365

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1366. 1366

      “सादियिsā·di·yi त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खू”ति?bhik·khū

      “sādiyi tvaṁ, bhikkhū”ti?

      “Did you consent?”

1367. 1367

      “नाहं,nā·haṃ भगवा,bha·ga·vā जानामी”ति।jā·nā·mī

      “Nāhaṁ, bhagavā, jānāmī”ti.

      “I didn’t even know, sir.”

1368. 1368

      “ अनापत्ति,a·nā·pat·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu अजानन्तस्सा”ति।a·jā·nan·tas·sā

      “ Anāpatti, bhikkhu, ajānantassā”ti.

      “There’s no offense for one who doesn’t know.”

1369. 1369

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ महावनेma·hā·va·ne दिवाविहारगतोdi·vā·vi·hā·ra·ga·to रुक्खंruk·khaṃ अपस्सायa·pas·sā·ya निपन्नोni·pan·no होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu vesāliyaṁ mahāvane divāvihāragato rukkhaṁ apassāya nipanno hoti.

      At one time a monk went to the Great Wood at Vesālī for the day’s meditation. He lay down, resting his head against a tree.

1370. 1370

      अञ्ञतराañ·ña·ta·rā इत्थीit·thī पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā अङ्गजातेaṅ·ga·jā·te अभिनिसीदि।a·bhi·ni·sī·di

      Aññatarā itthī passitvā aṅgajāte abhinisīdi.

      A woman saw him and sat down on his penis.

1371. 1371

      सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu सहसाsa·ha·sā वुट्ठासि।vuṭ·ṭhā·si

      So bhikkhu sahasā vuṭṭhāsi.

      The monk got up quickly.

1372. 1372

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1373. 1373

      “सादियिsā·di·yi त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खू”ति?bhik·khū

      “sādiyi tvaṁ, bhikkhū”ti?

      “Did you consent?”

1374. 1374

      “नाहं,nā·haṃ भगवा,bha·ga·vā सादियिन्”ति।sā·di·yin

      “Nāhaṁ, bhagavā, sādiyin”ti.

      “I didn’t consent, sir.”

1375. 1375

      “अनापत्ति,a·nā·pat·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu असादियन्तस्सा”ति।a·sā·di·yan·tas·sā

      “Anāpatti, bhikkhu, asādiyantassā”ti.

      “There’s no offense for one who doesn’t consent.”

1376. 1376

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ महावनेma·hā·va·ne दिवाविहारगतोdi·vā·vi·hā·ra·ga·to रुक्खंruk·khaṃ अपस्सायa·pas·sā·ya निपन्नोni·pan·no होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu vesāliyaṁ mahāvane divāvihāragato rukkhaṁ apassāya nipanno hoti.

      At one time a monk went to the Great Wood at Vesālī for the day’s meditation. He lay down, resting his head against a tree.

1377. 1377

      अञ्ञतराañ·ña·ta·rā इत्थीit·thī पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā अङ्गजातेaṅ·ga·jā·te अभिनिसीदि।a·bhi·ni·sī·di

      Aññatarā itthī passitvā aṅgajāte abhinisīdi.

      A woman saw him and sat down on his penis.

1378. 1378

      सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu अक्कमित्वाak·ka·mit·vā पवत्तेसि।pa·vat·te·si

      So bhikkhu akkamitvā pavattesi.

      The monk kicked her off.

1379. 1379

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1380. 1380

      “सादियिsā·di·yi त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खू”ति?bhik·khū

      “sādiyi tvaṁ, bhikkhū”ti?

      “Did you consent?”

1381. 1381

      “नाहं,nā·haṃ भगवा,bha·ga·vā सादियिन्”ति।sā·di·yin

      “Nāhaṁ, bhagavā, sādiyin”ti.

      “I didn’t consent, sir.”

1382. 1382

      “अनापत्ति,a·nā·pat·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu असादियन्तस्सा”ति।a·sā·di·yan·tas·sā

      “Anāpatti, bhikkhu, asādiyantassā”ti.

      “There’s no offense for one who doesn’t consent.”

1383. 1383

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ महावनेma·hā·va·ne कूटागारसालायंkū·ṭā·gā·ra·sā·lā·yaṃ दिवाविहारगतोdi·vā·vi·hā·ra·ga·to द्वारंdvā·raṃ विवरित्वाvi·va·rit·vā निपन्नोni·pan·no होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu vesāliyaṁ mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyaṁ divāvihāragato dvāraṁ vivaritvā nipanno hoti.

      At one time a monk went to the house with the peaked roof in the Great Wood near Vesālī for the day’s meditation. He opened the door, lay down,

1384. 1384

      तस्सtas·sa अङ्गमङ्गानिaṅ·ga·maṅ·gā·ni वातूपत्थद्धानिvā·tū·pat·thad·dhā·ni होन्ति।hon·ti

      Tassa aṅgamaṅgāni vātūpatthaddhāni honti.

      and had an erection because of wind.

1385. 1385

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā इत्थियोit·thi·yo गन्धञ्चgan·dhañ·ca मालञ्चmā·lañ·ca आदायā·dā·ya आरामंā·rā·maṃ आगमंसुā·ga·maṃ·su विहारपेक्खिकायो।vi·hā·ra·pek·khi·kā·yo

      Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā itthiyo gandhañca mālañca ādāya ārāmaṁ āgamaṁsu vihārapekkhikāyo.

      Just then a number of women came to the monastery to look at the dwellings, bringing scents and garlands.

1386. 1386

      अथa·tha खोkho ताtā इत्थियोit·thi·yo तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā अङ्गजातेaṅ·ga·jā·te अभिनिसीदित्वाa·bhi·ni·sī·dit·vā यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ कत्वा,kat·vā पुरिसूसभोpu·ri·sū·sa·bho वतायन्तिva·tā·yan·ti वत्वाvat·vā गन्धञ्चgan·dhañ·ca मालञ्चmā·lañ·ca आरोपेत्वाā·ro·pet·vā पक्कमिंसु।pak·ka·miṃ·su

      Atha kho tā itthiyo taṁ bhikkhuṁ passitvā aṅgajāte abhinisīditvā yāvadatthaṁ katvā, purisūsabho vatāyanti vatvā gandhañca mālañca āropetvā pakkamiṁsu.

      They saw that monk and sat down on his penis. Having taken their pleasure, they said, “What a bull of a man.” They then put up their scents and garlands and left.

1387. 1387

      भिक्खूbhik·khū किलिन्नंki·lin·naṃ पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Bhikkhū kilinnaṁ passitvā bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      The monks saw the moisture and told the Buddha.

1388. 1388

      “पञ्चहि,pañ·ca·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आकारेहिā·kā·re·hi अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ कम्मनियंkam·ma·ni·yaṃ होति—ho·ti

      “Pañcahi, bhikkhave, ākārehi aṅgajātaṁ kammaniyaṁ hoti—

      “Monks, an erection occurs for five reasons:

1389. 1389

      रागेन,rā·ge·na वच्चेन,vac·ce·na पस्सावेन,pas·sā·ve·na वातेन,vā·te·na उच्चालिङ्गपाणकदट्ठेन।uc·cā·liṅ·ga·pā·ṇa·ka·daṭ·ṭhe·na

      rāgena, vaccena, passāvena, vātena, uccāliṅgapāṇakadaṭṭhena.

      because of sensual desire, feces, urine, or wind, or because of being stung by caterpillars.

1390. 1390

      इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चहाकारेहिpañ·ca·hā·kā·re·hi अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ कम्मनियंkam·ma·ni·yaṃ होति।ho·ti

      Imehi kho, bhikkhave, pañcahākārehi aṅgajātaṁ kammaniyaṁ hoti.

      (Pāli only)

1391. 1391

      अट्ठानमेतं,aṭ·ṭhā·na·me·taṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अनवकासो,a·na·va·kā·so यंyaṃ तस्सtas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no रागेनrā·ge·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ कम्मनियंkam·ma·ni·yaṃ अस्स।as·sa

      Aṭṭhānametaṁ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṁ tassa bhikkhuno rāgena aṅgajātaṁ kammaniyaṁ assa.

      It’s impossible that that monk had an erection because of sensual desire.

1392. 1392

      अरहंa·ra·haṃ सो,so भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खु।bhik·khu

      Arahaṁ so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu.

      That monk is a perfected one.

1393. 1393

      अनापत्ति,a·nā·pat·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तस्सtas·sa भिक्खुनो।bhik·khu·no

      Anāpatti, bhikkhave, tassa bhikkhuno.

      There’s no offense for that monk.

1394. 1394

      अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दिवाdi·vā पटिसल्लीयन्तेनpa·ṭi·sal·lī·yan·te·na द्वारंdvā·raṃ संवरित्वाsaṃ·va·rit·vā पटिसल्लीयितुन्”ति।pa·ṭi·sal·lī·yi·tun

      Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, divā paṭisallīyantena dvāraṁ saṁvaritvā paṭisallīyitun”ti.

      But, monks, you should close the door when you are in seclusion during the day.”

1395. 1395

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भारुकच्छकोbhā·ru·kac·cha·ko भिक्खुbhik·khu सुपिनन्तेsu·pi·nan·te पुराणदुतियिकायpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kā·ya मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवित्वा—pa·ṭi·se·vit·vā

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhārukacchako bhikkhu supinante purāṇadutiyikāya methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevitvā—

      At one time a monk from Bhārukaccha dreamed that he had sexual intercourse with his ex-wife.

1396. 1396

      “अस्समणोas·sa·ma·ṇo अहं,a·haṃ विब्भमिस्सामी”ति,vib·bha·mis·sā·mī

      “assamaṇo ahaṁ, vibbhamissāmī”ti,

      He thought he was no longer a monastic and that he would have to disrobe.

1397. 1397

      भारुकच्छंbhā·ru·kac·chaṃ गच्छन्तोgac·chan·to अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ उपालिंu·pā·liṃ पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसि।ā·ro·ce·si

      bhārukacchaṁ gacchanto antarāmagge āyasmantaṁ upāliṁ passitvā etamatthaṁ ārocesi.

      While on his way to Bhārukaccha, he saw Venerable Upāli and told him what had happened.

1398. 1398

      आयस्माā·yas·mā उपालिu·pā·li एवमाह—e·va·mā·ha

      Āyasmā upāli evamāha—

      Venerable Upāli said,

1399. 1399

      “अनापत्ति,a·nā·pat·ti आवुसो,ā·vu·so सुपिनन्तेना”ति।su·pi·nan·te·nā

      “anāpatti, āvuso, supinantenā”ti.

      “There’s no offense when it occurs while dreaming.”

1400. 1400

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he सुपब्बाsu·pab·bā नामnā·ma उपासिकाu·pā·si·kā मुधप्पसन्नाmu·dhap·pa·san·nā होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena rājagahe supabbā nāma upāsikā mudhappasannā hoti.

      At one time in Rājagaha there was a female lay follower called Supabbā who had misplaced faith.

1401. 1401

      साsā एवंदिट्ठिकाe·vaṃ·diṭ·ṭhi·kā होति—ho·ti

      Sā evaṁdiṭṭhikā hoti—

      She had the view that

1402. 1402

      “याyā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ देतिde·ti साsā अग्गदानंag·ga·dā·naṃ देती”ति।de·tī

      “yā methunaṁ dhammaṁ deti sā aggadānaṁ detī”ti.

      a woman who gives sexual intercourse gives the highest gift.

1403. 1403

      साsā भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

      Sā bhikkhuṁ passitvā etadavoca—

      She saw a monk and said,

1404. 1404

      “एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवा”ति।pa·ṭi·se·vā

      “ehi, bhante, methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevā”ti.

      “Sir, come and have sexual intercourse.”

1405. 1405

      “अलं,a·laṃ भगिनि,bha·gi·ni नेतंne·taṃ कप्पती”ति।kap·pa·tī

      “Alaṁ, bhagini, netaṁ kappatī”ti.

      “It’s not allowable.”

1406. 1406

      “एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te ऊरुन्तरिकायū·run·ta·ri·kā·ya घट्टेहि,ghaṭ·ṭe·hi

      “Ehi, bhante, ūruntarikāya ghaṭṭehi,

      “Then rub between the thighs.

1407. 1407

      एवंe·vaṃ तेte अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti भविस्सती”तिbha·vis·sa·tī …पे…pe

      evaṁ te anāpatti bhavissatī”ti …pe…

      In this way there won’t be any offense for you. …

1408. 1408

      एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te नाभियंnā·bhi·yaṃ घट्टेहिghaṭ·ṭe·hi …

      ehi, bhante, nābhiyaṁ ghaṭṭehi …

      Then rub against the navel. …

1409. 1409

      एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te उदरवट्टियंu·da·ra·vaṭ·ṭi·yaṃ घट्टेहिghaṭ·ṭe·hi …

      ehi, bhante, udaravaṭṭiyaṁ ghaṭṭehi …

      Then rub against the stomach. …

1410. 1410

      एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te उपकच्छकेu·pa·kac·cha·ke घट्टेहिghaṭ·ṭe·hi …

      ehi, bhante, upakacchake ghaṭṭehi …

      Then rub in the armpit. …

1411. 1411

      एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te गीवायंgī·vā·yaṃ घट्टेहिghaṭ·ṭe·hi …

      ehi, bhante, gīvāyaṁ ghaṭṭehi …

      Then rub against the throat. …

1412. 1412

      एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te कण्णच्छिद्देkaṇ·ṇac·chid·de घट्टेहिghaṭ·ṭe·hi …

      ehi, bhante, kaṇṇacchidde ghaṭṭehi …

      Then rub against the ear-hole. …

1413. 1413

      एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te केसवट्टियंke·sa·vaṭ·ṭi·yaṃ घट्टेहिghaṭ·ṭe·hi …

      ehi, bhante, kesavaṭṭiyaṁ ghaṭṭehi …

      Then rub against a coil of hair. …

1414. 1414

      एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te अङ्गुलन्तरिकायaṅ·gu·lan·ta·ri·kā·ya घट्टेहिghaṭ·ṭe·hi …

      ehi, bhante, aṅgulantarikāya ghaṭṭehi …

      Then rub between the fingers. …

1415. 1415

      “एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te हत्थेनhat·the·na उपक्कमित्वाu·pak·ka·mit·vā मोचेस्सामि,mo·ces·sā·mi

      “ehi, bhante, hatthena upakkamitvā mocessāmi,

      Then I’ll make you discharge with my hand.

1416. 1416

      एवंe·vaṃ तेte अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti भविस्सती”ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

      evaṁ te anāpatti bhavissatī”ti.

      In this way there won’t be any offense for you.”

1417. 1417

      सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu तथाta·thā अकासि।a·kā·si

      So bhikkhu tathā akāsi.

      The monk acted accordingly.

1418. 1418

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1419. 1419

      “अनापत्ति,a·nā·pat·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

      “anāpatti, bhikkhu, pārājikassa.

      “There’s no offense entailing expulsion,

1420. 1420

      आपत्तिā·pat·ti सङ्घादिसेसस्सा”ति।saṅ·ghā·di·se·sas·sā

      Āpatti saṅghādisesassā”ti.

      but there’s an offense entailing suspension.”

1421. 1421

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सावत्थियंsā·vat·thi·yaṃ सद्धाsad·dhā नामnā·ma उपासिकाu·pā·si·kā मुधप्पसन्नाmu·dhap·pa·san·nā होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena sāvatthiyaṁ saddhā nāma upāsikā mudhappasannā hoti.

      At one time in Sāvatthī there was a female lay follower called Saddhā who had misplaced faith.

1422. 1422

      साsā एवंदिट्ठिकाe·vaṃ·diṭ·ṭhi·kā होति—ho·ti

      Sā evaṁdiṭṭhikā hoti—

      She had the view that

1423. 1423

      “याyā मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ देतिde·ti साsā अग्गदानंag·ga·dā·naṃ देती”ति।de·tī

      “yā methunaṁ dhammaṁ deti sā aggadānaṁ detī”ti.

      a woman who gives sexual intercourse gives the highest gift.

1424. 1424

      साsā भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

      Sā bhikkhuṁ passitvā etadavoca—

      She saw a monk and said,

1425. 1425

      “एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवा”ति।pa·ṭi·se·vā

      “ehi, bhante, methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevā”ti.

      “Sir, come and have sexual intercourse.”

1426. 1426

      “अलं,a·laṃ भगिनि,bha·gi·ni नेतंne·taṃ कप्पती”ति।kap·pa·tī

      “Alaṁ, bhagini, netaṁ kappatī”ti.

      “It’s not allowable.”

1427. 1427

      “एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te ऊरुन्तरिकायū·run·ta·ri·kā·ya घट्टेहिghaṭ·ṭe·hi …पे…pe

      “Ehi, bhante, ūruntarikāya ghaṭṭehi …pe…

      “Then rub between the thighs. …

1428. 1428

      एहि,e·hi भन्ते,bhan·te हत्थेनhat·the·na उपक्कमित्वाu·pak·ka·mit·vā मोचेस्सामि,mo·ces·sā·mi

      ehi, bhante, hatthena upakkamitvā mocessāmi,

      Then I’ll make you discharge with my hand.

1429. 1429

      एवंe·vaṃ तेte अनापत्तिa·nā·pat·ti भविस्सती”ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

      evaṁ te anāpatti bhavissatī”ti.

      In this way there won’t be any offense for you.”

1430. 1430

      सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu तथाta·thā अकासि।a·kā·si

      So bhikkhu tathā akāsi.

      The monk acted accordingly.

1431. 1431

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1432. 1432

      “अनापत्ति,a·nā·pat·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu पाराजिकस्स।pā·rā·ji·kas·sa

      “anāpatti, bhikkhu, pārājikassa.

      “There’s no offense entailing expulsion,

1433. 1433

      आपत्तिā·pat·ti सङ्घादिसेसस्सा”ति।saṅ·ghā·di·se·sas·sā

      Āpatti saṅghādisesassā”ti.

      but there’s an offense entailing suspension.”

1434. 1434

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ लिच्छविकुमारकाlic·cha·vi·ku·mā·ra·kā भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā भिक्खुनियाbhik·khu·ni·yā विप्पटिपादेसुंvip·pa·ṭi·pā·de·suṃ …

      Tena kho pana samayena vesāliyaṁ licchavikumārakā bhikkhuṁ gahetvā bhikkhuniyā vippaṭipādesuṁ …

      At one time in Vesālī some Licchavī youths grabbed a monk and made him commit misconduct with a nun. …

1435. 1435

      सिक्खमानायsik·kha·mā·nā·ya विप्पटिपादेसुंvip·pa·ṭi·pā·de·suṃ …

      sikkhamānāya vippaṭipādesuṁ …

      made him commit misconduct with a trainee nun. …

1436. 1436

      सामणेरियाsā·ma·ṇe·ri·yā विप्पटिपादेसुं।vip·pa·ṭi·pā·de·suṃ

      sāmaṇeriyā vippaṭipādesuṁ.

      made him commit misconduct with a novice nun.

1437. 1437

      उभोu·bho सादियिंसु।sā·di·yiṃ·su

      Ubho sādiyiṁsu.

      Both consented:

1438. 1438

      उभोu·bho नासेतब्बा।nā·se·tab·bā

      Ubho nāsetabbā.

      both should be expelled.

1439. 1439

      उभोu·bho नna सादियिंसु।sā·di·yiṃ·su

      Ubho na sādiyiṁsu.

      Neither consented:

1440. 1440

      उभिन्नंu·bhin·naṃ अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

      Ubhinnaṁ anāpatti.

      there is no offense for either.

1441. 1441

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ लिच्छविकुमारकाlic·cha·vi·ku·mā·ra·kā भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā वेसियाve·si·yā विप्पटिपादेसुंvip·pa·ṭi·pā·de·suṃ …

      Tena kho pana samayena vesāliyaṁ licchavikumārakā bhikkhuṁ gahetvā vesiyā vippaṭipādesuṁ …

      At one time in Vesālī some Licchavī youths grabbed a monk and made him commit misconduct with a sex worker. …

1442. 1442

      पण्डकेpaṇ·ḍa·ke विप्पटिपादेसुंvip·pa·ṭi·pā·de·suṃ …

      paṇḍake vippaṭipādesuṁ …

      made him commit misconduct with a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i>. …

1443. 1443

      गिहिनियाgi·hi·ni·yā विप्पटिपादेसुं।vip·pa·ṭi·pā·de·suṃ

      gihiniyā vippaṭipādesuṁ.

      made him commit misconduct with a female householder.

1444. 1444

      भिक्खुbhik·khu सादियि।sā·di·yi

      Bhikkhu sādiyi.

      The monk consented:

1445. 1445

      भिक्खुbhik·khu नासेतब्बो।nā·se·tab·bo

      Bhikkhu nāsetabbo.

      he should be expelled.

1446. 1446

      भिक्खुbhik·khu नna सादियि।sā·di·yi

      Bhikkhu na sādiyi.

      The monk did not consent:

1447. 1447

      भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

      Bhikkhussa anāpatti.

      there is no offense.

1448. 1448

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ लिच्छविकुमारकाlic·cha·vi·ku·mā·ra·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū गहेत्वाga·het·vā अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ विप्पटिपादेसुं।vip·pa·ṭi·pā·de·suṃ

      Tena kho pana samayena vesāliyaṁ licchavikumārakā bhikkhū gahetvā aññamaññaṁ vippaṭipādesuṁ.

      At one time in Vesālī some Licchavī youths grabbed two monks and made them commit misconduct with each other.

1449. 1449

      उभोu·bho सादियिंसु।sā·di·yiṃ·su

      Ubho sādiyiṁsu.

      Both consented:

1450. 1450

      उभोu·bho नासेतब्बा।nā·se·tab·bā

      Ubho nāsetabbā.

      both should be expelled.

1451. 1451

      उभोu·bho नna सादियिंसु।sā·di·yiṃ·su

      Ubho na sādiyiṁsu.

      Neither consented:

1452. 1452

      उभिन्नंu·bhin·naṃ अनापत्ति।a·nā·pat·ti

      Ubhinnaṁ anāpatti.

      there is no offense for either.

1453. 1453

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro वुड्ढपब्बजितोvuḍ·ḍha·pab·ba·ji·to भिक्खुbhik·khu पुराणदुतियिकायpu·rā·ṇa·du·ti·yi·kā·ya दस्सनंdas·sa·naṃ अगमासि।a·ga·mā·si

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro vuḍḍhapabbajito bhikkhu purāṇadutiyikāya dassanaṁ agamāsi.

      At one time a monk who had gone forth in old age went to see his ex-wife.

1454. 1454

      सा—“एहि,sā भन्ते,bhan·te विब्भमा”तिvib·bha·mā अग्गहेसि।ag·ga·he·si

      Sā—“ehi, bhante, vibbhamā”ti aggahesi.

      Saying, “Come and disrobe,” she grabbed him.

1455. 1455

      सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu पटिक्कमन्तोpa·ṭik·ka·man·to उत्तानोut·tā·no परिपति।pa·ri·pa·ti

      So bhikkhu paṭikkamanto uttāno paripati.

      Stepping backward, the monk fell on his back.

1456. 1456

      साsā उब्भजित्वाub·bha·jit·vā अङ्गजातेaṅ·ga·jā·te अभिनिसीदि।a·bhi·ni·sī·di

      Sā ubbhajitvā aṅgajāte abhinisīdi.

      She pulled up his robe and sat down on his penis.

1457. 1457

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1458. 1458

      “सादियिsā·di·yi त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खू”ति?bhik·khū

      “sādiyi tvaṁ, bhikkhū”ti?

      “Did you consent, monk?”

1459. 1459

      “नाहं,nā·haṃ भगवा,bha·ga·vā सादियिन्”ति।sā·di·yin

      “Nāhaṁ, bhagavā, sādiyin”ti.

      “I didn’t consent, sir.”

1460. 1460

      “अनापत्ति,a·nā·pat·ti भिक्खु,bhik·khu असादियन्तस्सा”ति।a·sā·di·yan·tas·sā

      “Anāpatti, bhikkhu, asādiyantassā”ti.

      “There’s no offense for one who doesn’t consent.”

1461. 1461

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu अरञ्ञेa·rañ·ñe विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu araññe viharati.

      At one time a certain monk was staying in the wilderness.

1462. 1462

      मिगपोतकोmi·ga·po·ta·ko तस्सtas·sa पस्सावट्ठानंpas·sā·vaṭ·ṭhā·naṃ आगन्त्वाā·gan·tvā पस्सावंpas·sā·vaṃ पिवन्तोpi·van·to मुखेनmu·khe·na अङ्गजातंaṅ·ga·jā·taṃ अग्गहेसि।ag·ga·he·si

      Migapotako tassa passāvaṭṭhānaṁ āgantvā passāvaṁ pivanto mukhena aṅgajātaṁ aggahesi.

      A young deer came to his place of urination, drank the urine, and took hold of his penis with its mouth.

1463. 1463

      सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu सादियि।sā·di·yi

      So bhikkhu sādiyi.

      The monk consented.

1464. 1464

      तस्सtas·sa कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ अहोसिa·ho·si …पे…pe

      Tassa kukkuccaṁ ahosi …pe…

      He became anxious …

1465. 1465

      “आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu आपन्नोā·pan·no पाराजिकन्”ति।pā·rā·ji·kan

      “āpattiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājikan”ti.

      “You’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.”

1466. 1466

      पठमपाराजिकंpa·ṭha·ma·pā·rā·ji·kaṃ समत्तं।sa·mat·taṃ

      Paṭhamapārājikaṁ samattaṁ.

      The first offense entailing expulsion is finished.

Sources. Sanskrit: Satyavedaḥ, the New Testament in Sanskrit (Calcutta Baptist Missionaries, 1851; J. Wenger’s revision of W. Carey’s version). Digital text © 2018 SanskritBible.in, via eBible.org, licensed CC BY-SA 4.0; changed here: arranged by verse and every word linked to the dictionary (links made automatically). Old Testament Sanskrit: the Old Testament in Sanskrit, Calcutta Baptist Mission Press, 1848–1852 (public domain), read by OCR from the Internet Archive scans of the Boston University School of Theology copy; unproofread, with machine clean-up only. Pāli Canon: Mahāsaṅgīti Tipiṭaka Buddhavasse 2500 (based on the Vipassana Research Institute’s Chaṭṭha Saṅgāyana edition), from SuttaCentral bilara-data, CC0; Devanagari and pronunciation made automatically from the Roman text. Pāli English: Bhikkhu Sujato (suttas) and Bhikkhu Brahmali (Vinaya), SuttaCentral, CC0. Pāli word meanings: the Pali Text Society’s Pali-English Dictionary (Rhys Davids & Stede), corrected reprint © The Pali Text Society, CC BY-NC 3.0, digital text from BuddhaDust; word matching automatic. English: King James Version (1769), public domain; words the translators added are in italics. Word meanings and pronunciations: Monier-Williams, Sanskrit–English Dictionary (1872), via this site’s Sanskrit dictionary (CC BY-SA 4.0); English↔Sanskrit word matches made automatically and may need checking.